-NRLF 


SB    S53    13b 


LIBRARY 

OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA. 

QIKT  OF 

...v^Ck^dL-cruJL. 

'Class 


THE  USE  OF  THE  PREPOSITIONS 
IN  APOLLONIUS  RHODIUS 

COMPARED  WITH  THEIR  USE 
IN   HOMER 


DISSERTATION 


SUBMITTED  TO  THE  FACULTY  OF  PHILOSOPHY 
OF  THE  CATHOLIC  UNIVERSITY  OF  AMERICA 
FOR  THE  DEGREE  OF  DOCTOR  OF  PHILOSOPHY 


_ 

'MICHAEL  M.  F.  OSWALD,  C.  S.  C. 


NOTRE  DAME  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 

NOTRE  DAME,  INDIANA 


The  writer  of  this  thesis  was  born  in  Fellerich, 
near  Treves,  Germany,  July  15,  1875.  From  the 
age  of  six  to  fourteen  he  attended  the  elementary 
school  in  his  native  place.  In  September,  1891, 
he  came  to  the  United  States  of  America  and  entered 
the  University  of  Notre  Dame,  Indiana,  from  which 
he  was  graduated  with  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of 
Arts  in  1898.  After  a  year  spent  in  the  Novitiate 
of  the  Congregation  of  Holy  Cross  at  Notre  Dame, 
he  was  sent  to  Washington  (Sept.  1899)  to  pursue 
his  theological  studies.  He  matriculated  also  in  the 
school  of  philosophy  at  the  Catholic  University, 
specializing  in  the  department  of  Classical  Philology. 
His  studies  in  that  department  were  Greek,  as  a 
major,  and  Sanskrit,  as  a  first  minor,  both  under 
Dr.  Boiling.  As  a  second  minor  he  took  Latin 
under  Dr.  Dunn.  In  addition  he  followed  courses 
of  lectures  in  Comparative  Philology,  Comparative 
Grammar  and  Gothic,  given  by  Dr.  Boiling;  and  a 
course  in  Romance  Philology  by  Dr.  Dunn.  Decem- 
ber 21,  1901,  he  was  ordained  to  the  priesthood,  and 
in  September,  1902,  after  three  years  of  continuous 
study  at  the  Catholic  University  at  Washington, 
D.  C.,  he  was  recalled  to  the  University  of  Notre 
Dame  as  Professor  of  Greek.  Here  also  he  finished 
this  work  as  one  of  the  requirements  for  the  degree 
of  Doctor  of  Philosophy. 


TO 

DR.  GEORGE  M.  BOUJNG, 

MY  ESTEEMED   PROFESSOR 

OF 
GREEK,    SANSKRIT    AND    COMPARATIVE    PHILOLOGY, 

THIS  WORK 

IS  CORDIALLY  AND  RESPECTFULLY 
DEDICATED. 


f  UNIVERS! 

V         or 

X^_frc:Rj< 


UNIVERSITY   * 

- 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 


A.      GENERAL  \\  ORKS  OF  REFERENCE. 

PAUL,  H.,  Principien  der  Sprachgeschichte,  3te  Aufl.;  Halle, 

1899. 
SCHOEMANN,  G.  F.,  Die  Lehre  von  den  Redeteilen;  Berlin, 

1862. 
STRONG,  LOGEMAN  AND  WHEELER,  The  History  of  Language; 

New  York,  1891. 
VOGRINZ,  G.,  Sprachgeschichtliche  Bemerk.  z.  Lehre  v.  d. 

Prapositionen;  Berl.  Phil.  Wochenschr.,  1885,  Sp.  225-230. 

B.      GRAMMATICAL  WORKS. 

BRUGMANN,  K.,   Griech.   Grammatik,   3te  Aufl.;   Miinchen, 

1900. 
CURTIUS,  G.,  Erlauterungen  zur  Griech.   Grammatik;  Prag, 

1875. 
DELBRUECK,  B.,  Vergleich.  Syntax  der  Indogerm.  Sprachen; 

Strassburg,  1893. 
DELBRUECK,  B.,  Syntaktische  Forschungen,  Vol.  V.,  Halle, 

1888. 
FAIRBANKS,    A.,   The  Dative  in  Sophocles;  Trans,   of  Am. 

Phil.  As.,  XVII.,  (1886),  pp.  78-126. 
Giu>ERSLEEVE,  B.  L.,  Problems  in  Greek  Syntax;  A.  J.  P., 

XXIII.,  1902. 
GOODELL,  T.  D.,  The  Genitive  in   Sophocles;  Trans,  of  Am. 

Phil.  As.,  XV.,  (1884),  pp.  4-35. 
JOOST,    A.,    Sprachgebrauch    Xenophons    in    der    Anabasis; 

Berlin,  1892. 
KRUEGER-POEKEL,  Griechische  Sprachlehre;  Leipzig,  1875- 

1894. 
KUEHNER-GERTH,    Ausf.    Grammatik  der  Griech.  Sprache; 

Leipzig,  1898. 


—  6  — 

MAIN,  J.  H.,  Locative  Expressions  in  the  Attic  Orators;  Johns 

Hopkins  Dissert.,  1892. 

MONRO,  D.  B.,    Homeric  Grammar,  (  2nd.  ed.);  Oxford,  1891. 
RUTHERFORD,  W.  G.,  The  New  Phrynichus;  London,  1881. 
RZACH,  A.,  Grammatische  Studien  zu  Apollonius  Rhodius; 

Wien,  1878. 
VOGRINZ,  G.,  Grammatik  des  Homerischen  Dialektes;  Pader- 

born,  1889. 

C.      WORKS  ON  PREPOSITIONS. 

AI,VIN,  A.  R.,  De  Usu  Praepositionis  irapd  apud  Thucydidem; 

Upsaliae,  1873. 
DEBBERT,  P.,  De  Praepositionum  ircpl  et  apQl  usu Thucydideo, 

Regimonti  Pr.,  1880. 
EGGERS,   J.  H.    C.,    Abhandlung    iiber  den  urspriinglichen 

Gebrauch  der  griechischen  Prapositionen;  Altona,  1846. 
FORM  AN,  L.,  The  Diflference  between  the  Genitive  and  Dative 

with  eirl  to  denote  Superposition;  Johns  Hopkins  Dissert., 

1894. 
GEYER,    M.,   Observationes  Epigraphicae  de  Praep.  Graec. 

Forma  et  Usu;  Altenburgi,  1880. 
GOUSH,    E.    J.,     De    Praep.    Usu    Thucydideo,     (P.I.-VL); 

Schweidnitz,  1859-1877. 
HAGGETT,  A.  S.,  A  Summary  of  the  Prepositions  in  Homer, 

in  "  Studies  in  Honor  of  Basil  L.  Gildersleeve " ;  Balti- 
*  more,  1902. 
KAHI,E,  A.,  De  tirt  Praepositionis  Usu  Euripideo,  (P.  L);  Mar- 

burgi  Cattorum,  1888. 
KRAPP,    F.,    Der    Substantivierte    Infinitiv,    abhangig    von 

Prapositionen   und  Propositions  -  Adverbien  in   der  his- 

torischen  Gracitat.    (Herodotus  bis  Zosimus);   Heidel- 
berg, 1892. 

KREBS,  F.,  Die  Prapositionen  bei  Polybius;  Wiirzburg,  1881. 
KRJEGER,  E.,  Die  Prapositionen  fat  und  irp6s  in  Xenophons 

Anabasis;  Gumbinnen,  1895. 
KCJEMMEI/,  C.,  De  Praepositionis  fat  cum  Casibus  Conjunctae 

Usu  Thucydideo;  Bonnae,  1875. 


—  7  — 

,  E.,  De  Praepositionum  Usu  apud  Aeschylum;  Upsaliae, 
1885. 
LUNDBERG,   C-  A.,    De  Ratione  Herodotea  Praepositionibus 

Utendi  a  Scriptoribus  Atticis  Di versa.  Upsaliae,  1869. 
LuTz,    L.,    Die  Prapositionen  bei    den   Attischen  Rednern; 

Neustadt  a.  d.  H.,  1887. 
LUTZ,  L.,  Die  Casus -  Adverbien   bei  den  Attischen  Rednern; 

Wiirzburg,  1891. 
METHNER,  J.,  De  Praepositionum  Graecarum  Natura  atque 

Usu;  Lesnae. 
MOMMSEN,  T.,  Beitr.  z.  d.  Lehre  v.  d.   Griech.   Pra'p.;  Berlin, 

1895. 
PIERSON,  W.,  Ueber  die  Tmesis  der  Prapositionen   vom  Ver- 

bum  bei  den   Griech.  Dichtern,  insbes.  bei  den  Dramati- 

kern  und  Lyrikern;  Rhein.  Mus.,  1857. 
PRZYBII,I,A,  K.,  De  Praepositionum  /cord  et  &v&  Usu  Lucianeo; 

Konigsberg,  1883. 

RAU,  F.  H.,  De  Praepositionis  irapd  Usu;  Lipsiae,  1870. 
ROSBERG,  M.,  De  Praepositionibus  apud  Homerum,  quae  cum 

solo  genitivi  Casu  conjunguntur;  Upsaliae,  1870. 
SCHUMACHER,  J. ,  De  Praepositionum  cum  tribus  casibus  Con- 

junctarum  Usu  Euripideo,  (P.  I.);  Bonnae,  1884. 
SOBOI,EWSKI,    S.,    De    Praepositionum     Usu     Aristophaneo; 

Mosquae,   1890. 
TYI.ER,   W.    S.,    On  the  Prepositions  in  the  Homeric  Poems; 

Trans,  of  Am.  Phil.  As.,  1874. 
WENTZEL,   E.,   De  Praepositionum  Tmesi  apud  Herodotum; 

Vratislaviae,  1829. 
WESTPHAL,  F.,  Die  Prapositionen  beiXenophon;  Freienwalde 

a.  Oder,  1888. 
WREDE,    F.,    De    Origine    Praepositionis  els  et  varia  apud 

Graecos  Scriptura;  Monasterii,  1868. 

D.      SPECIAL  WORKS  ON  APOU.ONIUS. 

BENEKE,    F.,    Beitrage  zur  Metrik  der  Alexandriner;  Berlin, 

1884. 
CHOI.EVIUS,  Ueber  den  griech.    Epiker  Apollonius   Rhodius; 

Konigsberg,  1882. 


GERHARD,  E.,  Lectiones  Apolloniauae;  Lipsiae,  1816. 

COUAT,  A.,  La  Poesie  Alexandrine;  Paris,  1882. 

GBRCKE,  A.,  Alexandrinische  Studien;  Rhein.    Mus.,    1887, 

1889. 
GOODWIN,    C.  J.,  Apollonius  Rhodius,  His  Figures,   Syntax 

and  Vocabulary;  Baltimore,  1891. 
KOFI,ER,  J.,  Gleichnisse    bei    Apollonius  Rhodius;  Brixen, 

1890. 
LA  ROCHE,  J.,   Der  Hexameter  bei  Apollonius,  Aratos  und 

Callimachos;  Wiener  Studien,  XXI.,  (1900),  pp.  161-197. 
LINSENBARTH,   O.,   De  Apollohii  Rhodii  Casuum  Syntaxi; 

Lipsiae,  1887. 
RZACH,   A.,   Gramniatische  Studien  zu  Apollonius  Rhodius; 

Wien,  1878. 
SEATON,  R.  C.,  Imitation  of  Homer  by  Apollonius;  Journal 

of  Philol.  XIX,,  1890. 
WEICHERT,  A.,  Ueber  das  Leben  u.  Gedicht  des  Apollonius 

von  Rhodus;  Meissen,  1821. 

K.      TEXTS. 

Apollonius  is  cited  according  to  the  small  edition  of  Merkel, 
except  that  in  the  matter  of  accentuation  the  traditional  rules 
are  followed.    The  "Editio  Major"  of  Merkel  (  Lipsiae,  1854) 
was  unfortunately  inaccessible.     The  Teubner-Text  has  been 
used  for  the  citations  from   Homer  and  other  authors.     Edi- 
tions of  Apollonius  and  Homer  frequently  consulted  are  : 
BRUNCK,  R.,  Apollonii  Rhodii  Argonautica;  Lipsiae,  1810. 
LEHRS,  F.  S.,  Apollonii  Rhodii  Argonautica;  Parisiis,  1862. 
SEATON,  R.  C.,  Apollonii  Rhodii  Argonautica;  Oxonii,   1900. 
WELI,AUER,      A.,     Apollonii     Rhodii    Argonautica,     (Cum 

Scholiis);  Lipsiae,  1828. 

AMEIS  -HENTZE,  Homers  Odyssee;  Leipzig,  1895. 
LA  ROCHE,  J.,  Homers  Ilias;  Leipzig,  1883. 

F.      INDICES  AND  LKXICA. 

EBEI<ING,  H.,  Lexicon  Homericum;  Lipsiae,  1885. 
GEHRING,  A.,  Index  Homericus;  Lipsiae,  1891. 
NAUCK,  A.,  Tragicae  Dictionis  Index;  Petropoli,  1892. 
SEBER,  W.,  Index  Vocabulorum  in  Homeri  lliade  et  Odyssea; 
Oxonii,  1780. 


PREFACE. 


The  study  of  Apollonius  Rhodius  offers  many 
points  of  special  interest  to  the  classic  student,  on 
account  of  the  almost  endless  variety  of  epic  usages 
reflected  from  the  Homeric  poems.  How  far  Apol- 
lonius succeeded  in  imitating  Homer  has  been  shown 
(0  f°r  the  forms  by  Rzach;  (2)  for  the  vocabulary  by 
Merkel,  (Prolegomena),  by  Schmidt,  (De  Apollonii 
Rhodii  Elocutione,  Muenster,  1853),  and  by  Seaton, 
(Journal  of  Philology,  XIX.,  1890);  (3)  for  the 
syntax  of  the  cases  by  Cholevius  and  Linsenbarth; 

(4)  for  the  figures,  syntax  and vocabulary 'by  Goodwin; 

(5)  for  the  participle  by  Boiling. 

The  aim  of  the  present  work  is  to  compare  Apol- 
lonius with  Homer  in  prepositional  usages.  The 
prepositions  make  a  good,  though  rugged,  field  for 
comparison,  because  the  standard  taken  by  Apollonius 
had  to  be  not  only  negative,  by  avoiding  post- Homeric 
uses,  but  also  positive,  by  adopting  forms  and  uses 
which  had  never  crossed  the  boundaries  of  epic  poetry 
and  were,  for  that  reason,  artificial.  For  many 
valuable  suggestions  in  the  work  I  wish  to  acknowl- 
edge my  indebtedness  to  Dr.  Boiling.  To  Dr. 
Miller  of  the  Johns  Hopkins  University  I  am  grate- 
ful for  the  final  examination  of  the  manuscript. 


INTRODUCTION. 


The  classification  of  the  parts  of  speech,  generally 
accepted  by  grammarians,  is  convenient  but  not 
accurate.  When  examined  in  the  light  of  compara- 
tive linguistic  science,  the  division  is  found  to  be  in 
a  large  measure  arbitrary.  The  cardinal  difficulty 
lies  in  the  fact  that  words  are  grouped  together  and 
differentiated  either  according  to  form,  or  according 
to  function-,  but  the  differences  of  form  and  function 
do  not  always  go  parallel.  Hence  a  division  accord- 
ing to  one  does  not  fit  the  other.  In  the  development 
of  a  language  the  original  meaning  of  a  word  often 
fades  and  the  word  may  even  pass  from  one  part  of 
speech  to  another.  This  process  of  change  is  well 
recognized  as  one  of  the  most  interesting  phenomena 
in  the  history  of  language.  Cf.  Paul,  Principien  der 
Sprachgeschichte,  p.  312;  also  B.  L.  Gildersleeve, 
A.  J.  P.,  XXIII. ,  p.  14. 

As  regards  the  form  of  the  prepositions,  some  un- 
doubtedly originated  in  noun-cases;  e.  g.  dfiyt,  dvrt, 
and  ™pi  are  locatives,  fal?  is  probably  also  a  locative 
without  the  suffix.  The  form  with  suffix  is  seen  in 
Sanskrit  upari,  Greek  u-xdp,  if=*u7:gpt.  Other  pre- 
positions show  adverbial  suffixes.  Here  belong  most 
of  the  pseudo-prepositions.  Others,  as  <^«,  xapdy  ffuv, 
cannot  be  classified.  Cf.  Curtius,  Erlauterungen, 
ch.  17;  Brugmann,  Griechische  Grammatik,  p.  430; 
Vogrinz,  Gram,  des  horn.  Dialektes,  p.  88. 

Also  in  regard  to  function,    the  prepositions  are 


—  12  — 

perhaps  the  most  unsettled  part  of  speech,  shifting 
from  one  function  to  another  and  finally  laying  claim 
to  several  functions  at  the  same  time.  Thus  the  im- 
proper prepositions  are  used  as  simple  independent 
adverbs  and  in  case- construction;  while  the  preposi- 
tions proper  share  three  distinct  functions,  i.  e.  they 
may  be  used  :  (a)  as  simple  adverbs,  (b)  in  composi- 
tion or  tmesis  with  verbs,  or  (c)  in  case-regimen. 
The  name  ' '  pre-position  "  ( 7tp6-#£fft$t  prae-positio  ) 
has  come  chiefly  from  the  second  usage,  and  partly 
also  from  the  last,  because  the  normal  position  in 
post-Homeric  Greek  was  preposition  +  case.  The 
Alexandrian  grammarians  looked  upon  the  post- 
position in  Homer  (  case  +  preposition  )  as  a  devia- 
tion from  the  ordinary  usage;  though  there  are 
strong  reasons  for  believing  that  in  Indo-European 
the  prepositions  in  the  construction  with  cases  were 
post-positive.  Cf.  Delbriick,  Vergl.  Syn.  Vol.  i.,  Sec., 
275;  Vol.  in.,  Sec.  44. 

Tyler,  The  Prepositions  in  the  Homeric  Poems, 
Am.  Phil.  Ass.,  Vol.  V.,p.  7,  says  that"  of  all  the  parts 
of  speech  the  preposition  has  been  the  most  unfortu- 
nate in  its  nomenclature,  being  the  only  part  of 
speech  whose  name  expresses  nothing  of  its  nature  or 
office,  but  merely  its  position  with  reference  to  the 
verb  of  which  it  is  the  prefix,  or  the  noun  which  it 
precedes;  and  that  position,  usual  indeed,  but  by  no 
means  universal,  still  less  essential  or  founded  in  the 
nature  of  things.  If  it  must  be  named  from  an  acci- 
dental circumstance  instead  of  an  essential  character- 
istic, its  position  is  so  generally  a  /^-position  as 


—  13  — 

perhaps  to  justify  the  name  on  the  principle  of 
logicians  :  *  a  potiori  nomenfit. '  ' ' 

For  a  correct  understanding  of  the  so-called  prepo- 
sitions, nothing  is  more  important  than  the  generally 
admitted  fact  that  they  belong  ultimately  to  the  same 
category  of  words  as  the  adverbs.  Cf.  Kriiger- 
Pokel,  P.  II.,  68  1-2;  Kiihner-Gerth,Sec.  443;  Brug- 
mann,  Gr.  Gr.3  p.  430;  Vogrinz,  Gram.  d.  Horn.  Dial, 
p.  206;  Monro,  Horn.  Gram.,  Sec.  175;  Schoemann, 
Die  Lehre  von  den  Redeteilen,  p.  138.  Strong,  The 
History  of  Language,  p.  361;  says:  "  Prepositions 
were  once  adverbs,  serving  to  denote  more  closely  the 
direction  of  the  verbal  action;  as  to  go  in,  to  carry  off, 
to  throw  up,  to  fall  down.  They  then  became  dis- 
placed, i.  e.  detached  from  the  verb,  and  came  to 
belong  to  the  noun,  furthering  the  disappearance  of 
its  case-endings  and  assuming  their  office. ' ' 

In  much  the  same  way  is  the  course  of  the  develop- 
ment of  the  different  functions  of  the  prepositions 
mapped  out  by  Delbriick,  Synt.  Forsch.,  Vol.  V.,p.  126; 
Vergl.  Synt.,  Vol.  L,  p.  664;  Vogrinz,  Berl.  Phil. 
Wochenschr.,  1885,  Sp.  225-230.  Compare  also 
Monro,  Horn.  Gram.,  Sec.  178;  Kiihner-Gerth, 
Sec.  428,  4-5. 

The  strongest  proof  that  the  prepositions  were 
originally  adverbs,  is  to  be  found  in  the  Homeric 
language,  where  we  have  the  actual  transition-period 
from  adverbs  to  prepositions  and  where  consequently 
we  find  cases  of  these  words  in  which  it  is  hard  to 
decide  whether  their  adverbial  or  prepositional  nature 
predominates. 

Accordingly,  after  disposing  of  the  improper  pre- 


-14- 

positions  (Chap.  I. ),  we  proceed  to  take  up  the 
prepositions:  (a)  as  simple  adverbs  (Chap.  II.)  and 
(b)  in  tmesis  with  the  verb  (Chap.  III.).  Then,  dis- 
cussing briefly  the  reasons  why  prepositions  are  rarer 
in  poetry  than  in  prose  and  pointing  out :  (a)  the 
examples  in  Apollonius  of  the  simple  cases  and  (b) 
the  examples  with  the  suffixes  in-tfev  and-^e  to  denote 
the  local  relations  whence,  where  and  wkither,  which 
in  prose  would  usually  be  expressed  by  a  preposition 
with  its  case  (Chap.  IV.),  — we  pass  on  to  the  pre- 
positions in  case  construction  (Chap.  V.),  and  con- 
clude with  the  prepositions  in  adverbial  phrases 
(Chap.  VI.). 

It  will  be  noticed  at  a  glance  that  chapters  I.,  II., 
III.,  and  IV.,  belong  almost  exclusively  to  the 
domain  of  poetry  (chiefly  epic),  while  in  chapters 
V.  and  VI.  the  poetic  element  appears  at  once  in 
the  large  bulk  of  the  examples  of  prepositions  to  de- 
note local  relations  and  also  in  such  metaphoric 
usages  as  are  distinctively  poetic. 

Some  uses,  which  are  found  in  Homer,  do  not 
occur  in  the  Argonautica.  The  reason  for  this  is  not 
always  easy  to  find.  The  Homeric  examples  are 
generally  few  in  number,  and  at  first  sight  it  would 
seem  to  be  the  easiest  explanation  to  assume  that  the 
absence  of  these  constructions  in  Apollonius  is  purely 
accidental,  the  bulk  of  his  work  being  only  one-fifth 
of  that  of  Homer.  This  may  sometimes  have  been 
the  case;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  in  accordance  with 
the  tendency  of  imitative  authors  to  overdo  rare  con- 
structions, we  might  expect  to  find  in  Apollonius  a 
large  increase  of  just  such  constructions  as  are  repre- 


-  -15  - 

sented  in  Homer  by  only  a  few  examples.  The  only 
restrictions  to  this  tendency  in  the  case  of  Apollonius 
seem  to  have  been  two  principles  diametrically  op- 
posed to  each  other.  ( i )  When  the  Homeric  con- 
struction is  one  that,  like  i^rd  with  the  genitive,  or 
xpos  with  the  dative,  or  even  napd  with  the  accusative 
of  the  person,  afterwards  became  the  ordinary  prose 
construction,  Apollonius  avoided  it,  because  at  his 
time  it  was  felt  to  be  prosaic.  (2)  On  the  other 
hand,  a  construction  like  dvd  with  the  genitive  or 
dative,  that  never  obtained  a  solid  foothold  even  in 
later  poetry,  was  possibly  felt  to  be  too  archaic  and 
too  strange,  and  was  for  that  reason  avoided  by  Apol- 
lonius. Similarly  he  avoids  forms  like  sbt  for  &  as 
too  poetic,  and  ^u?,  aWu,  etc.,  as  too  prosaic.  • 

Little  work  having  been  done  in  the  department 
of  the  Homeric  prepositions  ' '  by  the  statistical  har- 
row "  (  A.  J.  P.,  XXIII.,  p.  25  ),  Ebeling's  Lexicon 
Homericum  and  Gehring's  Index  Homericus  had  to 
supply  this  deficiency.  Of  valuable  assistance  for  the 
Homeric  statistics  was  Haggett's  contribution  to  the 
"Studies  in  Honor  of  Basil  L.  Gildersleeve. "  Also 
the  chapters  on  the  prepositions  in  the  Homeric 
grammars  of  Monro  and  Vogrinz  have  afforded  a 
convenient  outline  for  the  principal  Homeric  usages. 
Sobolewski  (  for  Aristophanes )  and  Lutz  ( for  the 
Orators)  have  been  most  frequently  consulted  to 
establish  the  Attic  prose-usage.  For  the  later  prose 
Polybius  has  sometimes  been  cited  through  the  dis- 
sertation of  Krebs.  Finally,  the  explanation  for  some 
deviations  from  Homer  I  sought  in  the  *  *  Epic  Cycle ' ' 
and  in  Tragedy;  also  in  Herodotus,  because  to  the 


—  i6  — 

later   Greek   writers   "Ionic"    and    "poetic"   were 
synonymous  terms. 

It  is  to  be  expected  that  in  the  classification  of  the 
prepositions  with  all  their  epic  peculiarities,  some 
doubtful  cases  will  come  up,  which  can  hardly  be  put 
in  any  fixed  category.  Here  belong  especially  :  (a) 
examples  in  which  the  preposition  might  be  taken  as 
a  simple  adverb,  or  with  the  verb  (tmesis),  or  with 
the  noun  (case-construction);  and  (b)  examples  of 
prepositions  in  case-regimen,  but  standing  on  the 
boundary  line  of  two  different  meanings,  as  causal 
and  instrumental.  As  regards  the  settling  of  some 
of  these  puzzling  examples,  the  words  of  Goethe  hold 
good  :  "Es  irrt  der  Mensch,  so  lang  er  strebt." 


CHAPTER  I. 


THE  IMPROPER  OR  PSEUDO  -  PREPOSITIONS. 

The  improper  prepositions,  mostly  adverbs  of  place, 
hold  an  important  position  in  poetry.  Like  the 
proper  prepositions,  they  govern  cases,  and  are 
especially  frequent  with  the  genitive.  The  only 
essential  distinction  between  an  improper  and  a 
proper  preposition  is  that  the  former  never  entered 
into  composition  with  verbs  as  the  latter  did 

A  large  portion  of  the  pseudo-  prepositions  or  case- 
adverbs  belongs  to  the  epic  language  exclusively. 
Some  are  loose  compounds  ^apd^sra  rather  than 
,  formed  from  a  preposition  and  an  adverb; 

g.      dvrt-7t£pr)$£vy     d 


xar-avrtxpo,  xa.T-£v-avTiovy  xaT-o-xtfffte,  fJ.£T  oTctff&s,  etc.     Cf. 

Vogrinz,  Gram.  d.  horn.  Dial.,  p.  230;  Monro,  Horn. 
Gram.,  Sec.  228. 

In  the  treatment  of  the  improper  prepositions,  no 
better  method  could  be  followed  than  that  pointed 
out  by  T.  Mommsen  in  his  *  *  Beitrage  zu  der  L,ehre 
von  denGriech.  Prapositionen  ";  Excurs  III.,  Casus- 
Adverbia,  pp.  764-766;  viz.  to  discuss  from  a  com- 
parative point  of  view  the  questions  (a)  of  frequency, 
(b)  of  position  and  (c)  of  case-government.  Stylistic 
peculiarities  occur  in  almost  every  writer.  Apollonius 
has  especially  many,  which  will  be  pointed  out  in 
their  respective  places. 

17 


--  i8  — 
FREQUENCY. 

As  regards  the  frequency  of  the  improper  preposi- 
tions compared  with  that  of  the  prepositions  proper, 
Mommsen  says  *  '  dass  die  Dichter  iiberhaupt  sie  weit 
haufiger  und  weit  mannigfaltiger  haben  als  de  Pros- 
aiker.  Im  Durchschnitt  ist  das  Verhaltniss  der  C.  A. 
zu  den  Prapositionen  in  der  Poesie  hochstens  wie 
1:6  (Sophocles,  Apol.  Rhod.),  mindestens  wie  1:13 
(Pindar,  Lyrici  Min.),  das  mittlere  Verhaltniss  ist 
i :8  (Homer,  Hesiod,  lambogr.  ),  oder  1:9  (Euri- 
pides)  In  der  Attischen  Prosa  ist  das  Durch- 

schnittsverhaltniss  1:18,  in  der  altern  (Thucyd.) 
ein  geringeres  1:22  (24);  die  lonische  Prosa  hat 
einen  starkern  Verbrauch  von  C.  A.  (1:12),  des- 
gleichen  Antiphon;  Xenophon  und  Platon  (1:10), 
(9),  gehen  am  weitsten,  nahern  sich  also  der 
Poesie/' 

Homer  has  1112  examples  of  improper  preposi- 
tions in  case-construction;  Apollonius  has  275.  This 
gives  for  Apollonius  one  improper  preposition  per 
21.2  lines;  for  Homer  one  per  24.9  lines,  and  shows, 
as  does  Mommsen' s  calculation,  a  slight  gain  in 
Apollonius.  The  adverbs  which  Apollonius  construes 
with  cases  more  frequently  than  Homer  are  chiefly  : 
(Apol.  7,  Horn.  9),  gxyrt  (Apol  16,  Horn.  3), 
(Apol.  12,  Horn.  2),  and  igdrt  (Apol.  4, 
Horn.  2  ).  On  the  other  hand  Apollonius  shows  a 
marked  decrease  in  a\>ra  (Apol.  i,  Horn.  23),  and 
7r/>o<r#£(v)  (  Apol.  i,  Horn.  35). 

POSITION. 

According  to  Mommsen,  the  pre-positives  hold  in 


Homer  a  relation  to  the  post-positives  as  eight  to  six. 
In  Apollonius  I  find  142  prepositives  and  97  post- 
positives,  showing  that  Apollonius  (3:2)  uses  the 
prepositives  in  a  slightly  larger  proportion  than 
Homer  (8:6). —  Homer  has  70  cases  of  inter-posita\ 
Apollonius  has  36,  which  is  a  large  increase  over 
Homer,  in  proportion  to  his  work. 

It  is  surprising  that  in  the  use  of  pre-positives  and 
post-positives  Apollonius  leans  more  toward  the 
prose  usage  (4:1  ),  whereas  the  common  tendency  in 
poetry  was  for  the  post-positives  to  increase.  Thus 
in  Pindar,  Aeschylus  and  Sophocles  the  prepositives 
balance  with  the  post-positives,  but  in  Euripides  the 
post-positives  increase  considerably. 

WITH   CASES. 

From  the  following  comparison  of  the  statistics  of 
Homer  and  Apollonius  it  is  evident  that  the  use  with 
the  genitive  increases  in  Apollonius,  while  the  use 
with  the  dative,  and  especially  with  the  accusative 
decreases  in  accordance  with  the  general  tendency  of 
the  language. 

Homer:  —  Gen   750,  Dat.  250,  Ace.  112. 

Apollonius:  —  Gen.  235,  Dat.  35,  Ace.  5. 

Apollonius  has  altogether  82  improper  prepositions: 
69  with  the  genitive,  6  with  the  dative,  one  (  nip£  ) 
with  the  acusative;  5  with  the  genitive  and  dative, 
one  (  sl'ffw  )  with  the  genitive  and  accusative. 

For  the  greater  part,  Apollonius  imitated  the 
Homeric  usage.  He  differs  from  Homer  chiefly  in 
the  large  number  of  case-adverbs  (  13  c.  gen.,  3  c. 
dat,  i  c.  ace.),  which  do  not  occur  in  Homer  at  all; 


2O  

also  in  using  words  as  case-adverbs  (  12  c.  gen.,  4  c. 
dat.),  which  in  Homer  are  used  only  in  an  absolute 
sense.  With  e?<rw  Apollonius  has  reversed  the 
Homeric  order.  Homer  uses  it  3  times  with  the 
genitive  and  49  times  with  the  accusative;  but  Apol- 
lonius has  it  7  times  with  the  genitive  and  only  twice 
with  the  accusative. 

A.   WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 

a)    APOLLONIUS  AGREES  WITH    HOMER. 

*Ay%t:  —  I.  25  GxoniYis  Hi(i7&tfi$o$  ayxi', 
similar  examples  are:  I.  67,  553;  II.  94;  III. 
219;  IV.  209.  For  Homer  compare:  0  117,  I 
43,  K  161,  0362; /?  417,  etc. 

'Ay^oS^: —  I.  37  opsog  ^V^TI'LOV  dy%6$i; 
also  II.  1047;  IV.  484.  Of.  E412,  <P  762;  v  103. 
Homer  never  uses  the  word  in  an  absolute 
sense,  which  is  found  in  Apollonius:  IV.  330, 
336,  etc. 

*Avev&ev: — I.  855  eHpa#/l>7og  AvevSev,  also 
III.  641,  781,  987,  1030;  IV.  744,  1008.— Cf. 
E  185,  O  78,  X  88;  YI  192,  n  239,  etc.  The  prose 
form  avsv  is  not  found  in  Apollonius,  though  it 
occurs  nine  times  with  the  genitive  in  Homer: 
P  407,  *  387,  etc. 

"Avra:— HI.  44  &vra  Svpdov.  Cf.  B  626, 
T  69,  73,  75;  a  334,  etc. 

'Avria: — I.  790  dvr'ux,  beanoivw,  IV.  1710 


21 


dvrla  vjaov.  Cf.  *  481,  T  80,  88, 
113,  118;  etc.  In  Homer  dvriais  always  con- 
strued with  a  case;  in  Apollonius  it  occurs  also 
in  an  absolute  sense,  as  in  I.  799,  III.  287. 

*A7tdv6V&£(v): — I.  863  dndvsv&s  yvvaix&v; 
also  II.  874,  1210;  III.  114,  333;  IV.  371.  Cf. 
A  48,  549,  H  30,  etc. 

3A7tov6<J<pi: — III.  9  Atog  8*  avvolo  xai  d/t/Uoi' 
anovovfyi  &etiv.  Cf.  A  541;  e  113,  etc. 

TA<T<roK-IV.  780  faaov  iota.  Cf.  X  4;  p  303. 

*Ar£p: — I.  397  ripGXJi'drep  a^o)^;  II.  55  Ttd- 

drep,  1009  xaudruv  drgp.  Cf.  A  498,  A 
376,  E  473,  753;  I  604,  0  292,  O  50,  etc. 

vA^ptg: — III.  874  /Uwrifg  zrtiyovvibog  d^ptg, 
1382  d^ptg  xoXwv.  Cf.  a  370,  where  Homer 
uses  d^pt  in  a  temporal  sense.  The  form  d^pt  is 
not  used  by  Apollonius.  In  two  passages  Apol- 
lonius uses  d^ptg  to  emphasize  a  preposition 
(like  Latin  "usque  ad");  III.  762  vno  vsiarov 
Iviov  d^ptg,  and  IV.  1401  d^ptg  sri  axvyarLV. 

Ata^Ttepeg: — II.  319  tdov  .  .  ^ta^Ttepeg;  IV. 
1251  haiiTtepes  .  .  nerpdav.  Cf.  M  429,  T  362, 
etc. 

9Eyyt53t:— I.  633  syyvSi  vjoov-  also  III.  926; 
IV.  1072,  1442.  Cf.  Z  317,  I  76;  v.  156,  co  358. 
The  prose  form  JyyiJg,  which  occurs  forty-six 
times  in  Homer,  is  not  used  by  Apollonius. 

Elvexa:—  I.  666   TOT)  ...    elvexa-,    II.    180 


—  22 


elvexa  fiavroavv^  also  II.  261;  III.  721;  IV. 
191,  398,  648,  807,  1097.  Cf.  A  174,  r  100, 
128,  Z  328,  356,  H  89,  T  58,  X  236,  *P  608,  II 
501;  5  145,  etc.  Of  the  variants,  evexev  occurs 
once  with  the  genitive  in  Apollonius:  IV.  364 
G&V  evexev  xafidruv,  with  which  compare  for 
Homer  p  288,  310.  The  form  elvexev,  which  is 
not  Homeric,  is  found  four  times  with  the  geni- 
tive in  the  Argonautica:  II.  216  avryjc;  elvexev 
c'Hp>7g;  similarly  II.  1133;  IV.  1032,  1714. 
Here  may  be  mentioned  also  ovvexa,  which 
is  used  only  absolutely  in  Homer,  but  in  Apol- 
lonius it  governs  the  genitive  three  times:  I. 
1325  =  III.  356  olo  Ttep  ovvex,  III.  370  rtiv 
yap  o<pe  [Aere^eftev  ovvex  e&^Ttei.  In  these 
passages  ovvsxa  is  equivalent  in  meaning  to 
evexa.  The  absolute  sense  "because"  is  seen  in 
I.  615;  III.  246,  334,  470,  626,  1124;  IV.  791. 
Cf.  y  53,  61,  etc.  The  prose  form  evexa, 
which  occurs  twenty-six  times  in  Homer  with 
the  genitive,  is  found  only  once  in  Apollonius 
(IV.  1521),  and  only  in  the  absolute  sense 
"because." 

'E*d$:— I.  84  sxa$  Ko^co^;  similarly  11.134, 
858;  III.  207;  IV.  131,  566,  1649.  For  Homeric 
parallels  compare  E  791,  I  246,  N  263;  y  260, 
3  99,  etc. 


-23- 

:  —  II.  678=IV.  1660  xapeufav 
exdrefiw.  Cf.  T  340,  *P  813. 

"Exyin:—  1)  Of  gods,  "by  the  aid  of:''  I. 
116  Aiuvvaoio  Bxrfti.  Cf.  o  319,  T  86,  i;  42.  This 
is  the  only  use  in  Homer.  Apollonius  uses  it  also: 

2)  Of  persons:  I.  902  He^U'ao  eaoyri;  likewise 
1. 334;  II.  253,  297,  526,  757;  III.  621, 1059;  IV. 
1085,  1197. 

3)  Of  things,  "for  the  sake  of,"  as  equivalent 
to  elvexa:  I.  773  ^t^or^rog  exw,  II.  1156=111. 
266  xredvav  *  A^dftairog   ex^n-,   IV.   390  exqri 
ye    Gvv&SOidwv,     1016     GXYIVL    fiapyoavvTjg.     Cf. 
Find.  N.  8,  81;  Aesch.  Choe.  701;  Soph.  Phil. 
669;  Eurip.  Med.  1235.     In  Homer  /OT^TI  (dat. 
of  ioTyg)  is  used  of  gods  and  mortals;  cf.  2  396, 
T  9;  YI  214,  A  384,  a  234;  also  Apollonius  III. 
542,  IV.  1030.     In   Aeschylus,  Pro.  557,  it  is 
used  of  the  occasion,  as    ioran  'yd^ov  "on  the 
occasion  of  the  marriage." 

"Exro&cv: — I.  1037  d&ew&og  zxro^sv  arris; 
III.  1200  ndrov  exroSev.  Cf.  a  132;  also 
Aesch.  Pers.  871,  Sept.  629.  In  IV.  520  Apol- 
lonius has  the  adverbial  prepositional  phrase  sx 
r6&ev  (not  exro&ev  as  Brunck,  Wellauer  and 
Lehrs  would  have  it.) 

i: — I.  243.  yaiy]<;  Hava%ad$og 
I.  659  =  I.  793,  IV.  47,  1180 

Other  examples  are:     I.   833,  1291; 


-  24- 

III.  373,  1198;  IV.  1296,  1546,  1755.  For  Ho- 
mer compare  0  391,  X  439, — the  only  two  pas- 
sages in  which  he  uses  the  word.  Apollonius 
has  it  in  an  absolute  sense  in  III.  255. 

'Exrog: — II.  1174  sxrog  dvypeipeog  7ie/U 
VYIQV\  III.  472  &YIIWV  re  xal  acrreog  sxrog  efiyaav 
Similarly  IV.  211,  1655.  Cf.  I  67,  T  49,  5  678, 
etc. 

*Exroa$s:—I.  GMnvtew    exroa&e;  II.  894 
exrocSe.     Cf.  I  552;  ^  148?  etc. 

— I  929  "PoLtetdbog  $v$o&ev  dxr^g. 
Cf.Z  247,11  161;  8  74. 

"Ev&oSr— I.  936  YlportovTibog  evboSt,;  similar 
examples  are:  II.  346,  1265;  IV.  333,  508, 
1374,  1383.  Cf.  2  287;  h.  Cer.  355. 

"Ez'fW: —  I.  906  Tishaoi$o$  ev8ov  'I 
Cf.  T  13,  *  200,  etc. 

(r): —  II.  846 

III.   1158  ^/It^r^pog  $vep&ev,  IV. 
535   noXkbv    evepSw  ov8eo$.     Cf.  0  16,  A  252. 

The  form  vep&e(v),  which  in  Homer  is 
twice  construed  with  the  genitive  (E  204,  h 
302),  is  used  thus  by  Apollonius  only  in  con- 
nection with  a  preposition,  as  I.  155  vep&e  xard 
^S'Oi'og,  745  vep&ev  vnex  fia^olo. 

'Ez^rog:  —  I.  782  nvheav  re  xal  aorsog  h- 
rog.  Cf.  M  374,  380,  etc. 

*Evroa$e(v): — II.  761  /.teydpcw  evroa^ III. 


-25- 

754  (7T>7$«ov  evvoaSev;  also  IV.  1066,  1133, 
1778.  For  Homer  compare  A  454;  a  380,  j3 
145,  etc. 

'E££n:—  II.  784  =  IV.  250,  430  !££n  x<£ 
vou  (temp.);  IV.  789  g£m  vynvriw.  Cf.  I.  106; 
3245. 

In  I.  976  en  is  best  taken  with  vsov  in 
the  sense  of  "recently," — ^  alone  governing 
Tto/rpog.  Another  possibility  would  be  to  change 
veov  to  the  genitive  VEOV  governed  by  s%-eri.  Cf. 
Kuehner-Gerth,  p.  540  A. 

*E£o%a: — I.  859  £^o^a  &  d/l/Uoz'  d^avdruv. 
Cf.  H  257,  H  113,  134. 

'I^g:  _  I.  1032  (^g  solo;  II.  254  <roi)  ^ 
&v$.  Cf.  E  849,  0  322,  M  106,  254,  H  584,  P 
340,  n  471;  o  511,  etc. 

KaSvnepSs:  —  III.  581  ^aai^g  xa&VTtep&e 
xoMww,  IV.  1377  xaSvnep&s  ^a^daa^.  Cf.  y 
170,  3  279,  etc. 

Karavtixpv: — II.  626  sfyie^Fvoto  xatavnxpv 
(xar'  dvtixptf)  UeMao.  Cf.  x  559=^  64,— the 
only  example  in  Homer. 

KaroTttcr^e:— II.  273  rdcdv  5'  av  xaroTtioSe. 
Cf.  ^  6=  (i  148. 

AaS'p^:  —  II.  125  /ld^p>7  €i>pp(^G)^  re  xvv&v 
avt&v  re  vo^v.  Cf.  E  269;  p  43;  h.  Cer.  240. 

MeGYiyv: — IV.  1573  (isGyyi)  \  ^riy^Liv^v.  Cf. 
0  259,  560,  I  549,  A  448,  570,  N  568,  II  396;  x 


—  26  — 

93,  442,  459,  etc.  Apollonius  reversed  the  Ho- 
meric usage  of  this  word.  Homer  construed  it 
with  the  genitive  twenty  times;  Apollonius  only 
once.  Homer  uses  it  in  an  absolute  sense  five 
times  (A  573,  0  316,  T  371,  *  521;  n  195); 
Apollonius  has  it  eighteen  times  (I.  85;'  II.  51, 
270,  337,  1239;  III.  307,  441,  665,  723,  929; 
IV.  525,  600,  880,  1231,  1360  ^ao^g;—  III. 
1316;  IV.  579,  5S2  fieaaqyv) . 

Meacpa: — IV.  337  ^6<T$>a  2a^ayyc5i^og  nora- 
pov  xal  N«m&>s  afyg.  Cf.  @  508  (the  only  ex- 
ample of  [isa<pa  in  Homer) .  The  phrase  fiea<pa 
ating  "until3'  occurs  twice  in  Apollonius:  II. 
1230,  1261. 

MeroTtiaSe:—  I.  1064  noaiog  fieroma^s.  Cf. 
I  504;  i  529. 

NaoS^K — I.  1197  8a7t£§oio  .  ,  .  Vivd^ag  \vei- 
6§ev.  Cf.  Liddell  and  Scott  s.  v.  The  word  oc- 
curs only  once  in  Homer:  K  10  VSLO^SV  ex  xpa- 
$6>7g,  for  which  Apollonius  has  two  close  paral- 
lels: I.  385  vsioSsv  e%  %^g  and  I.  1313  rao- 
&8v  ex  hayovuv.  Apollonius  has  the  word  also 
in  the  absolute  sense  in  I.  1288;  II.  205;  III. 
383,  1302,  1357;  IV.  142. 

t: — I.  63  ebvasro  veio&i  yairis,  255  vei- 

xelro;  III.    62    vsto^i   &sa[i&v: 
word  occurs  only  once  in  Homer  <I>  317 

.   Apollonius  uses  it  absolutely  in  I.  990, 


-  27  - 

1098,  1326;   II.    355;   III.  164,  706;  IV.  1613. 

N6(T<?uO):— 1. 197  v6a$LV  /  'Hpcw^og,  322 
Tto^og-  voa<pi.  Similarly  I.  1207,  1294;  II.  275; 
III.  577;  IV.  10,  346,  352,  406,  819.  Cf.  A  349; 
a  20, 185,  7t  383,  a>  212,  308,  etc. 

V0m3e0):-  IV.  329  on&ev  norafiolo.  Cf.  P 
468  oTt&e  $i<ppoto. 

TLdpOi$e(v):  —  II.  52  $yjxe  Tiapot^e  Tto&oi', 
909  avrpoio  ndpo&ev;  IV.  245  Ttdcpot^7  c'A/lt>og 
Ttora^oto.  Cf.  A  360;  <5  625,  etc.  Absolutely: 
(1)  ndpo&ev  I.  208,  529;  II.  89,  582,  654,  889; 
III.  694;  Cf.  A  185,  YI  125,  etc.  (2)  TO  Ttapot- 
$ev  "before"  I.  254,  284,  630,  816;  II.  1061; 
III.  324,  473,  526,  894;  IV.  862,  882;  cf.  a  322, 
0  312,  a  275. 

ndpog:  —  II.  101  rov  be  Ttdpog;  III.  22= 
422,  1062  nobtiv  Ttdcpog.  Cf.  0  254. 

E[po7t(ipo6^(^): — I.  215  'Ihiaaov  TtpoTtdpo^e. 
Other  examples  are  II.  68,  529,  862;  III.  254, 
317;  IV.  1475.  For  Homer  compare  A  348,  U 
218,  0  66;  5  355,  etc.  In  Apollonius  TtpoTtdpcn- 
&ev  is  always  post-positive;  in  Homer  it  stands 
also  before  the  case,  as  in  N  205;  a  117,  etc. 

IIp6(T^(r):— IV.  2647tp6cr^(TA>7m6>7$.  This 
is  the  only  example  of  7tpocr$£i>  with  the  geni- 
tive in  Apollonius.  In  Homer,  however,  we 
find  thirty-five  examples;  cf.  M  145,  N  385,  T 
13;  jc  4,  etc. 


—  28  — 

III.  1334  rfte  $  solo.  Of.  A  817,  U 
539,  X  291;  (3  333,  etc.  With  preposition:  I. 
1278  rfjte  Van  dxrfa  IV.  1472  rffa  &'  fptel. 
poto.  Cf.  A  358,  n  117;  8  315,  etc.  The  ad- 
verbial phrase  r^Ae  Ttap^  occurs  twice  in  Ap- 
ollonius:  II.  272;  III.  1233. 

TyMSsv:—  II.  506  ryMSev  Aifiomyg.  Cf. 
Find.  N.  2,  18;  Soph.  Aj.  204;  Eurip.  H.  F. 
1112.  In  Homer  always  with  a  preposition,  as: 
A  270,  B  849,  857,  877,  2  208,  etc.  With  e 
283  £97X4$$*'  £*  %o%v(Mdv  opeco^  compare  for  Ap- 
ollonius  II.  402  3 Aftapavrtiv  tqMSev  £%  opra^. 
In  III.  879  the  genitive  depends  on  the  verb. 

T^O^L:—  II,  588  r^63t  .  .  .  nevp&uv.  In 
II,  795  r>7/l63t  ^aterdcoi'Tog  svoafyioav  'Hpa^yl^og, 
the  genitive  is  absolute,  and  so  is  T>7/l6£k.  For 
Homeric  examples  of  r^o^i  c.  gen.  compare  A 
30,  n  461,  2  99,  n  86,  541;  0  365. 

In  IV.  1206  it  is  doubtful  whether  we 
are  to  write  OCTTO  r^o^i  (Brunck,  Becker,  Mer- 
kel)  or  a7toT>7^63t  (Wellauer,  Seaton).  The 
same  holds  good  for  IV.  726,  1186.  The  form 
a7toT7!?i6$L  is  not  Homeric;  but  Apollonius  may 
have  used  it  as  a  variant  for  dnor^ov  (L  117). 

Xdp6K —  I.  851  'Hfyaiaroio  yj&yiv  no^v^- 
T^og.  Cf.  0  744,  which  is  also  the  only  example 
in  Homer. 


—  29  — 

b)    APOU,ONIUS    HAS    CASE  -CONSTRUCTION,    WHKRK 
HOMER  HAS  ONI<Y  THE  ABSOLUTE  SENSE. 


:  —  I.  908  av&i%a  roZo  araxrog;  II. 
929  av$i%a  &  av  %VT%£>v. 

Absol.:  II.  577;  III.  23;  IV.  31.    Cf.  n 
412,  578,  2  511,  T  387,  X  120. 

'ATtd-TtpoSh:  —  III.  313  fid^a  no^ov  dno- 
7tpoS>6  Ko/l^^og  ou>yg;  372  ofySoi'ky.&v  [tot  aTtoTtpo- 
^6,  1064  (XTtoTtpoS't  no^ov  £olo. 

Absol.:  I.  602;  IV.  287,  553,  1633.   Cf. 
8  757,  811,  8  80,  6  18,  35,  etc. 

KaTevavriov:  —  II.  360  xarsvavtiov  ap^rou. 
This  is  the  only  instance  of  the  word  in  Apol- 
lonius;  Homer  has  it  likewise  only  once  O  567, 
and  in  the  absolute  sense. 

Tipcat:  —  IV.  1266  ^epcroi;  Tto^ov  Ttpocro. 
Cf.  Soph.  Aj.  204.—  Absol.:  A  572,  M  274,  etc. 

"TnepSsv:  —  I.  534,  573,  622  vrtep&  a^dg, 
1088  vnepSsv  vy'iov,  1096  vTtep&ev  aeto;  III. 
1222  vifyoEvrog  VTtepSev  Kavxdaov,  IV.  956  aiy- 
^YievToc,  vTtep^sv  ovpavoti,  1139  rolo  5'  Snep&ev. 
—  Cf.  Aesch.  Sept.  228,  Ag.  232.—  Absol.:  II. 
322,  734,  1035,  1067;  III.  205,  883,  1259;  IV. 
571.  Cf.  s  184,  £  393,  476,  v  2,  etc. 

:—  II.  808  i^6§8v  axpw,  IV.  168 
v7tupo<piov  Sahdfioio.  Cf.  Find.  01. 
III.  12.  —  Absol.:  I.  1203;  III.  542;  IV.  1374. 
Cf.  M  383;  /3  147,  etc. 


—  3o- 

:  —  II.  571  fnj*»i  «'  o^g,  1081 
IV.  846  7i<?pa«7g  Ho3t  ya«7g,  924 
{nj/o$*  7t£Tp>7g.  —  Absol.:  I.  590;  II. 

354,  935;  IV.  46,  1285,  1422,  1680,  1707.  Cf. 

K  16,  P  676,  T  376. 

Note:  Homer,  on  the  other  hand,  has 
sometimes  case-construction,  where  Apollonius 
has  only  the  absolute  sense;  e.g.  dy%ov  (fl  709; 
f  5);  dpQis  (c.  gen.  B  384,  0  444;  c.  dat.  E  723; 
c.  ace.  H  274;  f  266);  avtucpv  (E  130,  819;  x 
559).  Similarly  dvriov,  e%6m&8V9  vep&ev,  oni- 
(76)  (oTUcrcro),  Ttporepc),  T>7/loi5,  ^ 


c)     APOI.I.ONIUS  HAS  CASE-ADVERBS,  NOT  FOUND 
IN   HOMER. 


:  —  II.  1032  dvri7t£pY]$>sv  v/i- 
crou;  III.  1270  aareog  avnTtep'/j^sv.  —  Absol.:  I. 
613,  977;  II.  1177;  IV.  470.—  'Awrmepyiv  is 
used  only  absolutely  in  Apollonius.  The  pas- 
sages cited  by  Linsenbarth  for  case-construction 
are  examples  of  the  absolute  use.  In  II.  177 
the  dative  (not  the  genitive)  depends  on  the 
verb,  and  in  I.  722  and  IV.  68  the  genitive  is 
adnominal. 

3A7toxp^6^;  —  II.   15  dnoxpibov  .  .  .  oftfaov. 
Cf.  Liddell  and  Scott  s.  v. 

:—  IV.    323  biK&ev  .  .  .  'Ayyov- 


pou   opsog,    952    &7td&ev    Ttsrpduv.      Cf.  Eurip. 
Iph.  T.  108. 

The  absolute  sense  occurs  ten  times  in 
Apollonius:  I.  583;  II.  48,  86,  433,  983;  III. 
1136,  1190;  IV.  443,  1170,  1569. 

:—  III.   262  exnoSev    ary$,    1288 


3Evaf.ioi(3a8i$:  —  I.  380  rtiv  &  s 
avrol  svsGTa^sv  d/MporeptiSsv.  A  similar  ex- 
ample is  IV.  199  d[iOL(3a8i$  dWpog  aviqp  ^ofisvog., 
although  here  we  may  have  a  blending  of 
two  constructions.  Cf.  Solon  12  (4),  1.  &3anev- 
8ei  <$'  fe^o^f  v  d^og;  but  Theocr.  I.  34  Ttdp  $£ 
ol  avfyeg  \  xahov  s 


i<;  —  IV.  1505  imoTpecrcrai'Tog  g 
Sig.—  Absol.:  IV.  354,  718,  1413. 

3E(Ta^pt:  —  I.  604  Jcrd^pt  Mi^pt^g. 
Karevavria:  —  II.  1118  xarevavvia  vfaov. 
Cf.  Dion.  P.  114. 

Meaao^:  —  II.  172  peaaoSi  v^og.  Here  (isa- 
ao$i  is  a  poetic  variant  for  fteta^v.  —  Absol.:  I. 
1278. 

:  —  IV.  1762  ^OTCLV  .  .  .  Eixp^oio. 
epco:  —  II.  427  rtivSs  Ttapotrepa).  Ab- 
sol.: II.  686. 

nep6'a;Ua:  —  II.  217  nspia^a  Setiv.  Absol.: 
III.  529;  Horn.  h.  XIX.  46. 


-  32  - 

:  —  I.  1241  i&v  Ttporepoxre 
>;  II.  394  vyaov  Se  Ttporspwcrs  mi  riTtsipOLO  Tte- 
$£p(3ov*ai  <$>&vpe$.  —  Absol.:  I.  306,  391, 
592,  964,  1014;  II.  369,  554,  621;  III.  1287; 
IV.  498,  1375,  1608.  Of.  Horn.  h.  32,  10. 

B.    WITH  THE  DATIVE. 

As  T.  Mommsen  (p.  186)  observes,  there 
are  two  characteristic  differences  between  the 
Alexandrian  poets  and  the  early  bards;  (1)  the 
decrease  of  [isrd  with  the  dative  (and  to  some 
extent  also  of  a^a)  and  (2)  the  increase  of  syn- 
onymous adverbs,  as  ^lya,  afifuya  and  the  like 
with  the  dative. 

a)     APOLLONIUS  AGREES  WITH  HOMER. 

*A[ia:  —  1)  temporal:  I.  607  au  neMoio  (3o- 


Similar   examples  are:  I  1362;  II.  945, 
1123;  III.  1171.     Of.  I  682,  2  136,  210,  etc. 

2)  sociative:     I.  257  #pt<5  a^i  '.     Similar 
examples  are:     I.  656,  637;  II.  210,  419;  III. 
256,  880,  915,  1242;  IV.  363.—  Cf.  K  196,  etc. 

3)  concomitant:     I.    425    a/* 
III.  632  apa  x^ayyfi;  IV.  1599  a^oc  5'  £v 

Cf.  3  161;  Horn.  h.  24,  15. 
'Ofiov:  —  II.  121  ofiov  8e  ol  soaevovro  Alaxi- 
,  788  ofiov   Mvaolaiv.     Other  examples    are: 


-33- 

II.  841,  891,  964;  IV.  1329.  Cf.  E  867,  0  118, 
etc. 

9Eyyv$ev:—Il.  137  afyaiv  tyy&ev.     Cf.  P 
554,  2  133. 

b)    APOU,ONIUS   HAS    CASE  -  CONSTRUCTION,     WHERE 
HOMER  HAS  ONLY  THE  ABSOLUTE  SENSE. 


"Avryv:  —  III.  100  avryv  \  d 
Absol.:  III.  1009,  1065.  Cf.  fl  223;  e  77,  etc. 

c)  APOU.ONIUS  HAS  CASE-  ADVERBS,  NOT  FOUND 
IN   HOMER. 


a:  —  I.  573=11.  985  d 
III.  1404  Spfuya  Ko^otg.     Cf.  Herod.  VI.  58, 
16  avpfuya  yvva^i—  Absol.:  IV.  626,  1194. 

Miya:—  IV.  1343  fiiya  ^^vre^aiv.  Cf. 
Find.  Pyth.  IV.  113.  Similarly  piyba  in  Ho- 
mer ©  437. 

C.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 


(not  Homeric)  :  —  II.  204  yalav  be 
%,  573  vfja  .  .  .  7iep&  III.  1213  n^£  & 
sateipdvtivto.  Cf.  Aesch.  Pers.  368;  Eurip. 
H.  F.  243.  In  Herodotus  the  word  governs  the 
accusative  frequently,  and  the  genitive  twice: 
I.  179;  II.  91.  The  absolute  sense  is  found  in 
Apollonius  in  I.  1097;  III.  1290;  IV.  272,  281 
1518,  with  which  compare  Aesch,  Pers.  418; 
Soph.  Ant.  1301;  Eurip.  Andr.  266. 


—  34- 

D.  WITH  THE  GENITIVE  AND  DATIVE. 
Of  the  five  adverbs   that  govern  the  geni- 


tive and  the  dative  in  Apollonius,  only  G 
has  both  cases  in  Homer.  Hshag  governs  only 
the  genitive  in  Homer.  'ETtto^epco  and  e<pvrtsp- 
are  used  only  absolutely  in  Homer;  while 
is  not  a  Homeric  word. 
6v:—I)  With  the  genitive:  I.  402  d^og 
,  408  (3tiuov  o%e86v,  1243  Hqyew  a%s$6v. 
Similarly  II.  1099,  1193,  1255;  III.  1072;  IV. 
469,  506,  1123,  1311,  1742.  Of.  T  263;  j  439, 
6  288,  etc. 

2)   With  the  dative:   I.  671  ry  xal  TtapS- 
svixai  rtitfvpeg  a%e&bv  efyiowvo.    Cf.  /?  284,  i  22. 
n<&ag:  —  1)    With  the  genitive:  III.  1073 
Tte/lag;  IV.  1343  op^/oto  Tte/lag.     Cf.  o  257 
Tte/lag   (the  only  example  of  Tte^ag 
c.  gen.  in  Homer).  Likewise,  the  word  is  found 
only  once  in  the  absolute  sense  in  Homer  (x 
516);  whereas  Apollonius  has   it  more  often; 
cf.  I.  737;  II.  187,  984;  III.  59,  1235;  IV.  718. 
2)  With  the  dative:   II.  1049  n&ag  nfilv. 
Cf.  Find.  01.  VII.  34,  N.  XL  4;  Aesch,  Supp.  208. 
o:  —  1)  With  the  genitive:  IV.  451 


2)  With  the  dative:   I.  528  Irtio^fpo  d;U- 
AbsoL:  III.  170,  1268.     Cf.  A  668, 
68,  *  125. 


—  35  — 

e(v):  —  1)  With  the  genitive:   II. 
395  QuMpw  #   e$v7tep$ev;    III.  217 
;  IV.  1706  8oidtdv  $8  [iifjg  KfrvXepS 
2)   With  the  dative:    III.  833  df 

xap^ati   fidhfa   xa^vrtrpyv.  —  Absol.: 
IV.  176.     Cf.  fl  645:  £  298,  etc. 

'E7tt,a%8$6v:  —  1)   With    the    genitive:    II. 
1286    87tiG%686v  .    .    .  retcro^erav;      IV.      946 
S7tiG%e8ov  atyiaholo.     Cf.  h.  Ap.  3 


2)   With   the   dative:   II.  606 

:—  Absol.:  II.  492;  IV.  1108,  1185, 
1348. 

E.  WITH  THE  GENITIVE  AND  ACCUSATIVE. 


:  —  1)  With  the  genitive:  I.  372 
II.  136  rfffG)  Befipvxirig,  579  slatt 
III.  311  lartspirjg  €6(76)  ^ovog.  The 
variant  Icro  c.  gen.  occurs  three  times  :  I. 
357=390  1(76)  caoc;;  II.  73  1(76)  rococo.  Cf.  Z 
284=X  425;  >;  135;  ^  290;—  Aesch.  Sept.  232, 
539,  Ag.  1022;  Soph.  0.  T.  1515,  Tr.  902,  El. 
39;  Eurip.  Med.  89,  100,  135,  etc. 

2)  With  the  accusative:  III.  1018  ^perng 
rf<76);  IV.  308  xohnov  &76)  narrow.  Cf.  A  71, 
T  322,  Z  10,  2  441,  H  155,  184,  199;  a,  579, 
etc.—  Absol.:  II.  95,  736;  III.  48,  651;  IV.  710. 
Cf.  H  270,  8  775,  etc. 


—  37  — 


CHAPTER  II. 


PREPOSITIONS  USED  AS  INDEPENDENT 
ADVERBS. 

The  adverbial  use  of  the  prepositions  belongs 
chiefly  to  the  epic  language.  It  is  less  frequent  in 
lyric  and  dramatic  poetry,  as  also  in  Ionic  prose.  In 
Attic  prose  only  TT/X)?  d£  and  xat  xpo?  have  survived. 
Cf.  Kruger-Pokel,  P.  II. ,  Sec.  68,2;  Kiihner-Gerth, 
Sec.  443. 

According  to  the  general  opinion  this  was  the 
original  use  of  prepositions,  though  Delbruck 
(Grundr.,  275)  thinks  that  the  adverbial  use  came 
from  the/r^-verbial,  which  would  make  tmesis  older. 

In  Apollonius  there  is,  as  might  be  expected,  a 
considerable  increase  in  the  adverbial  use  of 
prepositions.  He  has  124  examples,  while  Homer 
has  317  in  all.  In  proportion  to  the  bulk  of  his 
work  Apollonius  used  the  prepositions  as  adverbs 
nearly  twice  as  often  as  Homer.  He  has  on  the 
average  one  in  47  lines,  while  Homer  has  one  only 
in  89.  i  lines  (II.  83,  Od.  98  4).  As  a  rule  when  the 
preposition  is  used  adverbially,  it  is  placed  at  the 
head  of  a  sentence  or  clause  ;  consequently,  a  particle 
usually  follows  it  to  give  it  the  tone  of  an  independent 
adverb.  Out  of  the  124  examples  in  Apollonius  95 
occur  at  the  beginning,  and  only  29  are  found  in  the 
middle  of  a  sentence  or  clause ;  104  are  followed  by  a 
particle  (^-75,  f«/?-i2,  r^-n,  xa{-$,  &?'-2,  ^v-i),  and 


-38- 


only  20  are  without  a  particle.  The  prepositions 
not  used  at  the  head  of  the  sentence  or  clause,  nor 
accompanied  by  a  particle,  are  chiefly  the  double 
prepositions  napis-,  dtanpo,  inixpo  and  nponp6  ;  also  int 
and  xept  in  a  few  phrases.  Attention  may  be  drawn 
to  the  frequent  occurence  of  the  adverbial  prep- 
ositions in  the  fifth  foot. 

Apollonius  differs  from  Homer  in  a  number  of 
details.  Notably  is  this  the  case  with  //era,  npo  and 
<rvvt  which  he  employs  more  frequently  as  indepen- 
dent adverbs ;  vice  versa,  dtaxpo  and  napd  are  more 
frequent  in  Homer.  "Avay  awnpo  and  VKO  are 
not  used  adverbially  in  the  Argonautica  as  in  the 
Odyssey  or  in  the  Iliad.  "Entitpo,  which  Apollonius 
uses  eleven  times  and  only  adverbially,  is  not  a 
Homeric  word.  Also  -npo-npo  is  tin-Homeric. 

TABLE  SHOWING  THE  FREQUENCY  OF  THE  ADVERBIAL  USE  OF 
.        PREPOSITIONS  IN  APOLLONIUS,  AS  COMPARED 
WITH  THEIR  FREQUENCY  IN  HOMER. 


PREPOS. 

i. 

II. 

III 

IV. 

Tot.inAp. 

Total  in  Homer. 

irepi 

7 

8 

2 

6 

23 

80  (11.  43,  Od.  37) 

dn<t>i 

4 

2 

8 

6 

20 

64(11.41,  Od.  23) 

iv 

5 

I 

3 

6 

15 

59(11.  27,  Od.  32) 

fJLf.rd 

i 

2 

3 

8 

14 

6(11.  4,  Od.  2) 

fftiv 

4 

O 

4 

2 

10 

3  (K  224,*  879,  0,387) 

tirnrpb 

3 

3 

i 

4 

II 

o 

*P6 

i 

i 

3 

2 

7 

io(Il.  7,  Od.  3) 

M 

wap^K 

0 

o 

2 
I 

3 
4 

2 

0 

7 
5 

21  (11.  17,  Od.  4) 
8  (11.  2,  Od.  6) 

irpfa 

o 

I 

2 

I 

4 

12(11.  7,  Od.  5) 

irapd 

0 

I 

I 

0 

2 

17  (11.  ii.  Od.  6) 

irpoTTp6 

o 

O 

I 

I 

2 

0 

diairpd 

o 

O 

O 

I 

I 

18  (11.  16,  Od.  2) 

TT€pnrp6 

0 

I 

0 

0 

I 

2  (A  180=11699) 

TTCpL  T     dfA<f>l  T€ 

0 

I 

o 

I 

2 

2(d/u0nrep£-4>lo,  ^191) 

dvd 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

2  (2562,  0,343) 

diroirpd 

o 

o 

0 

o 

O 

2  (n  669,  679) 

M 

o 

0 

0 

o 

0 

9(11.  7,  Od.  2.) 

Total         25+24+35+40  =  124      ||3i5  (II.  192,  Od.  123.) 


-39- 


I.  238  d[i<pi  be  ?iativ  \  Ttfo/SiJg.  GrtepftOLihuv  auv- 

8ig  Seev. 
I.  880  d^<pi  Se  faiii&vlfyajeis  ydvvrai.  Cf.  £  292. 

IV.  1299  dptpi  be  hsiit&v  \ 

Similarly  Ttepi  in  II  569. 
I.  1123  d 


I.  1154  dfupi   ydp 

va$.  Cf.  x  94. 

II.  921  dfifyl  $6  KaJky]  |  rsrpd^a/log  (poivixi 

Cf.    0    608    dc)t    be 


.  X  134  d^<pl  $e 

II.  1207    dfifyi  be  K6h%G)v    e&vsa 

Cf.  n  234,  X  408. 

III.  166  ap$t  Se  novvog.  Cf.  M  460. 
III.  424  fiov^Yiv  $  d(i<p 

III.  810  d[i<pi  $6  TtdGat 


III.   882  duc)i    ^e    $>7eg     xvv&Stti    GaivovGiv 


iovGav. 


III.  884  d^t  ^  haoi  \  elxov.   Cf.  H  83;  ^  136. 
III.  1247  dftfpi  5'  zralpoi  \  Ttsi^Gav 
III.  1346  d^$t    5'    gratpot  |  ^dpGvv 
Cf.  K  151,  0  9;  i  544. 

III.  1351  d^i  &  Tto^og  |  d^pog.  Cf.  H  163. 

IV.  129  d[i<pi  be  [taxpai  \  r(iove$ 


40- 


IV.  311  dfupl  $s  boiai  \ 

IV.  601  a[i<pi  be  xovpai  |  'E^oWi??.  Of.  A  328. 

IV.  941  d(i$i  Sexvfia.  Cf.  A  481;  (3  427,  e  411. 

IV.  1396  dfifyi  be  vvfitycu  |  'E(77t£pi5eg  Ttoinvvov. 


IV.  313 

.  Cf.  T  276,  4>  164,  etc 


—  8V  — 

In  point  of  frequency  of  the  prepositions 
in  the  adverbial  use,  sv  holds  the  third  highest 
place  in  Apollonius  as  well  as  in  Homer.  Also 
in  Ionic  prose  sv  is  often  used  adverbially. 
Lundb3rg  (p.  5)  cites  twenty-five  examples 
from  Herodotus.  For  most  of  the  examples 
from  Apollonius  are  found  close  parallels  in 
Homer. 
I.  752  sv  §6  5&a  bi<f>poi  nenovYiato  ^ptocj^r^g. 

Cf.  E  740-741,  2  490,  573,  587;  YI  129,  etc. 
I.  759  sv  xal  'ATtohhtiv  4>ol/?og   bvGTsvtov  srerv- 

xro.     Cf.  2  483. 
I.  939  sv  Se  ol  dxrai  \  apQiSvpoi.  Cf.  r  173,  175, 

etc. 
I.  948  sv  ^^pcog  Aiv^iog  vlo$  avaaasv.  Cf.  Soph. 

0.  T,  27,  182. 
I.  1262  sv  $e  x&aivov  vrto  Gnhdy%voi<;  %eev  al/^a. 

With  this  compare  the  following  examples, 
in  which  the  dative  is  ethical:  III.    1042  sv  8s 


ol  O^KYJ  |  Icrcrar';  IV.  169  ev  8s  ol  ^ 
IV.  1064  ev  U  ol  jrop  .  .  .  cUcro;  IV.  1541 
ev  $E  ol  oaae  .  .  .  /Id^Tterou;  IV.  16  ev  be  ol  ocr- 
ore  Tt^ro  Tivpoc;.  _Cf.  T  16,  366;  £  131. 

II.  1266  li/  5f  ^ai  avrov  \  latov  a^ap  %a[tdoav- 

ro  7tapax/lt66v. 

III.  1090  li;  5'  aiV>7  'laco/l^og,   spy  7to/ltg?  g-i/  5e 
xat  a/l/lou  Tto/lXai  vateraoixTiv  (are  situated)  • 
For  this  use  of  avnj  compare:  I.  23,  109, 
349;  III.  269;  also  Z  451,  3  441,  etc.  The 
emendation  to  cciV^    (Bruiick,   Wellauer, 
Lehrs  and  Seaton)    is  unnecessary,  espec- 
ially since  the  reading  of  LG  is 

IV.  655,  656  kv  fie   aohoi  xal  rpv^sa 

xeivtiv,  |  ev  8e  ^L^JLYIV  3Apj/6)og 
Qdnarai.  Of.  H  551;  i  136. 

-  'Em'  - 

The  preposition  eni  when  adverbial  is  used 
a)  in  a  local  sense,  "near",  "by",  "above"  or 
"over";  b)  in  a  temporal  sense,  "next",  "after", 
"thereupon".  This  second  usage  is  not  Homeric. 

a)  Of  place: — II.  370  enl  be  aro^a  ©ep^co- 
bovrog  .  .    .  [tvperafa   II.   1072  sni  be  %6<poi  ar- 
aeiovro'y  III.   1207  eni   5'  dp^^ou    rape  /lat/ud^. 
Cf.  A  462=y  459  eni  5'  alSona  olvov  %el(3e;  also 
A  639,  640;  2  612,  etc. 

b)  Of  succession  in  time: — III.  726  rolov  8' 


£7tl  [tv&ov  eeiTtsv,  which  occurs  with  slight  varia- 
tion in  III.  779,  IV.  1095,1594.  Of.  Herod.  IV. 
59,  VIII.  93.  In  Homer  A  25,  379,  etc.,  hti  is 
to  be  construed  with  the  verb. 

—  'ETtlTtpO  — 

This  double  preposition  does  not  occur  in 
Homer.  In  Apollonius  it  is  used  only  in  the 
absolute  sense,  "forwards".  Only  in  three  places 
is  it  followed  by  a  particle.  I.  30,  983,  1156; 
II.  133  (&),  904,  1247  (ydp);  III.  1337;  IV. 
141,  296  ()/dp),  593,  1388. 

-  Mzrd  - 

a)  In  the  local  sense  "beyond",  "next  to": 
II.  374  [ierd  re  a^vys^raroi  dv§p&v  \  rp^^si^v 
ILdhvfiec,  xal  drapax  yalav  s%ovaiv.  Cf.  1P  133; 
<£  231;  also  Herod.  I.  142,  145. 

II.  396  (isrd  &  av  7t£ptcoo7<x  fyvha  Be%8ipG)v. 

b)  In  the  temporal  sense  "thereupon","after". 
This  use,  like  the  temporal  adverbial  eni  is  not 
Homeric;  cf.  T.  Mommsen,  p.  42.  It  occurs 
frequently  in  Herodotus;  cf.  Lundberg  p.  7. 
I.  708  fiera  5'  «$  lov  opro  veeaSai.  Cf.  Herod. 
I.  11,  19,  22,  26,  30,  etc. 

III.  969  terd    <53  avn$  vno     t7t>yg  avetoio    xivv- 


III.  1146  perd  5'  avre 

IV.  24  [terd  &  wye  Tta^iaavrog  d3poa 


-43   - 
ndvr    a[iv$ig 

[10  lO. 

IV.  80  fierd  be  4>po^T/g  re  xal  vAp^o£,  |  vie 

<£p6'£ou,  %a(id&t$  Sopor. 

IV.  877  perd  5'  ovn  na^iaavrog  Ixer'  oniaau. 
IV.   1219    tera  5'  avre 


IV.   1257  perd  5'  avrog  .  \   .  'Ayxalog  .   .  dyo- 

pevaev. 

IV.  1423  perd  $  epvea 
IV.   1588  fierd^  ovng 

IV.  1688  [ierd  &  olye  veov  .  \  .  ipov  .  .  ifyvoavro. 

c)  In  the  concomitant  sense  "together  with": 

III.  115  i^erd  xai  Tavvfi^ea  [e^p^].  Cf.  B  446, 

477?  0  67  (La  Roche). 

—  Ilapa  — 

II.  841  Ttapa  5'  danera 

fiorofi^aav.  Cf.  A  611,  B  279,  etc. 

III.  1285  Ttapa  5'  O^I 

en'  orptd^G).  Cf.  T  135?  K  153. 


1)  aAway":  II.  272=111.  1233  rij&e 

away". 

2)  ^Besides":  III.  195  ov  5'  fo»  Ttap 

xetevoi.  Cf.  S  348. 
III.   237    5atSa/le>7  5'  at$oixra    Ttaps^  cxd 


—  44  — 

III.   1050  xal  8e  rot  d/l/lo   7iape£  iiTtoSfoofi'  ov- 
eiap.     Cf.  £  168. 

—  Tlepi  — 

Of  all  the  prepositions  Ttepi  is  most  fre- 
quently used  as  an  adverb  in  Apollonius  as  well 
as  in  Homer.  In  this  use  it  means  either  "on 
all  sides",  "around"  (Lat.  undique)  or  "exceed- 
ingly". 

a)  Of  the  place,  "on  all  sides",  Lat.  undique: 

I.  1036  TtavTYi  $e  rtepi  fieya  nsnrarai  ?pxog.   Cf. 

E  194  a[j,<f)i  $e  rten^oi    TteTtTavTaL. 

II.  301  To^pa  &  (ipt(TT>7£$    Ttivoev  nepi  bepfia  ye- 


II.  569  navvy  be  Ttepi  [*£ya<;  zfipefjisv  afS-^p.   Cf. 

I.  880;  IV.  1299. 
II.  665  rtspi  5'  <i(T7t£Tog  t^pcog   iifisrou  sx 

II.  1107  axoro6i$  $6  Ttepi  %6<pog  ^pxypacrr 

III.  1247  Ttepi  $s  £i$os. 

IV.  1310  Ttfcpt  5'  o^vrarai  Sspov  avyal 


IV.   1708 

narrower  alyfyv.     Cf.  p  439. 

b)  Of  the  degree,  "exceedingly",  as  equiv- 
alent to  Tieparcrcog.  Cf.  Delbrueck,  Grundr.  p. 
703.  Ancient  as  well  as  modern  scholars  are 
not  agreed  how  to  accent  this  Ttept.  Beck  and 
La  Roche  write  Ttep/,  while  Wolf  and  Ameis 


—  45- 

prefer  Ttspi  in  Homer.  For  Apollonius,  Brunck, 
Wellauer  and  Lehrs  use   Ttep/;  but  Merkel  has 
the  form  without  anastrophe. 
I.   101  og  rtspi  Ttdvrag  'Epe^S^&xg  zxsxaato. 
I.   138  og  Ttspl  Tta^Tocg  sxaivvro  vavrihiyatv. 
I.   670  Ttspi    5e  fieveaiv'  dyopevvai.     Cf.  II  186. 
I.   771  nspi  ydp  fteveaivsv  erteaSaL  \  VYIV  b$6v. 

I.  1333  Ttepi    yap  fi    a%og    ijxev  sviGnelv.     Cf. 

p  279. 

II,  20  Ttspi  5'  ai;  IIoyli;5ei;^fa  rv^&v  o/^ox^.  Cf. 

/?  88. 

II.  53  Ttepi  5'  o?y'    eaa^  eoxfy&res.    Cf.  2  549, 
^>  105. 

II.  241  Ttepi  ^  avvs  bvo  vla$  /?opeao. 

III.  1354  (ppUzev  &e  nepi  crrt/^apotg  aaxzsaaiv  \ 
bovpaai  r'  d[A<piyvoi$  xopv&zaGi  rs  ha[j.no[i£v- 
YIGLV  |  vAp>7og  refievo^.  Cf.  h.  Cer.  472. 

IV.  181  Ttept  yap  Mev.  Cf.  E  566=P  666?  I  433, 
A  557;  X  96. 

IV.  1029=1381  5  Kepi  by  ntya  <psp*aroi. 


This  double  preposition,  which  is  the  equiv- 
alent for  the  Homeric  d[i<pL7tspi,  occurs  three 
times  in  Apollonius.  In  III.  633  it  is  used  in 
case-construction,  as  it  is  also  inP  760,  the  only 
example  of  nspi  t'  d(i<pi  re  in  Homer.  In  the 
other  two  passages,  Apollonius  uses  it  in  the 
absolute  sense. 


-46- 

II.  1211  rolo$  fiLv   o<pi$  Ttept  r'  da^t  re  epvrai. 

Cf.  h.  Cer.  276. 
IV.  158  Ttepi  r'  dfityi  re  vfyrtoc,  ofy/>7  \  <pap[idxov 


The  only  example  in  Apollonius  is  II.  869 
TteptTtpo  yap  ev  sxexaavo  \  i&vvew,  an  imitation 
of  the  only  example  in  Homer  [A  180]  =11  699 


In  Apollonius  the  adverbial  Ttpo  is  used 
only  in  the  temporal  sense;  in  Homer  it  is  tem- 
poral (A  70;  a  37)  and  local  (II  188).  The 
examples  from  the  Argonautica  are: 

I.  1246  Ttpo  yap  avrol  svl  ora&uolai  vo[iyje$  ehtiav. 

II.  1045  Ttpo  yap  aytti^a  rsivaro  <ro£a. 

III.  385  Ttpo  yap  avrog  d^ei^oL'to  {ieihi%ioiGiv. 
III.  1173  [Ttf^Tto^]  Ttpo  fiev  avrov  dpyji<p&ov  Te- 


III.  1197  Ttpo  yap  r  aheyvvev  exaara. 

IV.  84  Ttpo   yap  r  dva<pav8a  VEtvxTai  ndvra 


IV.  558  Ttpo   re  [tvpia  7t 

—  IIpoTtpo  — 

This  preposition  is  not  found  in  Homer. 
Apollonius  has  it  three  times,  once  in  case  con- 
struction and  twice  in  the  absolute  sense, 


—  47  - 

III.  1012  TtpoTtpo  5'  d$>ei$Y]aaaa  Sv&feog  e^efe  (ii- 
tp>?g  |  fydpfiaxov. 

IV.  1233    ^£#ptg   Ixovro  \  TtpoTtpo 


—  Ilpog  — 

Ilpog  is  the  only  preposition  which  occurs 
adverbially  in  good  Attic  prose.  Cf.  Kuehner- 
Gerth,  Sec.  443,  2.  For  this  reason  it  is  not 
surprising  to  find  only  four  examples  in  Apol- 
lonius,  viz.: 

II.  222  or  yap  fiovvov  .  .   .  Ttpog  53  en.    This 
example  is  interesting   and   especially  note- 
worthy.    It  has  no   parallel  in    Homer,  and 
it  is  evidently  a  poetic   variant  for  the  ordi- 
nary prose    expression:  ov  (tovov,    d^d  xai 
(Lat.  non  solum,  sed  etiam). 

III.  232  Ttpog  <5e  xai  avroyvov  atifiapov  d&d[iav- 
ro$  fiporpov  |  Ipwaev.     Cf.  E  307    K   108 
(Ttort),  N  678,  n  86,  X  59;  s  255,  etc. 

III.  1045  Ttpog  be  xai   avrti  bovpl  adxog 
hayfievov  eara  \  xai  Z' 

IV.  527  Ttpog  b'avtol 


Although  Vogrinz,  Monro  and  Haggett  do 
not  admit  the  adverbial  use  of  avv  in  Homer,  it 
seems  from  the  context  that  in  6)  378  GVV  is  an 
adverb;  also  in  K  224  (cf.  Kuehner-Gerth,  Sec, 


—  48  — 

443)  and  in  *P  879. — At  any  rate,  this  use  ob- 
tains in  Apollonius,  who  has  it  sometimes  in 
phrases  where  Homer  would  use  apa  (adv) . 
I.  74  avv  xal  rpirog  fa  'Qitevg.  Cf.  Eurip.  Iph. 

A.  268;  H.  F.  785. 

I.  202  avv  be  Hahaifioviog  Aepvov  Ttdug  'Clfavioio. 
I.  998=1  V.  253  avv  be  xal  &U(H.     Cf.  G>  387. 
III.  518  avv  be  xal  Qiveibqg. 
III.  1174  avv  $e  xal  AiSaMhiv. 
More  noteworthy  are: — 
I.  156  avv  &e  Tlepixhv[i€vo$  N>7/l>76o 

III.  707    dvv    be  xdp>7   xoJiTtoig 

which  Lehrs  translates  by  "unaque  caput 
sinui  injecit." 

IV.  1164  avv  $6   rig  aid    Ttixpri   7tap[j,6[i(3h 

eixppoavvYiaiv  dvirj. 

Very  curious  is  III.  700  avv  <re 
arsipa  n&eoSai.  I  prefer  with  Wellauer  to  take 
avv  as  a  simple  adverb  here,  though  tmesis 
with  the  verb  (avv  .  .  .  7t&ea$ai)  is  pos- 
sible. The  scholiast  thought  even  of  tmesis 
with  the  noun  (avv  .  &pY]afi'£ipa=fi  avvepyo$)9 
for  which  compare  the  chapter  on  the  preposi- 
tions in  adverbial  phrases. 


—  49  — 

Note: — Here  may  also  be  mentioned  the 
five  examples  from  Apollonius  in  which  the  pre- 
position is  equivalent  to  a  compound  verb,  i.  e. 
the  idea  of  the  verb  is  so  subordinate  to  the 
preposition  that  the  verb  is  dropped  altogether. 
This  use  is  more  common  in  Homer  than  in 
Apollonius. 
*Ava=avto<cy!$i  IV.  1322.  Cf.  Z  331,  I  247, 

2  178;  a  13. 

*Av=dvearyi  I.  494.    Cf.  $  115. 
ndpa=7tdpean  IV.  1260,  1272,   1553.  Cf.   A 

174,  E  603,  etc.     Homer  has  also  evi=ev- 

ean,  8   603,  846,  i  126,  X  267,  a  355,  etc. 
92,  u  315;  N  104;   and 
93. 


CHAPTER  III. 


PREPOSITIONS    USED     IN     THE    SO- 
CALLED   TMESIS. 

NATURE  OF  TMESIS. 

Closely  connected  with  the  independent  adverbial 
use  of  prepositions  is  the  use  of  the  so-called  tmesis. 
The  one  overlaps  the  other  so  much  that  the  two 
are  not  always  to  be  distinguished  by  any  fixed  line. 
The  difference  is,  that  in  the  case  of  tmesis  the 
preposition  is  not  so  much  an  independent  adverb ; 
but  it  is  rather  felt  to  constitute  with  the  verb  a  unit, 
although  it  still  has  an  independent  position  in  the 
sentence.  "  The  clearest  cases  of  tmesis,"  as  Monro 
(p.  164)  says,  uare  those  in  which  the  compound 
verb  is  necessary  for  the  construction  of  the  other 
words  in  the  sentence  ;  e.  g.  ou$  ran  dx  Abeiav  IMpyv, 
or  bno  8*  effgero  /juffftov  '  promised  hire. '  * ' 

In  the  Homeric  language  there  can  hardly  be  any 
question  of  tmesis  in  the  strict  sense,  i.  e.  a  splitting 
of  a  compound  verb,  so  that  other  words  come  be- 
tween the  preposition  and  the  verb.  The  apparent 
cases  of  tmesis  are,  for  the  greater  part,  not  the 
result  of  division,  but  the  maintenance  of  an  earlier 
usage  in  which  the  preposition  as  an  independent 
word  received  an  independent  position  in  the  sentence, 
when  as  yet  the  fusion  of  both  in  the  compound  had 
not  taken  place.  (See  Kiihner-Gerth,  p.  530). 


-  52- 

The  Greek  grammarians  used  the  term  r/^<n?,  because 
they  took  as  their  norm  the  later  established  usage 
and  looked  on  the  independent  position  of  the  prepo- 
sition in  the  Homeric  language  as  the  result  of  the 
actual  splitting  of  the  compound  verb. 

The  difficulty  of  classifying  the  various  usages  of 
the  prepositions  is  generally  recognized  ;  but  it  is 
most  embarrassing,  when  there  are  three  possibilities 
of  construing  the  preposition  : —  ( i )  as  an  independent 
adverb,  (2)  in  tmesis  with  the  verb,  or  (3)  with  a  case. 
No  crucial  test  can  be  fixed  for  determining  these  puz- 
zling cases.  After  all  sifting  and  shifting  and  com- 
bining of  results,  the  difficulty  remains  a  matter  of 
personal  opinion.  An  attempt  to  lay  down  some 
objective  principle  by  which  to  determine  the  different 
usages  would  fail  of  its  purpose.  The  words 
of  Goethe  could  well  be  applied  here  :  "Es  irrt  der 
Mensch,  so  lang  er  strebt."  Hence  the  treatment  of 
those  doubtful  cases  is  largely  subjective.  This  ac- 
counts for  the  differences  in  the  statistics.  Thus, 
T.  Mommsen  gives  as  the  total  of  <rvv  with  the  dative 
in  Homer  the  figure  181  (II.  107  Od.  74);  but  Hag- 
gett  has  188  (II.  113,  Od.  75).  Vogrinz  has  for 
*epi  69  cases  with  the  genitive,  84  with  the  dative  and 
62  with  the  accusative,  against  which  numbers  Hag- 
gett  has  79  examples  with  the  genitive,  85  with  the 
dative,  and  72  with  the  accusative. 

T.  Mommsen   (p.  42)  thinks  that  in  a  case  like 

O  400  fJ-srd  yap  re  xai  atyefft  r^pTrsrat    avyp,    it  IS  just    as 

correct  to  connect  i^rd  with  litysfft  as  with  rlpKsrat. — 
Delbriick,  Grundr.  p.  653  fF.  cites  28  cases  from 
Homer  in  which  with  equal  right  and  with  no  change 


-53  — 

in  meaning  either  case  construction  or  tmesis  may  be 
admitted.  Compare  also  as  a  good  instance  of  the 
equivalence  Aesch.  Pro.  20.  axovrd  d  axwv  du<rAuT<n$ 

XahxsufJLatTt  |  xpofTTratrffaAeuffw  rwS1  dnavftpatnw  7tdya)y  but 
line  56  TiaffffdAsue  71^09  Ttlrpats. 

Hoffmann  (Progr. ,  Liineberg,  1857-1858)  at- 
tempted to  formulate  rules  by  which  to  decide 
whether  tmesis  or  case-construction  is  to  be  preferred. 
His  rules  may  be  stated  briefly  as  follows  : 

I.  The  preposition,  when  separated  from  the  case 
by  the  caesura   of  the  verse,  is   to   be  construed  with 
the  verb.     As  examples  are  cited  : 

A  53  iv^/aap  /j.sv  avd  ffTparbv  a>%£ro  xr^a  fteoto. 
B  7&2 jpPO/t&p,  fire  <T  d/j.<p}  Toywit  yatav 
O  607  d(f>kot<T!J.o<$  ds  7T£f)}  ffTo/j.a  yfy»£Ttit  TO) 

II.  The  preposition  is  to  be  construed  with  the 
verb    when    an   impo  tant   worrl,  with    an    objective 
emphasis  of  its  own,  stands  between   the  preposition 

and  its  case  ;  e.  g    O  266  d/j.<pl  ds  yalrat  |  &IJLOIS  aiffffovrai. 

Note:  —  An  attributive  genitive  has  no  objective 
emphasis  of  its  own ;  hence  in  #  378  d»d  governs 

yeybpas;  in  A  44  xary  belongs  to  xapTJvw,  etc. 

III.  The  preposition  should   be  taken   with   the 
verb,  when  the  verb  stands  between  the  preposition 
and  the  supposed  case  ;  e.  g.  ft  3  Tcepl  ds  Ziyos  6£b  $& 

&/JLO). 

IV.  The   preposition   should   be  taken  with   the 
verb  when  the  preposition  stands  after  the  verb,  but 
not  immediately  before  the  case;  e.  g.  8  198  fates w  T' 

«TTO  ddxpu  izapetwv  •  $  149  ffx£da<foy  d*  CCTTO  xyjdza  &ufj.ou. 

These  rules  are  too  arbitrary  to  be  of  any  great 
value  and  to  be  strictly  applied  in  each  case.  Some- 


-54- 

times  they  are  positively  objectionable,  as  may  be 
seen  when  they  are  put  to  the  test.  The  first  rule  is 
evidently  based  on  the  principle  that  the  preposition 
when  standing  immediately  before  its  case  is  a  pro- 
clitic and  so  constitutes  with  the  following  noun,  as  it 
were,  a  single  word.  In  consequence,  if  case- 
construction  be  assumed,  there  cannot  be  a  caesura 
at  this  point.  The  application  of  this  rule,  however, 
is  often  restricted  by  the  fact  that  another  caesura  or 
diaeresis  can  be  found  to  satisfy  the  requirements  of 
the  verse.  Thus  all  the  examples  cited  in  support  of 
the  rule  may  be  scanned  with  the  Bucolic  Diaeresis. 
In  the  first  it  must  be  done  because  avd  Grparov  (  A  10, 
53,  384  ;  J  209,  436  ;  A'  66,  82,  141,  etc.)  has  become 
a  fixed  phrase  like  the  Sanskrit  prati  varam  (  accord- 
ing to  wish),  anu  dyun  (throughout  the  days). 
Cf.  Delbriick,  Grundr.  p.  653. 

As  regards  Apollonius  this  rule  is  of  no  practical 
importance.  In  three  examples  the  masculine  caesura 
falls  between  the  case  and  the  preposition  evt  (I  94, 
IV.  986,  1667  ).  But  as  the  post- positive  preposi- 
tion has  a  strong  accent  of  its  own,  this  is  in  itself 
less  objectionable.  Besides  in  all  these  lines  there 
is  a  Bucolic  Diaeresis  which  satisfies  the  metre  and  so 
renders  unnecessary  the  change  from  evt,  which  is  the 
reading  of  the  MSS.,  to  £ri  which  has  been  made  by 
Gerhard,  Lect.  Apoll,  ch.  8,  De  Caesura  p.  129. 

The  second  rule  is  followed  by  Ameis ;  Cf.  his  note 
to  13  80,  while  T.  Mommsen  (p.  41  ),  takes  the  op- 
posite view.  Kiihner-Gerth  ( p.  533 )  admits  the 
rule  with  some  exceptions  (  A  831,  9  1 15,  t  535,  A  155. ) 
For  exceptions  in  Apollonius  see  IV.,  1062,  1734. 


-55  - 

lu  like  manner  the  third  and  fourth  rules  are  not 
absolute,  though  they  are  perhaps  less  objectionable 
than  the  first  and  the  second.  The  general  tendency 
is  to  allow  tmesis  the  preference  whenever  this  can 
be  done  ;  because  originally  the  case  did  not  depend 
directly  on  the  preposition,  but  on  the  verb  -f-  the 
preposition.  Cf.  Kiihner-Gerth,  Sec.  428,  4-5. 

PURPOSE  OF  TMESIS. 

"The  £thos  of  tmesis, "  says  Haggett,  "as  well  as 
that  of  the  adverbial  use  is  seen  from  the  fact  that  it 
belongs  predominantly  to  the  higher  spheres  of 
poetry.  It  lays  stress  on  the  preposition  by  giving  it 
an  independent  place  in  the  sentence."  In  epic 
poetry  tmesis  is  used  almost  unconsciously  and  unin- 
tentionally. Its  effect  is  simply  to  give  emphasis  or 
vividness.  In  tragic  and  lyric  poetry,  on  the  contrary,  it 
is  a  figure  of  speech  and  an  ornament  of  style.  In  epic 
it  belongs  to  the  idiom ;  in  lyric  and  tragic  poetry  to 
the  poet.  Thus  we  find  that  while,  on  the  whole, 
tmesis  is  rarer  in  tragic  and  lyric  poetry,  individual 
differences  exist  between  the  great  poets.  Aeschylus 
has  15  cases  of  tmesis,  chiefly  in  lyric  passages  and 
for  the  sake  of  emphasis.  Sophocles  has  20  examples, 
principally  in  dialogue  and  for  the  purpose  of  vivid- 
ness. Euripides  uses  it  82  times.  With  him  it 
is  to  emphasize,  to  make  more  plastic  and,  above  all, 
to  adorn,  Pindar  has  33  cases,  used  for  all  purposes. 
Aristophanes  limits  its  use  to  parody  in  the  chorus. 
Herodotus  uses  it  quite  often,  because  his  history 
has  the  character  of  an  Epos.  Attic  prose  writers 
have,  with  the  exception  of  a  few  curious  cases, 


-56- 

avoided  tmesis.  Cf.  Pierson,  Rh.  Mus.  1857,  and 
Kiihner-Gerth,  Sec.  345 

Apollonius  has  205  examples  of  tmesis  ;  Homer 
has  1359,  showing  that  Apollonius  has  approximated 
the  norm  of  epic  poetry. 

It  may  be  noticed  that  tmesis  is  sometimes  con- 
venient for  metrical  purposes,  when  the  compound 
verb  could  otherwise  not  be  used  on  account  of  too 
many  short  syllables  in  succession  ;  as  in  A  98  dnd 


POSITION. 

The  preposition  in  tmesis  usually  precedes 
the  verb.  Only  rarely  it  follows.  This  ana- 
strophic  tmesis  occurs  in  tragedy  only  in  a  few 
doubtful  cases  Cf.  Schumacher,  De  Praepositionum 
cum  tribus  casibus  conjunctarum  usu  Euripideo,  p. 
68.  When  the  preposition  precedes  the  verb,  import- 
ant words  may  intervene  and  the  preposition  and  the 
verb  may  stand  in  different  lines.  When  the  prepo- 
sition follows  the  verb,  important  words  may  inter- 
vene, but  the  verb  and  the  preposition  are  always  in 
the  same  line,  and  rarely  separated  by  the  caesura. 
The  following  lists  show  the  facts  for  Apollonius. 

A.      PREPOSITION  BEFORE  THE  VERB. 
(  198  IN  AU,.) 

r)  With  words  like  <%,  yap,  rd,  [*.&,  Pap  intervening: 
I.  no,  321,  348,  385,  400,  485,  673,  730,  735, 
1018,  1026,  1155,  1170;  II.  28,  58,  184,  202,  274, 
493>  904,  926,  1043;  III.  i,  112,  311,  631,  649, 
670,  1166;  IV.  329,  393,  594,  1275,  1330,  1348, 
1401,  1627,  1669,  1701,  1744,  1759.  Total  41. 


—  57  — 

2)  With  more  important  words  intervening : 

a)  Preposition  and  verb  in  the  same  line  : 

I.  218,  262,  280,  344,  349,  364,  399,434,  526.  541, 
566,  596,  639,  697,  747,  755,  763,  850,  1059,  1144, 
1197,  1198,  1268,  I2842,  1356;  II.  14,  94,  183,  191, 
201,  355,  456,  534,  563,  581,  608,  693,  742,  894,  926, 
933,  1071,  1128,  1192,  1219,  1279;  III.  157, 
205,  231,  261,  269,  280,  291,  295,  371,  378,  424, 
486,  511,  591,  648,  650,  746,  750,  791,  821,  868,  888, 
889,  929,  946,  958,  961,  1067,  1189,  1209,  1230, 
1359;  IV.  83,  208,  225,  298.  367,392,  409,461,  478, 
484,  493,  547,  599,  609,  640,  683,  867,  892,  1016, 
10  }8,  1063,  1076,  1104,  1134,  1146,  1171,  1199,  1265, 
1270,  1281,  1292,  1301,  1325,  1350,  1392,  1436, 

1533,  1534,  1550,  1577,  1654,  1709,  1744,  I777- 
Total  123. 

b)  Preposition  and  verb  in  different  lines : 

I.  381,  392,  396,  1028,  1079,  mo,  1205,  1231; 
II.  91,  530,  701,  930;  III  154,  516,  725,  873, 
1203,  1235;  IV  603,  645,  747,  983,  1031,  1123, 
1181,  1415,  1669,  1675,  1677.  Total  29. 

B.      PREPOSITION  AFTER  THE  VERB. 
(  12    IN   ALL.) 

1 )  No  word  intervening  : 

III.     831,  1135,  1192;  IV.  307,  600.     Total  5. 

2)  Particles  intervening : 

I-     979,  H95;  II.     682;  IV.  750,  1312.    Totals. 

3)  More  important  words  intervening : 
III.     46,  1017.     Total  2. 


-58   - 

Tmesis  is  less  frequent  in  Apollonius  than  in 
Homer.  Apollonius  has  one  example  per  28.4  lines  ; 
Homer,  on  the  other  hand,  has  one  per  20,4  lines  on 
the  average  (II.  21.9,  Od  18.8).  The  more  im- 
portant differences  in  the  numerical  relations  of  the 
individual  prepositions  are  the  following  :  In  Homer 
the  preposition  used  most  frequently  in  tmesis  is 
xard  (210);  in  Apollonius  it  is  ln(  (36).  'Avd  gains 
and  %ard  loses  in  Apollonius ;  similarly  &«  and  sl$. 
Apollonius  has  vnlp  twice  in  tmesis  :  Homer  never. 
Hpos  occurs  only  once  in  tmesis  in  Apollonius ;  but 
Homer  has  36  examples  of  this  use.  11  po  and  bx<> 
Apollonius  does  not  employ  in  tmesis  ;  though  Homer 
has  xf>6  eight  times  and  vno  eigthy-two  times  in 
tmesis. 

Other  differences  in  usage  will  be  noted  in  the 
more  detailed  account  of  each  preposition  in  tmesis. 
According  to  the  divergence,  the  following  sub- 
divisions are  made,  wherever  required  : 

1)  Apollonius  and  Homer  both  have  tmesis. 

2)  Apollonius   has   tmesis;  Homer   has   only   the 
compound  verb. 

3)  Apollonius  has   tmesis;  the  compound  verb  is 
post-Homeric. 

4)  Apollonius  has  tmesis  ;  the  compound  verb  is 
not  quotable. 


—  59- 


TABI,E    SHOWING    THE    FREQUENCY    OF    EACH    PREPOSITION 

IN  APOU,ONIUS,  COMPARED  WITH  THEIR 

FREQUENCY  IN  HOMER. 


Prepos. 

I. 

II. 

III 

IV. 

Tot.inAp. 

Total  in  Homer. 

M 

~T~ 

7 

II 

II 

36 

207  (11.  104,  Od.  103) 

iK 

3 

5 

II 

12 

3i 

208  (11.  107,  Od.  101) 

dvd 

7 

6 

7 

8 

28 

71  (11.  35,  Od.  36) 

d7f6 

5 

i 

5 

10 

21 

115  (11.  74,  Od.  41) 

/card 

5 

5 

4 

5 

19 

210  (11.  109,  Od.  101) 

Iv 

12 

i 

i 

3 

17 

126  (11.  72,  Od.  54) 

did 

0 

5 

2 

4 

II 

19  (11.  10,  Od.  9.) 

TTCpt 

3 

i 

3 

2 

9 

68  (11.  34,  Od.  34) 

dfj.(pi 

i 

i 

i 

4 

7 

67  (11.  30,  Od.  37) 

fftiv 

i 

2 

i 

3 

7 

37  (11.  19,  Od.  18) 

TTCLpd 

0 

O 

2 

3 

5 

55  (11.  21,  Od.  34) 

(jLcrd 

i 

I 

2 

o 

4 

20  (11.  12,  Od.  8) 

€ls 

i 

O 

0 

2 

3 

26  (11.  14,  Od.  12) 

\nrtp 

o 

0 

O 

2 

2 

o 

irp6s 

I 

0 

0 

0 

I 

36  (11.  19,  Od.  17) 

tot* 

o 

0 

0 

I 

I 

0 

iraptic 

o 

1 

O 

0 

I 

I   (*  !6) 

VTT{K 

I 

0 

0 

0 

I 

3  (7  175,  *  I49»  K  I29) 

VTT€K1Tp6 

o 

o 

0 

I 

I 

0 

wpt 

0 

0 

o 

O 

0 

8  (11.  6.  Od.  2) 

M 

o 

0 

0 

o 

0 

82  (11  49,   Od.  33) 

Total 

48 

36 

50 

71 

205 

1359  (11   715,  Od.  644). 

This  table,  as  also  those  in  the  other  chapters, 
shows  the  prepositions  not  alphabetically,  but  accord- 
ing to  their  decrease  in  frequency  in  Apollonius.  In 
the  more  detailed  account,  however,  the  alphabetical 
order  is  observed. 


—  6o  — 


a)  APOLIXDNIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

I.  262  {ufaqp  b'  d//<£>'  avrov 
Tmesis   is   here    suggested    by 

in  line  270.  Compare  also  o 
347  dp$i  be  naibi  Qfay  (3dle  n^ee,  and  *  97 
d[*<pi(3a?i6vre  d^faovg;  also  Eurip.  Bacch.  1364 
ri  {i  d{i<pi(3d%&€i$  %epalv,  A  clearer  example 
of  tmesis  is  seen  in  IV.  747  dfttyi  be  nenhov  \ 
fiahovaa.  Cf.  2  204;  K  365?  451,  etc. 
£vvv[ii:  III.  1203  d[*<pi  be  <^)dpog  | 
eaaaro-,  IV.  1436  d[i<pi  be  beppa  nefayiov  earo 
Cf.  T  293;  x  542,  g  529. 

II.  1071   d/u^)t  5e    %a?ixeiag 
e^evro.     Cf.  K  261;  r  431. 

IV.  645  d^6  yap  a(V>7^ 
%eve  §ed.     Cf.  >/  14,  3  278,  296. 

b)  APOLI.ONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    HOMER  HAS  ONLY 
THE  COMPOUND. 


IV.  1533  rpi$  b'  d(i<pi  avv 
evretfi  bLv^hreg.  Similarly  is  nepi  in  tmesis 
in  I.  1059.  Cf.  X.  165;  (where,  however,  La 
Roche  construes  nepi  with  7io/Ui>),  1P  562,  etc. 
Aesch.  Pers.  457. 


—  61  — 

3         / 

—  ava  — 

a)  APOIXONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

'Ar-capeo:  I.  1205  ava  ro£a  xal  lovg  \ 
Sepi^a  &  g/lwr;  III.  157  ava  $  dyxvhov  st/lero 
r6£ov.  Cf.  A  32. 

*Av-iary][j.i:  II.  493  ava  ft  iarar  'I^crcjj',  av 
be  Happen  vleg.  Cf.  *  886,  etc. 

3  Ava-(3aivt>>:  I.  1110  a^  $e  xai  avrol  \  fialvov, 
III.  1235  #y  ^  xai  a^rog  |  fifaaro.  Cf.  P.  541; 
y  481?  492. 

*Av-e%o{iai:   I.   673  db>a   5'  fcr^fS' 
Cf.  p  291. 

'Ava-hvt**:   III.  821  nvxva  $  dva 
etiv  Meaxs  Svpduv.     Cf.  i  178,  562,  a  636. 

w:  I.  349  dvd  8'  avro$  dp^og  tipvvr* 
IV.  'l350  dvd  &  vfieag  opaai.     Cf.  * 
812;   3  3. 

b)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    HOMER  HAS  ONLY 
THE  COMPOUND. 

'Av-aeipG>:  I.  1268  xal  dvd  n^arvv  av%ev9 
deipuv  |   IYIGLV   {ivxYifta-,    II.    14    nyiv    %8ipeaaiv 
sd$    dvd  %apa$   dflpat;   III.  873   dv  be 

>     IV.  1550 


7tpoiG%sro.  —  For  the  compound  compare  III. 
72,  IV.  94,  1497;  also  H  130,  X  399,  4>  508, 
*  614,  882;  ^  402,  etc. 


—  62  — 

:   IV.  1627   yjf^og  &    rfyiog 


,     vd 


'iG):  II.  701  evayec^g  iepti  dvd 
tti    xalov.  —  For  the  compound  com- 
pare >7  13?  i  25  1,  etc. 

'Ara-crTtaG):  II.  926  o/  ^'  am  {tsv  xpamv&$ 
ondoav.     Cf.  N.  574  and  A  480. 

"dedicate":    II.  930  d*  &  mi 


3  Ava-<paivo[Mu:  IV.  1709  rolcrt  5f  Ttg 
fiaiYi  ava  ro^p3  &padv$rj  \  VYJGO$.  Cf.  A  62, 

174;  ^  29.     In  II.  1043  Apollonius  has  ex  in 

tmesis  with  the  same  verb. 

c)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    THK  COMPOUND  IS 
POST-HOMKRIC. 


c.    I.   1170     dva  &   e^sro 
Ttanraivtw,  IV.  1330  Ttanr^vaq  dv'  dp  e&r'  sni 


'Av-anelv  "announce":  IV.  1199  vy  wgra 
Ttpcora  $ixvi$  ^v^  Tteipar'  eemev.  Cf.  Find.  P. 
I.  61,  X.  9. 

3  Ava-xa^vnVG):  IV.  1348  d^  5'  sxdhv^av  \ 
.     Cf.  Eurip.  Iph.  Aul.  1146. 

ecj:  III.  929  rdcoi'  rtg  ^eaayryvg  dvd 
d  xiVYjaaaa.     Cf.  Soph.  Tr.  1259. 

):  IV.  1675  dv  &s  fiapeiag  \  o%hi- 
g.     For   the    actual    compound  in 
Apollonius  compare  I.  1167;  III.  1297. 


—  63  — 

vu:    I.  344  6  <53  avro&sv,  ev&a  nep 
faro,  |  beZirepyv  dvd  %e£pa  vavvaaaro. 

d)  APOLIvONIUS  HAS   TMESIS;    THE   COMPOUND  IS  NOT 
QUOTABLE- 

' Ava-vtifLaG):  III.  1230  dv  be  nohvppwov 
v6fia  Gaxog,  dv  &E  xal  £y%o$.  That  tmesis  is 
intended,  is  seen  from  such  examples  as  are 
given  at  the  end  of  this  chapter,  viz.:  I.  1284; 
II.  493;  III.  516;  III.  1230. 

a)  APOU.ONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

'A<|>-oupao:  IV.  1038  avrap  sftoi  tibio  by 
fiapvg  elfaro  $ai(iG>v  \  dy/laiag;  IV.  1312  £%ov 
tf  aTto  %epoi  xapyatog  .  .  .  nenhov.  Cf.  F  294; 
K  458  rov  frano  per  xribsyjv  xvveqv 
ehorro. 

I.  979  (3dtev  &  ano 
Cf.  ^  149  axsbaaov  &  ano 
also  B  183,  $  51;  Aesch.  Ag.  165. 

'A7io-5i;G):  I.  1195  e$v  &  ano 
Cf.  B  261. 

'Ano-xs8dvvv[u:  III.  1359  oc^  ano 
V8<p&ag    exe&aaoav    drjrai.       Homer    has    the 
form  dno-Gxs$dvvv(u  in  tmesis  in  3  149,  [i  385. 

' Ano-xonvt*):    IV.  208  npvfivala   V8&$    dno 
'  exo^sv;    IV.  1270   rovvex    Jyci   ndaav 

dn  ehnifta  <pYi[d  x£xo<p$ai.  Cf.  A  146; 
x  127. 


-64- 

3  Ano-faino:  I.  399  rotg  [leaavjv  oloiaiv  dno 
Mnovro  (for  them  alone  they  reserved 
the  middle  bench);  III.  1067  an  cxpSafyoix; 
Jiinw  cu&og  ;  III.  1135  hiTtova'  ano  narpiba 
yalav;  IV.  750  falnov  tfano  Su/tara  Kipxyg. 
Cf.  1437  (La  Roche);  Soph.  Ph.  1158,  1177. 
XO:  II.  456  TCO^ECJV  5'  dno  n^ftar' 
(the  genitive  is  adnominal;  cf.  III. 
1343).  Cf.  2  345,  *41;  y  392,  fi  420. 

'Ano-nepnG):    IV.  683  n  5'  ore  &q  vv%iuv 
dno   Seifiara    ne^ev    oveipuv.     Cf.  /?  133  aTto 


III.    378    a7to 
;     IV.    983    <X7i6    Ttarpog  | 
Kpovo$.     Cf.  T  292;  Soph.  Ph.  1207. 

b)   APOtLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    HOMER  HAS  ONI.Y 
THE    COMPOUND. 

'Ano-riva:  IV.  1325  aTto  .  .   .  river9  &IIQI- 
Cf.  T  286.  etc. 

C)  APOI.LONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    THE  COMPOUND  IS 
POST-HOMERIC. 

i^G):  IV.  1104  «c5  aTto  narpl 


aG):  IV.  1415  dno  ^l^av\ 
jEG):  I.  364  dno  <5'  elpar'  .  . 
Cf.  Eurip.  Ion  875. 

III.  1017  (TTpa7tT6^  >Ep6>g 


—  65  — 

d)  APOUvONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   THE   COMPOUND   IS  NOT 
QUOTABLE. 

:  I.  280  and 


—  bid  — 

a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

Aia-xed%G>:  IV.  392  bid  r5  Ettne&a  ndvta. 


xedcrcrcu;  IV.  1265  &d  by  Ttd/lou  fj&e  xeda&yj 
Cf.  o  322. 

III.    46    xoa^ec   %pvG6LYi   bid 
Cf.  B  655;  i  157. 

II.    355    'A^fpco^   avrqv   5ta 
axpyv.     Cf.  P  522,  2  618. 


b)  APOU.ONIUS   HAS   TMESIS;    HOMER   HAS  ONI,Y  THE 
COMPOUND. 


II.   581    sv&a   xal    ev&a   bid 
H6vto$.      For    the    compound 
compare  I.  546;  IV.  1358;  also  0535,  N  277. 

Ata-xebdvvvfu:  II.  1128  de^ai  vy]6$  .  .  .  bid 
bovpata    ndvr'  sxeSaaaav;    II.  1192    xeivyv  ye 
xaxov  &id  xvp  sxe&aaasv. 
Ata-<Tfi;6>:  III.  670 


C)  APOU.ONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    THE  COMPOUND  IS 
POST-HOMERIC. 

Ata-Ttfpda);     II.  608   bid  VYI\    rtepvjari',    IV. 
461  YIV  ov&e  81  ai&oi 

• 


—  66  — 

d)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   THE   COMPOUND   IS  NOT 
QUOTABLE. 

vcj  :  IV.  599  &d  ntepd 


This  double  preposition  never  occurs  in 
tmesis  in  Homer.  Apollonius  has  one  doubt- 
ful example,  which,  however,  as  it  seems,  is  to 
be  attributed  to  editors;  viz.:  IV.  409  ore  ^  [ie 
Sai.  The  reading  of  LG  is 
which  is  the  same  palaeographically 
as  &e£  si&ai. 

—  ex  — 

a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

eG):    I.  396  ex  &  dpa  {leGOyv  \  ypeov, 


II.  184  ex 

Cf.  A  369,  A  116,  A  381;  f  140,  etc. 

'Ex-{3aivu:    I.  1018  ex  8*  dp  eftvcav.     Cf. 
A  457,  438,  439,  T  113;  ^  456,  etc. 

'Ex-/?cfcUo>:    II.  926   ex  Se  (3aMvre<;  \  Tteia- 
Cf.     A  436,  A  109. 

ao):    I.    485    ex   5'    ey&aaaev  afyv 
^ag.      Cf.  Z  471. 
'EZ-epeo[iai:     III:  1166  ex  T'  epeovro.     Cf. 
A  204,  233;  B  257;  x  63,  109. 

"E£-  sipi  "exibo":  III.  112  ex  $*  loav 
Cf.  $  370,  6)  501. 


-67- 

II.  202  ex 

Cf.  K  140;  y  406,  8  121,  403,  740,  o  395,  n  165, 
343,  etc. 

Likewise  are  we  to  construe  in  the  follow- 
ing examples  ex  with  paco,  though  that  verb 
does  nowhere  occur  in  the  actual  composition, 
and  for  this  reason,  it  seems,  ex-xio  has  been 
kept  out  of  the  dictionaries.  The  rule  of 
Haggett  "to  classify  as  adverbial  only  those 
instances  in  which  the  preposition  does  not 
in  Homer  enter  into  composition  with  the  verb 
and  so  cannot  be  said  to  be  separated  from 
it  by  tmesis,"  must  not  be  followed  too 
scrupulously.  Haggett  himself  did  not  do  so, 
since  with  Vogrinz  and  Monro  he  denies  the 
existence  of  the  independent  adverbial  use  of 
ex  in  Homer.  Hence  he  must  have  taken  ex 
with  xiev  in  o  492.  This  applies  also  to 
rG),  J^-aJleo^ou,  ex-xo&vnw,  ex- 

and  J£-O)$^G),  which  are  never  found  in 
Homer  as  actual  compounds,  though  tmesis 
has  to  be  assumed  in  the  case  of  each  one. 
Cf.  T  367,  E  161,  N  655,  <£  119;  x  559,  X  64,  etc. 

'Ex-xtd>:  III.  269  ex  &  avrvi  Ei&vla  bdfiap 
xiev  Aiyrao.  Cf.  a>  492  ex  &  vlo$  Aohiov  xiev, 
where  tmesis  is  confirmed  by  the  preceding 
J£-£/l$c6*'.  The  other  two  examples  in  Apollo- 
nius  are  III.  650  ex  be  ndfav  xiev  ev8o$ev  and 


—  68  — 
III.  868  ex  &  §vpa£e  xiovaa:     Cf.  2   29  ex  & 


vG>:  III.  280  ex  &  oys 
iv  Ttoaiv  ov&ov  d^ei^ev.     Cf.  r\  220. 
U7tTG):    III.  961    ex  ft  dpa  ol 
Tteaev.     Cf.  YI   283;   also   K  94.—  IV. 
1016  &$  epoi  ex  nvxivcd  eneaov  Spevs*;. 

'Ex-peo:  IV.  1677  ex  M  ol  ijpip  |   .   .   .  far 
Cf.  N  655?  CD  H9;  y  455?  i  290. 

'Ex-$alvu:  II.  1043   ex  5'   l^aAi;^  | 
enl  Ttporepco  nenorri^vo^.     Cf.  II  299. 

'E^-^e6>:  II.  904  Jx  $  e%eav  niavvoi 
Mva.     Cf.  A  525,  4>  180. 

b)  APOU<ONIUS  HAS  TMESIS:    HOMER    HAS   ONLY  THE 
COMPOUND. 

i:  III.  311  ex  5'  ix6 


:    IV.    1744    ex    r9 
AiaoviSy.     Homer   has   e%-ovo[td%G)   in    tmesis. 
Cf.  A  361,  T  398,  etc. 

:   IV.  329  ex  5'  eTtepyaav  |  $oidg 
Bpvyyii&a$  dy^o^i  vrjGovg.     Cf.  YI  35, 
561, 

'E*-7*ri5(o:   IV.  478  rpig  55  ^  dyog 
Cf.  e  322. 


-69- 

C)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    THE  COMPOUND  IS 
POST-HOMERIC. 


?E£-ara-7ti'£G)  :    III,  231  ex  $e  Ttvpog 

dunveieaxov;  cf.  III.  1291;  IV.  472.  For 
the  tmesis  within  the  double  preposition  com- 
pare Kuehner-Blass,  Vol.  II.  p.  321. 

'Etf-^odco:  III.  631  ex  fr  efioyjaav  \  %c*)6[ievoi. 
Cf.  Xen.  Cyr.  6,  10. 

'Ex-xeipu>:  IV.  1031  xal  sx  Sepog  or/low 
dv$p&v  |  xeipsrs  yyiyevscw.  Homer  has  dno-xsiptd 
in  tmesis;  cf.  K  456,  N  546;  also  Eurip.  Hec.  910. 

'E*-/la^7tco:  III.  371  ex  8eol  o^ar  e^a^ev. 

'Ex-faint**:  IV.  1401  ex  be  'hinovtuv  |  .  .  .  . 
oi'arcS^;  IV.  1759  ex  &e  hinovrag  \  ^Ttdpryv.  Cf. 
Eurip.  Andr.  1040. 

):  IV.  603  ex 


IV.  83  ex  ue, 
Cf.  Eurip.  Bacch.  258. 

IV.  1123    ex    5'    dpa   naaav  \ 
ayyehiyv.     Cf.  Aesch.  Pr.  950. 

d)  APOIXONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    THE   COMPOUND   IS  NOT 
QUOTABLE. 

IV.    1669    ex 


—  70  — 

—  h  — 

a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

'Eu-fiaivu:  I.  381  h  $  apa  Ti<pv$  fij 
Cf.  *  481. 

'E(u-/3d;UG>:  I.  392  h  U  ol  iarov  \ ..  !/3d 
Cf  *  352;  (3  330,  £  268. 

'Ev-shavvu:    I.   526   ev  yap  ol    $6pv 
&faaro.     CfT?59. 

"E^-a^t :    I.    730    ev   [Lev    saav 
Similar  examples  are  I.  73 5,  747,  763.     Cf. 
419;  v  438;  also  h.  Ap.  395. 

I\   II.  274  kv  j/cip  eqxev  \ 
;  III.  958  ^/Uncn  53 
faev  OL^VV.  Cf.  H  182,  n  291,  *  177,  etc. 

'E^-7t67trco:  I.  566  Jv  5e  /Uyi>g  neazv 
The  other  examples  in  Apollonius  are  I.  1028, 
1284;  IV.  393.  Cf.  A  134,  0  485,  A  297, 
n  276,  $  9. 

b)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;     HOMER    HAS   ONLY  THE 
COMPOUND. 

'B?HSp£t&d:  1. 1198  sv  $e  Ttkarvv 
Cf.  6  383. 

'E^-7U7ivl>7^6: 1.  697  ev  &  dyopyj 
Cf.  Herod.  II.  87. 

C)    APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    THE  COMPOUND  IS 
POST-HOMERIC. 

o:  IV.  1292  h  be  KOL 
i.     Cf.  Arist.  Ran.  911;  PI.  714. 


—  eni — 

a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

ec*:  I.  348  enl  5'  yveov,  ox;  exehevev 
III.  946  enl  $6 
Of.  T  461;  ^  294=352. 

'ETU'/Jd^/Uo:  III.  1189  el  xai  nep  enl  % 
fiovai  /3d/lotro;  III.  1192  vv^  &  InnoiGiv 
em  %vyd',  IV.  1146  l$%e  &  £xd<TT>7v|ai&i$ 

o^cjg  enl  %etpa  /^aXecr^ai;  IV.  1744  rah'  dp 
tfc  [ivfjanv  xpa&'w  (3dtev  (Merkel).  Cf.  H  272; 
440,  £  520,  T  58,  v  4. 

'ETt-e/Uxi^cj:   I    755    eni   Muprt^og 
.    Cf.  H  223. 

:  IV.  493  sni  &£  G^LGL 

.   Cf.  A  221;  5429, >?  283,^152. 
:  II.  183  rco  ^a6  ot  y>?pag 
[Zeug].    Cf.  i  288,  o  474. 
'ETt-op^^t:  I.  850  Kvnpig  ydp  fTti 
Ifiepov  wp(T8^;  III.  516  eni  be  Tptrog  "ISag    copro 
fieya  fypovew,  enl  6'  vies  Tvvbapeoio.    Cf.  1P  759, 
689;  y  176,  ^  313. 

'ETtt-Tte^o^at:  IV.  1654  onnore  fiy  ol  en' 
dxdfiarog  nehoL  al6v.  Cf.  o  408. 

'ETtt-rtS^/ui:  II:  534  xai  sty*  iepd  Sevreg;  II. 
693  enl  {lypia  ^Gof^ev  aiytiv.  Other  examples 
are  IV.  609,  1301,  1534.  Cf.  B  29,  A  41, 
2  317,  *  18. 


-  72- 


-%eG):  II.  191  em 
similarly  III.  205,  1209.     Cf.  0  158,  0  589; 
7  289,  a  14. 

b)   APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    HOMKR  HAS  ONLY 
THE    COMPOUND. 

'Eft-aa'pco:  III.  591  oSveioig  enl  %elpa  e^v 
xredreaaiv  deipeiv. 

'Erti-xsiftai:  IV.  1392  enl  £^p>7  yap  exeiro  \ 
5t\]/a.  For  the  compound  compare  III.  430;  also 
Z  458. 

'Erti-oaoofiaL:  II.  28  eni   $'  oaastai  o! 
olog    avfya.  Cf.  P  381. 

:  III.  511  S^og  ey  eni 


87tco:  I.  400  mi  ft  srpenov  aiv^aavreg  \ 
Tlfyvv  svareiprig  ol^ta  vyjog  epva&ai. 


C)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    THE  COMPOUND  IS 
POST-HOMERIC. 


ea>:  II.  1319  TtoMeaai  ft  enl 
Ttapetdg.     Cf.  ^  42    ndvrag    vnb 


eco:  1.639  Tol6v  Gfyiv  STti  8eog  Tj 
G>:  IV.  640  bewov  yap  enl 


v^G):  I.   541  €716  be 
II.  682  xJiv^ev  ft  em  xvpara  ^ep(T6);  cf.  I.  257. 


—  73  — 


III.    750    dMd    paX    or 
enl  ytoxep&s  •  Mfov  vnvo^    IV.  1063 
on?  {iiv  sni  Oftvyspri  hd(3ev  aloa. 

IV.  1669    hsvyaheov    53   sni  ol 


'E7ti-<paifyvvG>:  III.   831    c&o^y?  |  vexrapey 
enl  ^poa;  cf.  IV.  661. 


—  61$  - 
a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

'Etcr-i/ora:  I.  321  Jg  ^  evdyoav.    Of.  M  335. 

b)  APOIXONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    THE  COMPOUND  IS 
POST-HOMERIC. 

'Eu7-/3&l/U>:  IV.  594  eg  ft  efiahov  [tv%arov 
f)6ov  'Hpt&xvoto,  with  which  compare  I.  928. 
IV.  1577  si$  aX6$  olSfia  pdfyre;  cf.  IV.  637, 
824,  etc.  In  case-construction  the  phrase  would 
mean  "to  cast  into  the  sea",  "to  throw  over- 
board "rather  than  "to  put  out  to  sea";  cf.  A  314. 


a)  APOLI.ONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

KaS-oupfG):  III.  725  xa&  be  [iiv  d%hi)$  elfav. 
Cf.  L  372  xd$  8e  fiiv  vnvog  Typet;  also  /I  426,  o 
496;  n  268. 

:  III.  888  xar'  avro^L 
Cf.  N  737,  0  384. 
:  III.  154 


-74  — 

K(&7tQ.     Cf.  B  414,  692,  r  356,  E  305,  q> 
125;  i  482,  539,  x  172,  etc. 

):  II.  742  Gcyy  &  ovTtors  VYJV  ye  xard 
axpnv.  Cf.   B  560,  699;  i  6,  a,  497. 
):  I.  434  xa,8  <5'  afivbig  rd  ye 
Ttdvra  xahv4>avT£$    nvxa    ^^co;    II.   894   xar' 
avTo^i  5'  au(u£  xa^ii)^8L\ax^8i(^g  xaxog  olrog.     Cf. 
A  460,  B  423,  Z  464,  P  594,  II  325;  y  457,  etc. 
Kara-/l£t7ta):    I.    1144   3>7p£g   ^'   ff/li;oi;g  re 
Kara  %v&6%ov$  rs  ^movrsg  \  ovpyaiv 
snfavSov:  IV.  298  xar'  avro^i  nal8a 
Cf.  P  535,  $  201,  fl  470;  x  209,  <r  269,  <p  90,  etc, 
Kara-paj:  IV.  1701  xara  <?  eppezv  aa%a- 
Uuvn  |  Sdxpva.     Cf.  A  810,  II  109. 

Kara-  ^ao:  IV.  367  xard  $  oi^oov  ala%og 
6%6va  |  S^vrspaLs.    Cf.  II  123;  >?  286,  ^  433,  etc. 

b)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    HOMER  H/-S  ONLY 
THE  COMPOUND. 

Kar-spvxu:    I.    1079    rovq    &s    xar'    av&i  \ 
epvxov,    II.  530  dptcrT^eg  $e  xarJ 
spvx6[i8voi.    Cf.  II.  287,  also  Z  192; 
a  315,  etc. 

Kar-spTxo:  II.  933  xa8  8'  dpa  /lat^)o$  spvood- 
ravvovro  \  e$  Tto^ag  dpipoTepovg.    Cf.  €  261, 
151,  etc. 

):  I.  1155  mra  <53  f vvaae  novrov. 
):  IV.  1076 
xard  ioi  voov  exhaaev  d 


—  75  — 

C)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;  THE  COMPOUND  IS 
POST-  HOMERIC. 


fa:  IV.  1281  [o^/?pog]  oars  (3otiv 
xard  ftvpia  ex^vaev  epya.  Cf.  Archil.  8,  4. 

Kararfiifivu:  III.  648  xav9  avroSi  {lifivcv. 
Cf.  <P  163  Trap'  aflS*  f£cvov. 

Kara-vdo[iai:  1.  1356  ^>7  yap  pa  xar'  ai' 
Cf  II.  522. 


d)  APOLLONIUS  HAS   TMESIS;    THE   COMPOUND  IS  NOT 
QUOTABLE- 

Kara-Tte/lefu^G):  II.  91  xd8  be  {3ap6lav\%elp 
snl  ol  nsheui&v.  Cf.  the  scholiast,  and  Liddell 
and  Scott  s.  v. 


a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 


>:  II.  1279  avrixa  &  'Ayxalog  rolov 
fisrd  (iv&ov  eemev;  cf.  III.  522  avrixa  5' 
rolov  GTtog  {isreeirtsv 

Mfra-rp67t6):  III.  261 
alaa.     III.  649  psrd  5'  erpdner'  avri$  oniaoG)  \ 
Icr'.     Cf.  A  199. 


b)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    HOMER  HAS  ONLY 
THE  COMPOUND. 


t:   I.   110  {terd  $ 

.     For  the  compound  compare  I.  710; 
III.  348?  697;  also  3>  422;  a  229,  etc. 


—  76- 
—  Ttapd  — 

a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

IIapa-/3d;UG):  IV.  484  KoX^og  ay#»i 
Ttapd  i^a  /3d/loz"ro  |  ^pcofg;    IV.   892 
d  Ttela/ta  /Jd^otro.     Cf.  E  369,  0  504,  N  35. 
Tlap-iGrqfu:  III.  1  E/  <53  d)/e  *>£*>,  'Eparco, 
Ttapd  y  loraao.     Cf.  E    809. 

b)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    THE   COMPOUND   IS 

POST-HOMERIC. 

pao:  IV.  1777  d^d  IKYI^QI  \  yalav 
Ttapd  r  Ai'/lt^a  {isrpyjaavreg.     Cf.  I. 
595,  1116;  II.  939,  etc. 

C)    ^POLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    THE   COMPOUND  IS  NOT 
QUOTABLE. 

Tlap-6pvv(u:  III.  486  reyjv  napa  ^u^T^pa 
[iv$oi$  opvvSi  faaaofievog.  Cf.  Liddell  and 
Scott  s.  v. 

—  Ttapex  — 

Hap8x-a[iei@G):  II.  94  6  5'  ayj(?  a^fro^LO  Ttape* 
yovv  yovvog  dfisifiw,  cf.  I.  581  Il^Xtd^ag  ^e 
7tap6%ri[iEi/3ov  ifinvag.  The  compound  does  not 
occur  in  Homer;  but  II.  94  is  a  close  imitation 
of  A  547. 


a)  APOLLONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

Ilept-  6i[ti:  II.  58  oaaov  Jyco  pwovg  re  fio&v 
r    ei[ii  tapea&ai.     Cf.  ©  27  roaaov 
T'  sift' 


-77   - 

Tie  pt-m/luTtTG)  :   I.    218    hvyaioi$    ebd 
nepl  vifyeeGGi  m/li/^ag;  III.  746  xai  rwa 
fi^repa  rsSve&ruv  dbwov  Ttepi  x&[ij  sxd^vnrev. 
Cf.  K  201,  H  359,  II  735,  II  20;  a  201. 
-^ao:  III.  291  c5g  Se  yi;^>7  ^ 

6i.     Cf.  B  19;  $  282,  v  189. 


b)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    THE   COMPOUND  IS 
POST-HOMERIC. 


:    III.  791 

Ttdcra  flo/jGEi  \  Ttorpov  sfiov.  Cf.  T  362  yehaoae  be 
Ttdaa  Ttepi  %3co^. 

HepL-baicj:  IV.  867  ri  /we^  yap  /Jporax 
t  crapxag  e&xtei'.    Cf.  d^<pL-8ai^  in  M  35. 
IV.  1134  ^£lm  ^pov  nepi 


:  I.  1059  rptg  Tt^pi  %ahxsiotg  avv 
. 
:  I.  1197 

—  Ttpog  — 


IIpo(T-/?d^l/lG):  I.  1231  Ttpog  yap  ol 
an'  a&epog  avyd%ovGa\  /5a/l/le  Gefyvaiyj.     Cf.  H 
421;  T  433. 

—  avv  — 

a)  APOI,I<ONIUS  AND  HOMER  BOTH  HAVE  TMESIS. 

Sw-rilawd):  I.  1026  ai;^  53  l/laaai' 
re  xai  aGrtibag  akhYihoiGiv.     Cf.  cr  98. 


-78- 

2ty-£eo):  II.  563  avv  $E 
Cf.  fl  358  avv  be  yepovn  voog  ^vro. 

b)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    HOMER    HAS   ONI<Y   THE 
COMPOUND. 

2w-avTO6):  IV.  1181  avv  <5'  dvE 
^T6or.     Cf.  IV.  1484. 

^vv-epyc,):  II.  201  pivol  be  avv  oarea  (tovvov 

zepyov. 

c)  APOI,I,ONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;   THE  COMPOUND  IS 
POST-HOMERIC. 

2u/w-7topcrwG):    IV.   547    avv  yap    ol   ava% 
nopavvs  x&ev&ov. 

d)  APOLLONIUS  HAS  TMESIS;    THE   COMPOUND   IS  NOT 
QUOTABLE. 

^vv-afia^vv^:  III.  295  TO  ^'  [Tt^p]  d&eafyarov 
s%  ohiyoLO  bahov  dveypofisvov  avv  xdpfyea  Ttdvr' 

encd:     IV.    1275     avv    5'     evvenov 


:  IV.  307  (3a^v  vnep  av%eva 
t>7$;  IV.  600  ov  be  Tig  i^cap  .  .  |  o/a>wg  bvvarai 
vrtep.     Cf.  X  597. 


•  vnex  • 


:  I.  596  fie^ov  Inez  nora^olo 
'Afivpoio    fcesSpa,  which   the    scholiast 


-79- 


explains  by  napapel^ai.  The  compound 
itft£x/?&Uxj  is  not  found  in  Homer,  but  compare 
@  369  ovx  av  vne^eipvye  Sri^og  vftarog  aina 


-  V7t£X7lp6  - 

IV.  225  vrt£X7tp6   $£  Ttovrov   erafivev 
cf.    v7t£xnpo$£ovaaL   in    IV.    935.       The    word 
u  is  a  "a7ta£ 


SUMMARY. 

I.  NUMBER  OF  EXAMPLES  OF  TMESIS  IN  APOLLONIUS. 

a)  Apollonius  agrees  with  Homer  .......................................  no 

b)  Apollonius  has  tmesis  where  Homer  has  only  the 

compound  ..................................................................  39 

c)  Apollonius  has  tmesis  in  compounds  that  are  post- 

Homeric  .....................................................................  46 

c)  Apollonius  has  tmesis  in  new  compounds  .......................  10 

Total,  205 

II.    NUMBER  OF  VERBS  USED  IN  TMESIS  BY 
APOLLONIUS. 

a)  Apollonius  and  Homer  both  have  tmesis  ........................  68 

b)  Apollonius  has  tmesis;  Homer  has  only  the  compound..  33 

c)  Apollonius  has  tmesis;  the  compound  is  post-  Homeric..  40 

d)  ApOilonius  has  tmesis;  the  compound  is  not  quotable...     9 

Total,  150 

Examples  in  which  the  preposition  is  repeated  in  a 
second  clause:  I.  1284  tv  dt  <r<j)iv  Kparepbv  V€?KOS  irfoei',  tv  dt 
Ko\(f)bs  \  d(T7reros;  II.  493  dva  5'  iVrar'  'I-^crwv,  |  &v  dt  Bop^iot  ufes; 
III.  1230  &v  d£  iroXtppivov  v&fjia  crdicos,  &v  5£  Kal  €7xos;  III.  516  tirl 
dt  rpiros  "Idas  \  (Spro,  fi^ya  Qpovtwv,  M  5'  vite  Tvvdaptoio.  For 
similar  examples  in  Homer  compare  A  447,  S  419,  ^  887-888. 
Cf.  also  Kiihner-Gerth,  Sec.  445,  2  a.  i. 


—  8i  — 


CHAPTER  IV. 


WHY    PREPOSITIONS    IN    CONSTRUC- 
TION WITH  CASES  ARE  RARER  IN 
POETRY  THAN  IN  PROSE. 

The  frequency  of  the  prepositions  in  case-construc- 
tion varies  considerably  in  all  the  departments  of  the 
literature.  In  poetry,  as  a  rule,  the  prepositions  are 
rarer  than  in  prose.  In  valuing  this  fact,  however, 
from  a  stylistic  point  of  view,  we  must  bear  in  mind 
that  in  poetry  the  prepositions  are  more  plastic  and 
weigh,  if  not  number,  more  than  in  prose.  Cf. 
Gildersleeve,  A.  J.  P.,  XXIII.,  16.  Vogrinz,  Berl. 
Phil.  Woch.  for  1885,  sp.  225-230,  says :  "  Betrachtet 
man  theoretisch  das  Werden  des  Prapositions- 
ausdruckes,  so  kann  man  gemass  den  gelauterten 
Vorstellungen  die  wir  heutzatage  von  sprachlicher 
Entwicklung  haben,  aunehmen,  dass,  unbeschadet 
der  vollen  formalen  und  Bedeutungskraft  des  Kasus, 
dasselbe  Verhaltniss,  welches  durch  den  Kasus  allein 
ausgedriickt  wurde,  in  der  Proposition  resp.  in  dem 
adverbialen  Zusatze  entschiedener  zum  Ausdruck 
gebracht  wurde.  Bei  dieser  Fiille  und  diesem 
sozusagen  pleonastischen  Ausdruck  konnte  es  aber 
nicht  bleiben.  Der  weitere  Gang  war  der,  dass  die 
Proposition  deutlicher  ins  Bewustsein  der  Sprechen- 
den  trat  als  die  Endung  der  Kasus. " 

There  are  several  reasons  for  this  difference  in 
frequency.  First  of  all,  the  case-adverbs,  which  are 
so  numerous  in  epic  poetry,  often  take  the  place  of 


—  82  — 

the  prepositions.  Moreover  place- relations  that  would 
in  prose  be  expressed  by  preposition  and  case,  can  be 
denoted :  a)  by  a  simple  case  :  the  locative  genitive, 
the  ablatival  genitive,  the  locative  dative  and  the 
accusative  of  the  goal ;  b)  by  the  suffixes  -$£>,-#:,  and 
-<5e.  Therefore,  before  taking  up  Apollonius'  use  of 
the  prepositions  with  cases,  it  is  well  to  compare  his 
use  of  these  last  two  constructions  with  the  Homeric 
use. 

A.     SIMPLE    CASES    TO     EXPRESS    LOCAL 
RELATIONS. 

I>  LOCAIv    GENITIVE. 

Setting  aside  adverbial  forms  such  as  aurou,  <*?%<>%, 
rylou,  6(f>oo9  which  though  originating  in  this  construc- 
tion do  not  have  the  same  stylistic  effect,  we  find 
according  to  Linsenbarth,  De  Apollonii  Rhodii 
Casuum  Syntaxi  Comparato  Usu  Homerico,  few 
examples  in  Apollonius  as  compared  with  Homer. 
Of  the  subdivisions  made  by  Monro  (Sec.  149), 
neither  the  first  nor  the  second  are  represented  in 
Apollonius.  Examples  after  verbs  of  motion  are  . 
I.  687  [/3o£g]  yeioroftov  veiolo 

aporpov.  Cf.  K  353  l^xe/ievai  vsLolo 

Tiyxrov  dporpo^;  also  B  785,  801,  T  14,  A 

244,  E  222,  597,  etc. 

III.  1055  al  xev  6ptvo[i£vov$  Tio/lazg  vsiolo 
.  Cf.  P  748  ns&ioLo  bianpvaiov  terv- 
also  P  372. 

Without  Homeric  parallels  are: 
I.  546  drpan6$    £>$    ^XoepoZo  ^LSi^ofievYj    nebioio. 

Cf.  Call.  Del.  141  8i£i8oi6vyj  ev 


-83- 

III.  953  arySeur  layy  xeap  "her  heart  broke 

within  her  breast." 
The  quasi-partitive  genitive,  like  nov  y^  (Lat. 

ubi   terrarum)    occurs    in    the   following 

passages: 

II.  1139  onTto&i  yaiyg;  similarly  IV.  532  ouy 

%$ov6$.     Cf.  Eurip.  Her.  19,  46. 

III.  770  ev$a  xaxtiv.  Cf.  Soph.  Aj.  659;  Eurip, 
Tro.  680. 

IV.  1476  'Hpax^a  | ...  dtTiapscr^g  r^ov  %&ov6$ 

eloaTo  Avyxsvg  \  rcog  l8s6LV.    Cf.  Arist.  Nub. 

138  VYihov  yap  oua3  t&v  dj/pco^. 

Under  the  partitive  genitive  may  also  be 
put  III.  876  'Apviaolo  hofoaanevrj  norafiolo,  and 
III.  1203  hoeaaaro  ....  no^a^olo  |  .  .,.  .  vepsv 
^a$.  Cf.  E  6,  Z  508,  0  265;  /3  261,  etc. 

2)    ABI.ATIVAI,  GENITIVE. 

The  ablatival  genitive  is  used  in  prose 
chiefly  with  verbs  of  separation  and  of  depri- 
vation. In  addition  to  these  verbs,  it  occurs 
in  poetry  frequently  with  verbs  of  motion. 
This  latter  use  had  to  be  reinforced  by  prepo- 
sitions in  prose. — Goodell,  The  Genitive  in 
Sophocles,  A.  Ph.  As.,  XV.,  has  collected  from 
Sophocles  456  examples  of  the  ablatival  genitive 
without  prepositions  (17.  1  %  lyric),  616  with 


—  84- 

prepositions  (14  %  lyric)  and  96  with  adverbs 
(18.5  %  lyric).  Apollonius,  through  the 
influence  of  the  tragic  poets,  has  extended  the 
use  of  the  ablatival  genitive.  Under  the 
following  three  divisions  I  have  mainly  re- 
arranged the  results  of  Linsenbarth  so  as  to 
bring  the  agreement  and  the  difference  between 
Apollonius  and  Homer  into  greater  prominence. 
Besides  presenting  the  Tia/toua  xaivti$,  I  have 
added  some  new  examples. 

a)   WITH  VERBS  USED  ALSO  BY  HOMER  WITH  THE 
ABI,ATIVAI,    GENITIVE. 

a)  With  simple  verbs: — SevsaSai  I.  732; 

II.  976;    IV.   491.     Cf.   B  128,  T  294,  N  310, 
etc.— elvai  II.  523,  992;  III.  358;  IV.  990, 1387. 
Cf.  Z  211;  a  215,  8  206,  etc.     In  I.  230  Apollo- 
nius uses  a7to;  Homer  has  ex  in  A  63,  B  197; 
a  33,  40. — eixaSslv  I.  105.    Cf.  Anew  in  A  509, 
E  348;  7i  42,  a  10.— tyeaSai  I.  334;   II.  1204; 

III.  1267;   IV.  1054.     Cf.  B  98,  T  84,  N  360, 
etc.— ^yeivlIL  1300;  IV.  667.  Cf.  A  210,  319; 
Hes.  Th.  48.— teineaSai   I.  315.     Cf.  *  523. 
529.— Meiv  I.  903;  III.  62.     Cf.  e  397,  v  321, 
n  364.— TiaiW  IV.  712,  773,  777.     Cf.  B  595; 
<?>  228,  p  8.— TtaveoSai  III.  418.     Cf.  A  467,  B 
430,  H  319.— %<%ea$ai  III.  1050.    Cf.  A  504, 
M  172, 262, etc.— &$ela$ai  II.  1056.    Cf.  M  420. 


-85- 

(3)  With  compound  verbs: — dva&veaSou  I. 
1228.  Cf.  A  359;  e  337.— dvanvelv  II.  609,  739. 
Of.  A  382,  0  235,  T  227.— d-noepyeiv  I.  865.  Cf. 
n  238.— dno^ysiv  I.  1325.  Cf.  H  263,  A  255, 
O  577,  etc.— faoMsiv  II.  456;  III.  1343.  Cf. 
X  50;  <?>  46.— dnopopyvvvai  II.  86.  Cf.  E  416. 
— dnoTt^eiv  I.  1220;  II.  776,  959.  Cf.  fj.  285, 
o  382.— (XTtor&ecrSGU  I.  129.  Cf.  <p  119.— 
IV.  1118.  Cf.  K  364,  X  456.— 
1. 190;  II.  317;  IV.  1020.  Cf.  B  794. 
11.885.  Cf.(3  404.— exyiyvEOiSai 
I.  56, 157,  208,  223.  952,  975;  III.  364;  IV.  260. 
Cf.  E  637,  T  199,  418,  etc.— sxntveiv  IV.  478. 
Cf.  e  322.— exaaovv  II.  1186.  Cf.  8  501.— 
exaevea&u  IV.  40.  Cf.  H  1;  t  373,  ^  366.- 
ex<paivea§ou  I.  1310.  Cf.  ca  441.— et&yeiv  IV. 
749.  Cf.  E  35,  352,  A  487.— J£cupei(rSai  II.  184; 

III.  279,  843,  1012.    Cf.  0  323,  T  137,  fl  754. 
e£dM.ea§au  II.  268;  IV.  464.    Cf.  E  142,  P  342, 
*  399.— %anopaiveiv  III.  199,  326.    Cf.  ft  306. 
—eZ&jtreiv  III.  207.   .Cf.  H  51;   %  466.— e^- 
avvsiv  I.  987;  IV.  1136,  1758.     Cf.  E  324,  K 
499,  etc.—  ^ep^to-Stti  II.  202.   Cf.  K  140,  X  237; 
v  371,  etc.— e£iEvau  I.  446.    Cf.  a  374,  (3  139- 
xaraflaiveiv  III.   888.      Cf.  E   109,  H  329.- 
mTep2«7$cu  IV.  329, 1682.  Cf.T  125.— mra^etv 

IV.  25,  34.    Cf.  *  282.— ^isvaL  III.  274,  476. 
Cf.  A  234,  240,  etc  —  ^era^riysiv  I.  1271.    Cf. 
1 157,261,299.-i>7to^f(r3at  III.  996.    Cf.A401. 


—  86  — 

b)  WITH  VERBS  NOT  USED  IN  HOMER  WITH  THE  SIMPLE 
ABItATlVAI,  GENITIVE. 

a)  With  simple  verbs:—  dri&iv  I.  615.— 
etovvaiv  III.  597.  Of.  Soph.  0.  T.  97;  Eurip. 
Med.  lO—ewTveiv  I.  296;  II.  331;  III.  561. 
Of.  Eurip.  Phoen.  1260.— toQ&v  II.  650;  III. 
783.  Of.  Aesch.  Pr.  376,  654;  Soph.  Aj.  61.— 
pveaSaill.  218;  III.  905;  IV.  1071,  1701.  Cf. 
Eurip.  Ale.  77.— oaovv  III.  1126.  Cf.  Soph. 
Ant.  1162,  Phil.  919;  Eurip.  Or.  779.— Qspeiv 
I.  1183. 

/?)  With  compound  verbs:— ave%ew  I.  673. 
Cf.  Soph.  0.  T.  !74.-drax>7;aW  III.  227;  IV. 
598.— dva&p6ax6u>  III.  956.—  dmevai  I.  1304; 
IV.  1696.  Cf.  Soph.  0.  T.  264;  Eur.  Med.  456. 
— dvaxd^eaSai  IV.  1239.— dnopvvaSai  I.  800.— 
d<pixdveiv  I.  I7*t.—8iaxpiv£iv  III.  1128.— sxfiofalv 
I.  845.~^an^cu  IV.  293.  Cf.  Eurip.  Bacch. 
762,  H.  F.  625. 

Homer,  on  the  other  hand,  has  the  simple 
ablatival  genitive  after  d<pvcaeiv  (4>  305)  and 
xara^cd<pdv  (L  460).  Apollonius  uses  a  pre- 
position with  these  verbs  (III.  616,  1347). 
Expressions  like  flhdntovGi  xefav&ov  (a  195) 
or  ebyjoe  x&ev&ov  ($  380)  are  not  found  in 
Apollonius. 


-87    - 

C)  WITH  VERBS  NOT  FOUND  IN  HOMER. 

avnanav  II.  600.  —  dTtafteipeoSai  III.  784. 
—  anoxaraT'&eoSai  III.  816.  —  aTtoxi&vao&ai  IV. 
133.  —  VL7tofai%ziv  IV.  478.  —  OTtovoo^eiv  IV. 
36.—  taaiSfioSai  IV.  35.—  €*/?a,w?ivIV.  1415.— 
sxTtpopotelv  IV.  1537,  1585.—  I*pi$*y3ai  IV.  83. 
Of.  Eurip.  Bacch.  25S.—%avare%teiv  IV.  1421. 
—efavievai  II.  461;  III.  69,  756;  IV.  318,  560, 
757.  —  e%6pvva§ai  I.  306.  — 
III.  136.  —  xara7tpo%elv  III.  1117.  —  f 
SOLL  III.  436  —  voGfyi^ew  (active  not  Homeric) 
III.  795.—  vTtoreKteaSai  II.  83. 


SUMMARY  OF  THE  ABLATlVAt  GENITIVE. 

a)  WITH  VERBS  ALSO  USED  BY  HOMER  WITH  THE  ABL.  GEN. 

a)  Simple  verbs  —  10;  No.  of  ex.  24. 
£)  Compound  verbs  —  30;  No.  of  ex.  52. 

b)  WITH  VERBS  NOT  USED  BY  HOMER  WITH  THE  ABI,,  GEN. 

a)  Simple  verbs  —  7;  No.  of  ex.  13. 

/3)  Compound  verbs  —  10;  No.  of  ex.  12. 

C)  WITH  VERBS  NOT  FOUND  IN  HOMER. 

Only  compounds,  except  voff<t>lfav\  in  all  18;  No.  of  ex.  24. 
Total  of  verbs  75;  of  ex.  125. 

3)    LOCATIVE   DATIVE. 

The  dative  of  place  without  a  preposition 
is  frequent  in  the  epic;  in  lyric  and  tragic 
poetry  the  prepositional  use  begins  to  pre- 
dominate; in  prose,  with  the  exception  of  a 
few  locatives  of  proper  names,  as  ' 


—  88  — 


,  3E/teixrm, 

the  prepositions  ev,  S7ti,7tapd,  npo$  are  used. 
Of.  Monro,  Sec.  145;  Main,  Locative  Expressions 
in  the  Attic  Orators. 

According  to  Linsenbarth,  the  locative 
dative  is  not  so  common  in  Apollonius  as  in 
Homer.  However  the  Homeric  usages  are 
well  represented. 

a)  WITH  PROPER  NAMES  OF  COUNTRIES,  ISLANDS  AND  CITIES. 

'AAoTtfl  I.  51.—  IIivlp  I.  157.—  Ili&or  I. 
413.—  *Apy«  I.  1317.—  Kco  II.  528. 

b)  OF  THE  GREAT  DIVISIONS  OF  THE  WORLD  AND  OTHER 
LOCALITIES. 


i  II.  363,  III.  1001.—  ovpavy  IV.  261 
(A  443).—  TitWtj  II.  1127  —  ovpeai  I.  26,  1150. 

—  vfay  IV.  1208.—  %w  IV.  539.—  Mp(j>  III. 
44?  250.—  %oi5  I.  304,  447;   II.  655.—  ^ueoaw 
I.  6Bl.—pv%v  III.  659.—  Jcr^aTt^  I.  213. 

The  following  local  datives,  found  in  the 
Argonautica,  do  not  occur  in  Homer  without  a 
preposition: 

r,ept  IV.  943.—  aly  IV.  534.—  p^m  II. 
534.—  dxTcus  I.  588,  IV.  245,  854.—  {S&xffi  II. 
1218;  IV.  1242.—  npo%oYiai  IV.  271.—  pt£o%Tiv 
aAdg  IV.  919.—  ihvi  II.  821.—  eiafievyaiv  III. 
UQl.—Bovdxeoaiv  III.  6.—  /?aS«-fl  filf  II.  699. 

—  fia&eiau;  dpoi;pa£$  I.  686.  —  <2>DTa/U^j  III.  1399. 


-89- 


III.  1268.  —  Scad^c,)    IV.  28.  — 
IV.  791.—  xpJT-riJpo-t  I.  1185. 

C)  OF  THE  PARTS  OF  THE  BODY  OR  OF  THE  SOUI,. 

voy  III.  902;  IV.  735.—  Si^o,  I.  817;  II. 
1222;  III.  451.  786;  IV.  1746.—  <£peowl.  508.— 
Xepolvlll.  1236.—  6/uw  IV.  179.—  6^0101  III.  45. 

The  datives  after  dvdaaeiv  (I.  49,  507;  IV. 
305,  763),*o<paraj'  (I.  34;  II.  1000;  III.  406) 
and  [leranpeneiv  (I.  100;  II.  786;  III.  246,  335) 
may  also  be  regarded  as  local.  This  would 
make  in  all  63  examples  of  the  locative  dative 
in  Apollonius. 

4)  THE  ACCUSATIVE  OF  THE  GOAL. 

The  accusative  to  denote  the  "terminus 
ad  quern"  is  common  with  Ixreofiai,  Ixa  and 
ixdvu  but  comparatively  rare  with  verbs  like 
ayu,  elfii,  cp£o/ucu,  nyeoucu  and  veofj.ai.  Cf. 
Monro,  Sec.  140,  4.  The  examples  in  Apollo- 
nius are  the  following  (105  in  all): 

a)  With  simple  verbs  of  motion:  —  ayeiv  I. 
1316.  Cf.  H  363,  etc.—  fiaivsiv  IV.  1212.  Cf. 
y  162,  etc.—  MVSLV  I.  195,  263,  627,  635,  832, 
1025;  II.  298,  923;  III.  1255;  IV.  206,  722, 
861,  1178,  1616.  Cf.  T  339,  etc.—  ^ecrScu 
III:  1190;  IV.  863,  1543.  Cf.  *  739,  etc.— 
levai  IV.  739.  Cf.  a  176,  etc.—  ix&veiv  I.  318, 
785;  II.  1280;  III.  387.  Cf.  Z  370,  etc.- 


-90- 

Ixeiv  (ixeaSou)  I.  608,  709,  874,  1031,  1244, 
1333,  1402;  II.  350,  551,  730,  1068,  1143, 
1263;  III.  213,  1108,  1121;  IV.  33,  243,  378, 
505,  659,  767,  773,  819,  966,  992,  1232,  1234, 
1394,  1417,  1514,  1568,  1676.  Of.  Z  225,  etc. 
—vivaeaSai  IV.  257.  This  last  example  is 
without  a  parallel  in  Homer. 

b)  With  compound  verbs  of  motion; — 
atyixdveiv  IV.  847.  Cf.  %  159,  etc. — dtyixvslaSai 
I.  1177;  II.  768.  Cf.  A  618,  etc.— eiaaQixdveiv 
IV.  540,  612, 731,  775, 1759.  Cf.  H  230,  etc.— 
eiaa<j>ixvsla§ai  IV.  302,  643,  1213.  Cf.  X  17, 
etc.— e(CTfp£«r$cu  III.  39.  Cf.  X  22—  s^ixvela^ai 
III.  312;  IV.  1472.  Cf.0439,etc.-£7ti7t^e(r3at 

III.  1065.    Cf.  3  14.-£7ioi'2«r$ou  I.  644;  II.  455; 

IV.  370,  1317.     Cf.  A  50,  etc.— peraxidSeiv  I. 
1221;  III.  489,  801;  IV.  305,  531,  779.     Cf.  a 
22.-lueTep2£(73cu  III.  348,  438,  547;    IV.  837. 
Cf.  Z  280,  etc  —  7ipo<7/3d;U£(ySai  IV.  1044.    Cf.  E 
879.-wio&;ai'  II.  433;  IV.  1376.  Cf.  8  435,  etc. 

With  the  following  five  compounds  Apoll- 
onius  has  the  accusative  of  the  goal  without 
a  preposition,  wnere  Homer  uses  one:— dvep%- 
saSai  II.  1145,  Cf.  x  97.-aa/2a<W  II.  535; 
IV.  1588.  C.  M  59.—  ela&av  II.  674,  1267, 
1285;  IV.  633.  Cf.  v  llS.—etehavveiv  I.  987 — 
e<pi%dv£iv  I.  667. — Also  with  three  verbs  not 
found  in  Homer: — vTtievai  III.  1076.  Cf.  Arist. 


-91- 

Vesp.  465. — urtspevyeo&ai  II.  986. — siGa7to(3aiv8Lv 
I.  846;  IV.  625,  648,  1779. 

B.     SUFFIXES  -#ev,  (-#0  AND  -fe  TO  EXPRESS 

LOCAL  RELATIONS. 
Excepting  [ieaa6$i  (L  1278,  II.  172), 
Homeric  forms  like  'I/U6$6,  ovpavo&i,  y,t33i, 
&>7p>7$£,  etc.,  are  not  found  in  Apollonius. 
Likewise,  the  old  case-suffix  <piv,  which  is  com- 
paratively frequent  in  Homer,  occurs  only  four 
times  in  Apollonius  (always  with  a  preposition); 
viz.  I.  566=IV.  1661;  II.  494;  IV.  80,  with 
which  compare  y  353,  e  59,  ^  414,  v  74,  o  283, 
552,  etc.  Of  the  suffixes  -&ev  and  -5e,  only 
the  forms  from  nominal  stems  are  given. 

l)    FORMS  IN  -#sv  (51   IN  AI<L). 
a)   PROPER  NAMES  OF  CITIES  AND  COUNTRIES. 

I.    115;    'ApyoSev    I.   118; 

1.161;  9 

IV,  1210;  KexponiqSev  I.  94,  214; 
IV.  434;  AvxiySev  II.  676;  HiepiySev  I.  31  (Hes. 
Op.  1,  h.  Merc.  85);  ZndptySev  I.  148.  Cf.  B 
671,  Z  291:  E  105;  /?  327,  8  10,  etc. 

Ato^ez'  occurs  twice  in  Apollonius:  II.  463; 
IV.  270.     Cf.  0  489,  etc. 

b)  APPELLATIVES. 

1.  Of  place:— dyefai&e-v  1. 356, 406;  a 
L  877  (B  264.  p  439);  Hy^evll.  940;  d 
I.   1172    (v  268,  o  428);  §yi(i6§ev  I.  7   (r  197); 


-92- 

II.  197  (v  124);   frwyAj^ev  III.  1318; 
v   IV.    1577;    oupaw&w  I.  547,    1280; 

II.  287,  518;  III.  1195,  1376;  IV.  639,  1285, 
1695,  (A  195,  208,  0  558,  etc.);  nfa^ev  II. 
543    (Find.    N.  VII.  103);    TteMSev   I.  1199; 

III.  1315  (v295);  7toi[iwi$ev  II.  493; 

IV.  909,  1684  (Aesch.  Sept.  71,  1056); 

III.  1400;  ^cp<To3^  IV.  1262;  ,«e<7<7o3ei>  I.  1168, 
and   6[i6$ev   I.    91,  which  the  scholiast  para- 
phrases by  dno  rov  avrov  ronov. 

2.  Of  time:— fc&ev  I.  594,  1053;  II.  729; 

IV.  497,  855,  1222.     Cf.  a  372,  y  153,  366, 
8  214,  Y;  189,  etc. 

3.  Of  the  agent:— S-eoS^  II.  261;  III.  1004; 
IV.  413.     Cf.  n  477;  also  Eurip.   Med.  1270; 
Herod.  VI.  14. 

In  three  examples  the  form  is  strength- 
ened by  a  preposition:  ct7t'  Afyivq&ev  IV.  1775 
(fl  492);  ex  AioSev  II.  995;  ex 
II.  588  (0  716;  also  Aesch.  Sept.  191). 

2)    FORMS  IN  -de  (45  IN  AI.L). 
a)    WITH  PROPER  NAMES. 

1.  Of  place:— AUv&e  III.  306; 

IV.  1032;  'ApxaS«7V&?  II.  1054;  Ui&A&e  I.  209; 
II.  186  (a  581). 

2.  Of  the  person:— 'AKxivoovSe  IV.    1198 
(£1  338). 


—  93- 

b)   WITH  APPELLATIVES. 

1.  Of  place:—  dyotfv&e  I.  328    (A   54,  B 
207);  c&a&?  IV.  135,  546,  1608  (A  308;  {3  389, 
etc.);  frteip6v&e  II.  736,  978;  IV.  1363  (x  423, 
a  84);  <rjieTepovSe  'to  our  house'  I.  704   (S  39, 
o  513;  w  267);  3cWLo/K<Jv5e  III.  9,  249,   450,  671 
($>  8,  ^  109,  161);  xtfvriv&e  I.  1258   («  159); 
favxavivivbe  II.  192;  [tv%fo>$e  IV.  1543;  VYIOV&S 
III.  939;  IV.  50;  wjfa«5vfe  II.  1115;  olxo^e  III. 
1138   (a  17,  317,  360,  424,  etc.);  Qfavp7{6v&e 
II.  605;  III.  1357;  IV.  779   (A  221,  394,  425, 
etc.);   Tte&iov&e  III.  1344  (A  492,  T  148,  *  3); 

IV-  190;  n&ay6a$e  IV.  1231,  1268; 
e  III.  1153  (E  224;  a  189);  TIO^OJ^' 
II.  921  (B  443,  589,  872,  etc.);  novrovSe  II. 
329,  415,  542,  686,  1104;  IV.  198,  1748  (t  495, 
x  48);  Ttoranovbe  II.  1274  (4>  13,  120,  etc.); 
%fpao^'  III.  199  (h.  Ap.  28). 

2.  Of  the   person: — ai'tToxacriyv^T^^e  III. 
647. 

In  IV.  1766,  the  word  is  reinforced  by  a 
preposition;  viz.  fisrd  vydb'.     Cf.  x  351. 


—  95  — 


CHAPTER  V. 


PREPOSITIONS    IN    CASE-CONSTRUC- 
TION. 

"Passing  from  the  cases  to  the  prepositions  we 
enter, ' '  as  Dr.  Gildersleeve  remarks,  ' '  upon  a  field 
which  has  been  worked  in  spots  until  the  ground  is 
pulverized  with  the  statistical  harrow,  while  in  parts 
it  lies  absolutely  fallow."  Cf.  A.  J.  P.  XXIII.,  p.  25. 

The  Argonautica  of  Apollonius  is  still  virgin-soil* 
as  regards  the  treatment  of  the  prepositions. 


*  At  least  this  was  the  case  when  the  present  work  was 
undertaken.  While  it  was  in  progress  there  appeared  a  thesis 
by  A.  S.  Haggett,  "A  Comparison  of  Apollonius  Rhodius 
with  Homer  in  Prepositional  Usage"  published  by  the 
John  Murphy  Co.,  Baltimore,  1902;  but,  owing  to  the  fact  that 
Raggett's  thesis  was  mentioned  neither  in  Bursian's  Jahres- 
bericht,  nor  in  the  Bibliographical  Record  of  the  American 
Philological  Association,  nor  among  the  notices  of  Recent 
Publications  in  the  American  Journal  of  Philology, —  the 
ordinary  sources  of  bibliographical  information  about  such  a 
work — it  escaped  my  notice  until  after  my  work  was  com- 
pleted and  presented  to  the  Faculty  of  the  University. — 
Owing  to  my  fuller  treatment  of  the  other  uses  of  the 
prepositions  the  present  chapter  is  the  only  one  which  might 
have  been  affected  by  Raggett's  thesis,  had  it  come  to  my 
notice  sooner.  Before  going  to  press  I  made  a  special  revision 
of  this  chapter  and  compared  my  results  with  those  of 
Haggett;  but  with  the  exception  of  a  few  examples,  I  did  not 
see  any  reason  for  changing  my  treatment  of  the  subject. 
Hence,  where  I  differ  from  Haggett,  the  differences  are  all 
intentional.  Haggett  does  not  distinguish  between  prepo- 
sitional phrases  as  M  d^v  and  M  xP^ovi  ^  Tro\\6v  and  M 
7r6vroi/j  ts  aiei  and  ts  evdiov;  airb  T-rj\ov  and  airb  yal-r]s;  etc.  His 
tables  show  the  total  of  all  the  prepositions  in  Apollonius  to 
be  2047;  whereas  I  have  2110,  which  in  itself  makes  already  a 
serious  difference  of  63  examples. 


-96  — 

Before  taking  up  each  preposition  separately,  three 
general  questions  of  great  stylistic  ^nd  syntactic  im- 
portance should  be  discussed. 

FREQUENCY   IN   GENERAL. 

The  aggregate  frequency  of  prepositions  varies 
according  to  time,  subject  and  writer, —  being  less  in 
poetry  than  in  prose,  less  in  the  drama  than  in  epic 
or  lyric  poetry,  less  in  the  orators  than  in  the  philoso- 
phers. Cf.  T.  Mommsen,  Beitr.  z.  d.  L,ehre,  v.  d. 
Griech.  Prap. ,  p.  14  seq. 

Haggett,  in  his  summary  of  the  prepositions  in 
Homer,  gives  as  a  total  of  the  prepositions  in  case- 
construction  the  figure  8198  (II.  4746,  Od.  3452  ). 
Accordingly  Homer  has  an  average  of  one  preposi- 
tion in  every  3.4  lines,  that  for  the  Iliad  (3.3)  being 
slightly  higher  than  that  for  the  Odyssey  (3.5). 
T.  Mommsen  has  an  average  of  one  preposition  for 
3.14  lines  in  the  Iliad  and  one  for  3.95  lines  in  the 
Odyssey.  As  there  is  no  objective  rule  to  decide  the 
doubtful  cases  of  tmesis  or  of  the  adverbial  use,  it  is 
impossible  to  say  that  either  set  of  these  figures  is 
absolutely  correct  and  the  other  wrong.  The  differ- 
ence, however,  is  immaterial,  as  in  such  questions 
only  the  large  masses  count.  —  Apollonius  has  1743 
examples  of  prepositions  in  case-construction,  mak 
ing  an  average  of  one  preposition  in  3.3  lines,  and  so 
he  remains  faithful  in  this  respect  to  the  laws  of  his 
department. 

In  connection  with  the  aggregate  frequency,  it  is 
important  to  notice  that  the  distribution  of  the  pre- 
positions is  far  from  being  uniform,  as  the  following 
passages  from  Apollonius  will  show. 


-97  — 


a)    PREPOSITIONS    RARE. 

b)  PREPOSITIONS  NUMEROUS 

I.       139—  150;   Iprep. 

J.       536—  539;  5  prep. 

709—  720;  0 

617—  626;  8 

i 

1215—1230;  0 

740—  746;   6 

II.      539—  548;  0 

II.      102—  113;   8 

1195—1206;   1 

1166—1175;   8 

III.       74—     89;  1 

III.     210—  218;  6 

144—  153;  0 

675—  685;  7 

651—  666;   1 

739-  745;  7 

765—  776;  0 

1277—1284;  5 

IV.     662—  669;  0 

IV.     625—  634;  9 

823-  839;   1 

964—  977;  9 

1235—1250;   1 

1765—1775;  8 

Total:—  Lines—  157;  prep.  6. 

Lines  —  113;  prep.  —  86. 

FREQUENCY  WITH  EACH  CASE. 

As  T.  Mominsen  has  shown,  the  numerical  relation 
of  prepositions  with  cases  is  a  criterion  of  style, 
period  and  department.  In  the  older  and  poetic 
language  the  dative  preponderates ;  in  the  later 
language  (  especially  in  prose  )  the  accusative  is  most 
frequent  ;  while  the  genitive  ranks  first  in  the 
rhetorico-philosophic  elements  in  prose  and  poetry. 
The  relation  in  the  dramatists,  as  given  by  Mommsen, 
is  the  following  : 


Aeschylus 
Sophocles 
Euripides 
Aristophanes 

GENITIVE 

DATIVE 

ACCUSATIVE 

5 
3 
4 
3 

5 
2 

4 
2 

4 
2 
5 
3 

Prose  from  the  earliest  period  showed  a  tendency 
for  an  increase  in  the  accusative.  The  result  of  this 
tendency  may  be  seen  in  Polybius  for  whom  Krebs 
pp.  6-9  gives  an  average  of  2.2  gen.;  i  dat. ;  4.5  ace. 


—  98- 


For  Homer  Haggett  gives  the  following  statistics : 

{Tot.  No.  of  occ.  with  the  g 
«          u       .<       .<  «          «       d 

"  M  "  "    "   "•• 


1160  —  24  46  per  cent. 
1979=41  70    "      " 
1607  =  33.84    4t      " 


Odyssey 


Tot.  No.  of  occ.  with  the  gen. 


663  =  19.21  percent. 
1470=42.58    "      " 
1319=38.21    "      " 


It  is  easily  seen  from  this  that  in  the  Odyssey  the 
genitive  decreases  in  proportion  as  the  accusative 
increases,  foreshadowing  the  later  prose  usage.— 
Apollonius  followed  the  more  poetic  usage  of  the 
Iliad,  with  a  slight  reactionary  decrease  of  the 
accusative. 


Argo- 
nautica 


Tot.  No.  of  occ.  with  the  gen. 


{Tot.  No.  of  oc 
::  ;:  ;:  :: 


dat. 
ace. 


456=26.16  per  cent. 
740=42.45    "      4< 
547=31.39    "      " 


As  Haggett  says,  ' '  we  naturally  expect  the  pre- 
ponderance of  the  dative  in  epic  poetry  because  of 
the  great  number  of  concrete  locative  situations  af- 
forded by  the  subject  matter.  Hence  &  and  M  are 
the  tavorite  prepositions." 

SHOWING  THE  FREQUENCY  OF  THE  PREPOSITIONS 

WITH  CASKS, 
a)    PREPOSITIONS  WITH  ONE  CASE: 


Genitive. 


Apol. 
Horn. 

dirt 

M 

fa 

Tp6 

irpbirap  \irpoirp6 

VTTOTTpb  1      VTT^/C 

3 

10 

69 

372 

163 

690 

2 

34 

2 

0 

I 

0 

I 

o 

13 
15 

PREPOSITIONS  WITH  ONE  CASE:   (Continued) 


Dative 

I                Accusative 

Apol. 
Horn. 

*r 

ri,       ||        e/s 

irepl  r  dfju 

pi  re 

298 
1893 

65 
188 

165 
823 

I 

I 

—  99  — 


b)    PREPOSITIONS  WITH  TWO   CASES:   GENITIVE  AND  ACCUSATIVE: 


Apol. 
Horn. 

did                  ditic                /card 

vaptK 

forty 

gen. 
36 
97 

acc. 
29 

77 

gen. 
ii 

12 

acc. 
10 
o 

gen. 
24 
68 

acc. 

gen. 
5 

2 

acc. 
6 

8 

gen. 
29 

49 

acc. 
15 

C)    PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THREE  CASES: 


dvd 


gen 

dat 

acc. 

gen. 

dat. 

acc. 

gen. 

dat. 

acc. 

Apol. 

ii 

32 

26 

0 

0 

55 

47 

180 

65 

Horn. 

2 

88 

*35 

0 

9 

U3 

164 

544 

4i3 

PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THREE  CASES:  (continued) 


Apol. 
Horn. 

/xerd                          irapd                          wepl 

gen. 
o 

5 

dat. 

36 

215 

acc. 

47 
164 

gen. 

4 
67 

dat. 
18 
219 

acc. 
18 
133 

gen. 

19 
79 

dat. 

acc. 

10 

72 

PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THREE  CASES:    (CONTINUED) 


inro 


gen. 

dat. 

acc. 

gen. 

dat. 

acc. 

Apol. 

3 

o 

10 

13 

81 

25 

Horn. 

27 

21 

279 

126 

187 

62 

Apart  from  quantitative  differences,  which  will  be 
discussed  later,  it  is  to  be  noticed  that  the  Homeric 
use  of  dvd  with  the  dative  is  not  found  in  Apollonius. 
Also  f^srd  with  the  genitive  and  xpos  with  the  dative 
are  avoided  by  Apollonius  because  of  the  frequent 
employment  of  these  constructions  in  prose.  Cf. 
p.  62,  99  ;  Krebs,  p.  6. 


—  100  


TABI,E  SHOWING  THE  AGGREGATE  FREQUENCY  AND  THE 
RELATIVE  PERCENTAGE  OF  THE  PREPOSITIONS  IN  CASE- 
CONSTRUCTION  IN  APOUvONIUS  AND  IN  HOMER. 


Prepos. 

I. 

II. 

III 

IV 

Tot.inAp. 

Total  in  Homer. 

in 

63 

68 

72 

95 

298=.  1  70 

1893(11.  989,  Od.904)=.23i 

M 

72 

66 

60 

94 

292=.  167 

ii2i(Il.  642,  Od.  479)  =.136 

cis 

37 

32 

43 

53 

165=.  094 

823  (11.  374,  Od.  449)=.  loo 

I* 

34 

42 

4i 

46 

163=  .093 

690  (11.  406,  Od.  284)^.084 

inrb 

26 

30 

3i 

32 

1  1  9=  .068 

375  (11.  266,  Od.  109)^.045 

Kurd 

20 

ii 

26 

31 

88=  050 

654  (11.  383,  Od.  271)^.079 

/nerd 

16 

18 

23 

26 

83=  .047 

384  (11.  233,  Od.  isi)=.o46 

d-n-6 

19 

9 

17 

24 

69=  .039 

372  (11.  273,  Od.  99)=  .045 

&fJL(f>l 

17 

15 

15 

22 

69=  .039 

225  (11.  158,  Od.  67)=.027 

<rtv 

17 

12 

18 

18 

65=  .037 

1  88  (11.  113,  Od.  75)=  .022 

Sid 

TTCpt 

12 
10 

14 
12 

18 

26 
20 

65  =.037 
60  =.034 

174(11.  118,  Od.  56)=  .021 
236  (11.  157,  Od.  79)=  .028 

M 

14 

13 

8 

20 

55=  -031 

152  (11.  90,  Od.  62)=.oi8 

inr£p 

8 

13 

7 

16 

44=  025 

80  (11.  53,  Od.  27)=.  009 

irapd 

9 

14 

7 

10 

40=  ,022 

419  (11.  264,  Od.  i55)=.o5i 

irp6s 

2 

4 

3 

4 

13^=  .007 

327  (11.  168,  Od.  159)=  .039 

dvrl 

O 

2 

0 

i 

3=  .002 

10  (11.  7,  Od.  3)=.  0012 

irp6 

I 

I 

o 

o 

2=  .OOI 

34  (11.  28,  Od.  6).  0041 

8UK 

3 

8 

4 

6 

21=  .012 

12  (11.  i,  Od.  u)  =  .ooi4 

fatK 

4 

i 

4 

4 

13=  .007 

15  (11.  13,  Od.  2)=.ooi8 

irap^K 

3 

5 

i 

2 

11=  .006 

10  (11.  6,  Od.  4)=.  0012 

irpbirap 

i. 

0 

o 

I 

2=  .001 

ol  Homer  has  atroirpb  once, 

irpoirpb 

0 

0 

i 

0 

i=.ooo6 

oj^and    diairpb   three    times 

faroirpb 

0 

0 

o 

I 

i=.ooo6 

i  oj  which  are  not  found  in  Ap. 

(*€pi    T> 

[d/jL(j>t  re 

0 

0 

I 

O 

i=.ooo6 

i  (P  760). 

Total  ||388|39o|4i3l552|i743 


8198(11.  4746,  Od.  3452). 


The  tendency  in  quantitative  differences  between 
Apollonius  and  Homer  is  evident.  The  prepositions 
which  in  Apollonius  show  an  increase  are  chiefly 
poetic.  They  are :  dpyi,  did,  ffuv,  Mp.  L»TTO,  and  the 
double  prepositions  <W*,  napix  and  WTT^X.  Those  that 
go  down  are  prosaic ;  viz. :  xarcf,  -napd  and  notably 
xp6  and  7^009. 


101  


The  quantitative  differences  between  Apollonius 
and  Homer  in  the  use  of  the  individual  prepositions 
in  case-construction  are  still  further  shown  in  the 
following  table,  giving  for  each  preposition  the 
proximate  number  of  lines  in  which,  at  an  average, 
it  occurs  once. 

NUMBER   OF  LINKS  IN  WHICH  PREPOSITION  OCCURS  ONCE. 


PREPOSITION. 

IN  APOLLONIUS. 

IN  HOMER. 

h 

19.5 

14.7 

M 

20. 

24.8 

•b 

35.3 

33.7 

fe 

35.7 

40.3 

far* 

49. 

74. 

/card     • 

66.3 

42.5 

fjicrd 

70.3 

72.4 

dn-6 

84.5 

74.7 

4*01 

84.5 

123.5 

<rtiv 

89.7 

147.8 

M 

89.7 

159.8 

irept 

97.2 

117.8 

dvd 

106. 

182.9 

frr<*p 

332.6 

347.5 

TTCLpd 

146. 

66.3 

7rp6s 

448. 

85. 

dvrl 

1945. 

2780. 

Wf* 

2917. 

818. 

fclft 

278. 

2317. 

fortK 

448. 

1853. 

waptK 

530. 

2780. 

irpbrrap 

2917. 

0 

trpoirpb 

5835. 

0 

VTTO  7Tp6 

5835. 

0 

irepl  r'  dfi<f>t  re 

5835. 

27803. 

diroirpb 

0 

27803. 

5ia.7rp6 

0 

9268. 

102  — 

POSITION. 

In  the  Indo-European  parent-language  the  prepo- 
sitions seem  to  have  been  pre-positive  as  well  as 
post-positive.  In  the  Vedas  both  positions  are  found. 
In  classical  Sanskrit  the  post- position  almost  entirely 
superseded  the  /reposition, —  d  and  pura  being  the 
only  prepositions  that  stand  before  the  case.  In  the 
old  Persian,  on  the  contrary,  the  /reposition  pre- 
vails. Cf.  Delbriick,  Vergl.  Syn.,  III.,  43-44. 

In  Greek  poetry  the  post-position  is  still  frequent. 
In  Homer  it  is  idiomatic  and  serves  often  as  a  metri- 
cal convenience.  In  the  tragic  and  lyric  writers  it  is 
an  artificial  imitation  of  the  older  poetry  and  is  used 
chiefly  for  poetic  effect. —  In  Attic  prose  only  xepi  is 
used  thus,  being  either  a  phraseological  survival,  or 
being  influenced  by  £W«,  whose  meaning  it  shares. 
Cf.  Brugmann,  Griech.  Gram.3,  433. 

According  to  Haggett,  Homer  has  645  examples 
of  the  post-position  (II.  386,  Od.  259),  which 
amounts  to  7.85%  of  the  whole  number  of  preposi- 
tions. Of  these  examples  255  are  cases  of  pure 
anastrophe,  while  in  390  instances  the  preposition  is 
put  between  the  noun  and  a  qualifiying  adjective  or 
dependent  genitive.  Apollonius  has  192  cases  of 
post- position,  i.  e.  8.94%  of  his  whole  number  of 
prepositions  in  case-construction  In  in  examples 
the  preposition  stands  immediately  after  the  noun  ; 
in  29  a  particle  is  inserted  and  in  5  (I.  9  ;  II.  820; 
III.  738  ;  IV.  492  ;  1355  )  more  important  words  in- 
tervene. Apollonius  has  47  examples  of  interposition 
between  noun  and  adjective.  The  examples  in  which 
the  preposition  is  placed  between  the  adjective  and 


—  103  — 


the  noun,  of  which  Apollonius  has  215,  and  for  which 
interposition  Homer  also  shows  a  marked  fondness, 
do  not  belong  here. 

The  ratio  of  post-position  in  Homer  after  the  dif- 
ferent cases  is :  gen.  22.2%,  dat.  45.4%,  ace.  32.3%. 
Apollonius  has  57  examples  with  the  genitive,  108 
with  the  dative,  and  only  27  with  the  accusative, 
giving  the  following  ratio  :  gen  29.3%,  dat.  56.5%, 
ace.  14.1%. 

TABI,E    SHOWING    THE    FREQUENCY    OF    EACH    PREPOSITION 

IN  POST-POSITION  AND  THE  PERCENTAGE  OF  ITS  TOTAI, 

IN  APOU,ONIUS  AND  IN  HOMER. 


APOLLONIUS. 

HOMFR. 

iv  68=22.9  Per  cent 

138  (11  71,  Od.  67)=7.3  per  cent 

^....33=11.3 

142  (11.  108,  Od.  34)=  12.6 

V7r6...i3=io.9 

63(11.  45,  Od.  i8)=i6.8 

^..13=29.5 

io(I1.6,  Od.  40=12.5 

ci7r6...l2=I7.9 

44  (11.  28,  Od.  i6)=*n.8 

Kept..  12=20. 

20(11.  n,  Od.  9)=8.5 

tK  10=    6.2 

38(11.  20,  Od.  i8)=5-5 

d/tx0/.  8=12.1 

16  (11.  9,  Od.  7)=8.i 

«**  7=  4-3 

48  (11.  20,  Od.  28)=5.8 

fjjerd..  6=  7.2 

19(11.  n,  Od.  8)-  4.9 

dvd...  2=  3.6 

14(11.  8,  Od.  6)=9.2 

Sid....  2=  3.1 

15  (11.  10,  Od.  5)=8.6 

irapd..  2=  5.2 

21  (11.  13,  Od.  8)=4.9 

Kard..   i=  I.I 

34  (11.  10,  Od.  24)=5-2 

Trap^K    i=     .9 

o  (cf.  vp^K  X  I46)=6.6 

<nJj>....  l=  1.5 

8  (11.  2  Od.  6)=4.2 

dvrL...  o 

5  (HO-50. 

irp6....  o 

4(I1.)=I.2 

8iatrp6  o 

2  (Il.)=66.6 

?rp6s...  o 

3(11.  2,  Od.  i)=.9i 

Total,  191 

645  (11.  386,  Od.  259) 

This  table  shows  that  while  «w£'»  «?ro,  ^,  xept  and 
oTtip  gain  in  Apollonius,  bx6t  dvd,  did,  xard  and  ffov  lose. 

By  far  the  most  frequent  place  of  the  preposition  is 
before  the  case.  Of  the  whole  number  of  prepositions 


—  IO4  — 

(1743),  Apollonius  has  1551  before  the  case  ;  1125 
are  examples  without  any  insertion  whatever  between 
the  preposition  and  the  noun  ;  in  87  instances  the 
preposition  is  separated  from  its  case  by  particles 
(  niv,  d£,  T£,  Y<ip)  or  by  enclitics  (/*««',  /^,  etc.);  in  215 
passages  the  preposition  is  placed  after  a  qualifying 
adjective  but  before  the  noun.  Homer  has  600  ex- 
amples of  this  inter-position.  Apollonius  separated 
the  preposition  from  its  case  by  an  attributive  genitive 
or  by  some  other  important  word  (usually  a  verb  ) 
in  102  instances.  Here,  however,  the  separation  of 
the  preposition  from  its  noun  is  not  so  noticeable  be- 
cause generally  an  adjective,  in  the  same  case  as  the 
noun  precedes  the  preposition  ;  cf  .  I.  549  ;  II.  90, 
406,  550,  824,  1038  ;  III.  683,  880,  918,  1353,  etc. 
Only  rarely  is  the  order  of  words  :  preposition,  inde- 
pendent words  of  importance,  case  ;  cf.  I.  830,  1315  ; 
II.  1115;  IV.  1642,  1734.  For  the  rhetorical  inter- 
position of  the  object  in  oaths  or  entreaties  (  like 
Latin  per  te  deos  oro  )  compare  III.  984  npo?  ^ 

/LtediffffOfiat    yds    TOXTJWV  |  xai  Ai6$  •  IV.  385  lz 


When  several  nouns  in  the  same  construction  are 
governed  by  a  preposition,  that  preposition  may  be 
used  only  with  one,  as:  I.  222,  308,  329,  701,  1056, 
1178;  II.  188,  402,  637,  666,  1021,  1086;  III.  41, 
198,  56o,  578;  701,  744,  757,  881,  984,  1147,  1381, 
1393;  IV.  44,  172,  272,  550,  631,  730,  787,  793, 
974,  1192  ;  or  it  may  be  repeated  with  each,  as:  I. 
536-537,  818-809;  II.  333-334,  365-366,  826-827, 
998:  IV.  331-332,  364-365,  681.  Similar  examples 
in  Homer  are  of  frequent  occurrence. 


I.     PREPOSITIONS  WITH  ONE  CASE 

A,     WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 

—  dyri — 

The  preposition  dvri  (Sanskrit  dnti,  Latin 
ante)  is  an  old  locative  case,  "in  the  presence 
of,  "opposite".  These  primary  meanings  are 
found  in  the  Inscriptions,  e.  g.  avrl  (icurvpav 
"in  the  presence  of  the  witnesses"  (Law  of 
Gortyn).  Cf.  Delbrueck,  Vergl.  Syn.,  Vol.  I. 
Sec.  290.  In  the  literature  this  construction 
disappears,  except  for  the  example  cited  by 
Joost,  Xen.  Ana.  IV.  7,  6  dv&  &v  eatyxores.— 
In  epic  poetry  the  adverbs  dvriov,  evavriov, 
avra,  eadvta,  dvrifiiyjv,  and  in  prose  evavrlov 
have  replaced  dvri  in  its  local  sense,  while  avri 
itself  assumes  the  metaphoric  meanings 
"instead  of,  "in  place  oP,  "in  return  for", 
"in  exchange  for",  etc. 

The  examples  in  Apollonius  mean  "instead 
of"  and  fall  within  the  line  of  Homeric  usage: 
II.  448  dvvi  SG  rov  Sdvarov  IIOL  d^ap  $60$ 
t:,  II.  851  ol  &  dvrl  $8ov$eo$  AioMSao  \ 
elver L  vvv  ' AyafivjGtopa  xvfiaivovGiv,  IV. 
30  avr'  efie^ev  vavaov  nhoxov  elfii 
Cf.  i,  307,  etc. 


—  io6  — 

-(17*5- 

In  the  Homeric  poems  dno  (Sanskrit 
Latin  ab)  is  chiefly  used  with  the  ablatival  geni- 
tive to  denote  "away  from",  "at  a  distance."  It 
never  is  equivalent  to  vno  with  passive  verbs 
(cf.  Kuehner-Gerth,  Sec.  430) ,  nor  does  it  express 
time  with  the  exception  of  0  54  dno  &  avrov 
[beinvov]  Scop^crcrovro;  cf.  La  Roche  ibid.— The 
range  of  metaphoric  uses  also  is  not  so  large  as 
in  the  post-Homeric  literature. 

In  Apollonius  the  temporal  use  and  the 
use  with  passive  verbs  are  wanting;  while  the 
examples  used  in  a  metaphoric  sense  remain 
within  ths  lines  of  Homeric  usage. 

i.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE. 

#  )   With  verbs  of  motion. 

(a)  From  a  place:— 'Ayetpo:  III.  356  d<p' 
'EftAdbJog  &U(H  fyspbev.  Cf.  P  222. 

'At(T(7G>:  1.989  an9  o%og  <u£ai<n?$;  II.  1261 
an  ovpsog  aiGGovta.  Cf.  N  65;  x  99. 

5 Ava%d£o[iai:  III.  1037  a^  dno  nvpxaifjg 
,  Cf.  H  819,  *  158. 

'Avep%o(iai:  IV.  1775  dri*  Aiyivyj&ev  dvep- 
v.  Cf.  a  492,  i  38. 

BouVco:  IV.  114  aTto  vy6$  epyaav;  IV.  885 
(3alvov...dno  %^oz/6$.  Cf.  K  336,  P  112,  4>  529. 


>:  IV.  901  dno  vqo$  .  .  .  neiapar'  .  .  . 
Cf.  n  793,  X.  468. 

$[u:  III.  534  aTto  [teydpoio  .  .  .  iovre^  IV. 
1581  dyx&vo$  .  .  .  dno  npov%ovrog  iovaw.  Cf. 
i  38,  T  175  etc. 

©pcocrxG):  IV.  768  TIptg  dn'  Qiftvpnoio  Sopovaa. 
Cf.  A  532;  }  32. 

*\Yllii:  III.  587  (XTt'  orpa^oi;  a^yf/lo^  >7^ev; 
IV.  80  Tio&xg  ^^  (XTt'  IxpioQtv.  Cf.  M  205;  ^  189. 

*lxveo[iaL:  II.  1143  dc^3  'E>lyla5o$  .  .  ^£(T3at. 
Cf.  T  233  A  306. 

K66>:  I.  77  art'  Ei^o^g  Kd^o$  *k.  IV.  752 
aTto  peydpoio  xi6vra$.  Cf.  P  113;  7t  156. 

"Qpvvfiai  III.  48  aTto  Spwou  wpro;  III.  439 
a7to  Spovov  &pvvT*  'lYfitiv.  Cf.  E.  13,  A  645, 
n  635,  n  515. 

'OpoTxo:  IV.  1243  dno  i^og  opovaav.  Cf. 
N  505,  n  615. 

ePfa>:  III.  760  bdxpv  53  aTt'  ofy&ahfi&v  .... 
peey;  III.  1352  d<|)p6$  CXTIO  crro^arog  %a[id8ig  pee; 
IV.  1529  aTto  ^poog  ?ppFe  ^^>7.  Cf.  A  249, 
E  170,  *  385. 

T&yifii:  IV.  1390  aTto  drt/^apcov  S^cra?;  i 
Cf.^276,  $  118,  etc. 

4>epa>:   I.    535   yaiyjg   dno   Ttarpt^og  6/t 
Ivcmv.     Cf.  B  838,  M.  96;  x  48. 

<J>opeo^ou:    I.    1278  T>7^€  5'  aTt'  a? 
^opeovro.     Cf.  P  301,  2  256. 


—  io8  — 

FO>:  I.  1067  dno  (JfaQdpcw  ova  Sdxpva 
%svav.  Cf.  *  385,  8  114. 

Homer  has  no  close  parallels  for  I.  125 
an  'Apxabwg  .  .  .  d[isi^a$  r^v  6$6*>;  I.  1107  dno 
ataSn&v  ehdaavreg.  Homer  has  ex  in  II  87, 
293.  —  II.  1216  dno  xparog  ardgai  Qovov;  III. 
375  ofiaptfaavres  ^  'E;Ud5o$;  IV.  1647  ano 
%spaov  |  vfja  .  .  .  dvaxpoveaxov.  This  last  verb 
is  post-Homeric. 

((3)  From  persons:  —  1.821  oc^  dv6p%o[tevov$ 
ano.  Cf.  A  556.  III.  965  naaai  dno 


^)   With  verbs  of  separation. 
III.  1366  yae^g  ano;  similarly  III. 
1395.     Cf.  T  325;  3  375. 

Alvvfiau:  IV.  162  dno  fyvog  alvvto   x&a$. 
Cf.  A  580?  N  550,  <£  490,  etc. 

'ApTtd^o):  II.  188  crro^arog  %etp&v  ^  ano  .  .  . 

Cf.  N.  527. 
Etpyco:    IV.    1206    fafievGtv   yaws    r9   ano 

vfjag  sepyeiv. 

AVG>:  II.  538  ya^g  T'  ano  binkoa 
;  II.  1042  dno  Gipsrepov  xo^eolo 
Cf.  H  214,  P  318;  v  77. 
:  IV.  1636  aTto  anflapov  axon&oio] 
nevpag.     Cf.  II  587. 
>:   IV.  1365  aeiaduevo$    yviuv  ano  .  .  . 
Cf.  N  135;  h.  Merc.  20. 


:  IV.  104  dno  %$oi>6g  eoaav  vfja.    Cf. 
E  19,  835,  A  143,  320,  T  489. 

Under  this  category  belong  two  examples 
in  which  the  genitive  denotes  a  part  from  the 
whole  I.  691  xrEpeuv  dno  fiolpav  etovaav;  II. 
454  tpopeovreq  ZYJ$  dno  [tolpav  c&j&fc.  Cf.  2  327; 

£  40,  v  138. 

The  separation  is  figurative  in  I.  815  0.716 

7^  .  .  .  nalbeg  OL^LVVOV.  Cf.  N  440; 
59,  p  538. — III.  1014  dno  arqSeav  dpvoaca 
Cf.  Hes.  Op.  550  apvaGdpevog  noraptiv 
ano.  A  similar  example  in  Homer  is  A  598. 
Other  examples  in  Apollonius  are:  IV.  109,926, 
1303.  With  IV.  926  compare  %  316. 

c)    To  denote  the  direction  from  which  light  and  sound 
proceed. 

I.  437  hapnoftEvov  Sveuv  ano;  I.  1231  dn 
ai'yd^oixra;  III.  1016  dno  %av$olo 
....  arpdnvev  vEpo)g  fyhoya  (figur.); 
IV.  1144  dno  %pvaeG)v  Svodvtdv  dpapvaaero 
^eyyog.  Cf.  M  70,  N  243,  2  214;  T  63,  ^  43; 
also  h.  Merc.  278,  etc.  Similarly  is  IV.  724 
(X7t'  ov8eog  oaae  fiahovaav,  i.  e.  looking  from  the 
threshold. 

*0  To  denote  the  extent  from  a  position. 
I.  945  fiepe&ovrai  .  .  .  dno  anfiap&v  G^CW; 
cf.  B  448. — IV,  1400    dno   xparog  be  x&aivriv 
d%pi$  en'  axvyarw  xslr'  dnvoog.    Cf.  0  16,  213; 
£  294. 


—  no  — 

e)  To  denote  position  away  from ,  apart  from. 
I.  60  olog  a7t'  a^cjv  .  .  .  aptcrr^cjv.  In  this 
example,  as  also  in  III.  907=912  trdpuv  ano 
(Aovvov,  the  prepositional  phrase  is  redundant. 
For  examples  without  the  preposition  compare 
I.  1240;  IV.  910.  Cf.  Vogrinz,  Gram.  d.  horn. 
Dial.,  p.  210.  A  better  example  of  position  is 
I.  937  tvrSov  dno  <t>pvyiyjg  nohvfyiov  finsipoio  \ 
elg  a/la  xexhipsvri  [V>?crog].  Cf.  h.  Ap.  24.  Here 
belong  II.  253  dno  Svfiov  and  II.  865  an'  &ni$o$ 
where  in  place  of  a  local  position  we  have  a 
mental  attitude.  Cf.  A  562;  similarly  K  324; 
Jl  344.  Soph.  El.  1127. 

2.    IN  A  METAPHORIC  SENSE. 

a)    To  denote  the  origin  or  descent. 
I    231=11.  359    d^)'   al(uaro<;    6v%sroG>vro 
e[j,[ii:var,  III.  920  d<£>'  at^uarog  s^dar^oav.     Cf. 
^  18,  T  163  (Ameis);  h.  Cer.  213. 

b)  To  denote  the  source. 

Here  belongs  one  example  of  the  person 
after  whom  something  is  named:  I.  625. 
Ztxivov  aTto;  cf.  h.  Ap.  396;  Herod.  VII.  74. 
Also  one  example  after  a  verb  of  hearing  a 
thing  from  some  one:  I.  766  &7t6[i6vo$  .  .  .  rev' 
dno  otpeiuv  saaxovaoiL  /3d£n';  cf.  £  12,  [i  187. 
Another  example  of  the  source  is  IV.  1186 
'  ano 


Ill  — 

-ex 


Closely  allied  in  meaning  with  dno  is  ex. 
Of  the  two  prepositions  ex  has  the  larger 
variety  of  usages,  most  of  which  coincide  in 
poetry  and  in  prose.  Chiefly  poetic  and  Ionic 
is  ex  as  a  substitute  for  vno  to  denote  the 
agent.  For  examples  of  this  use  in  Herodotus, 
compare  Lundberg,  p.  13. — Poetic  is  also  the 
use  of  ex  as  equivalent  to  Ttapd  with  the  person 
in  the  singular.  As  ex  and  dno  are  often  used 
synonymously,  we  find  occasionally  ex  in 
Apollonius,  where  Homer  has  dno  and  vice- 
versa.  On  the  whole,  the  correspondence  in 
the  two  authors  is  remarkably  close.  The 
form  ex  is  used  before  a  consonant  and  l£  before 
a  vowel.  The  different  uses  may  be  classified 
as  follows: 

I.    LOCAL. 

a)  Of  motion  from  a  place. 

(a)  From  countries,  cities  and  other 
geographical  divisions,  such  as  mountains,  seas, 
rivers,  etc.:— II.  611  e£  'AiSao  ad>ea§ai.  II.  1096 
e£  Aifc  eveovro;  similarly  II.  424;  III.  1060.— 
II.  1167  'E;Ud&>g  !£  avrfe  veofi'.  I.  69  !£ 
'Qnoevrog  fyow.  Cf.  A  269,  B  557,  863,  E  645, 
Z  529,  H.  363,  467,  I  253,  439,  A  625,  N  793, 
P  350;  /?  326,  j  633,  o  42,  etc.— I.  207  &  $ 


—   112  — 


dpa  QtiXYittv  xisv  vl$6rog.  Cf.  B  852,  K  356, 
53V;  s  282. — II.  390  %  a^6$  slaw,  similarly  IV. 
779,  992,  1363.— IV.  885  &  &  0i&oto  evvaiag 
elhxov.  IV.  628  yaiy$  ex  [zv%dryi$...dnopvv(ievog. 

I.  385  a=ri;(|)f^a^...m6^^  %  U^.     II.  1086 
etpsTjxe  %dha%av  ex  vefysw,  similarly  III.  1266. 
— I.  553  «£  vndrov  opeog  xiev;  similarly  I.  1100; 

II.  978. — IV.  380  ex  8e  as  ndrpyg  .  .  .  &daeiav 
'Eptvves.     III.  213  ex  TtE&ioio . . . Ixovto;  similarly 

III.  473, 1364.— 1. 1281  r^\ex  rtspdrw  dviovaa; 
II.   165  ^e/ltog  .  .  .  |  ex  rtepdruv  dvi&v.     I.  894 
T^aov  dyzipoLLg  \  d/l/lo)^  ex  Ttohiw,  III.  1236  ex  be 
716^0$  tfliaaev.   IV.  1267  ex  7t6vtoLo...ex6[iLOGev. 
I.  1160  [oc7;pou]  al  veov  ex  nora^i&v  vnb 

III.  569  sni  z$ovo$  ex 
dvd^o[tev.  IV.  198  novvovft  Ifiev  ex 
.  II.  914  Tto^t&apcreog  ex  7ts^e^tOLO\ 
dvi&v.  I.  986  ex  &  dpa  roiye  \  vyja  Xvroi; 
nporepov  egfaaaav  O^JLOV.  For  Homer  compare 
T  49,  0  505,  I  330,  544,  N  17,  II  392,  408,  P 
743,  2  207,  <S>  35,  274,  II  663;  e  422,  446,  469, 
YI  25,  i  41,  K  72,  o  175,  n  18,  etc.  For  the 
repetition  of  the  preposition  after  the  com- 
pound verb  in  I.  986  compare  B  690,  Z  42,  H 
337,  436,  *  394;  8  37,  $  106,  %  376,  etc.— 
Examples  of  smaller  localities  are  I.  1148 
[i$op]  dvsflpa%e  <$nj/d<$og  .  .  .  ex  xopv$jj<;.  IV. 
1135  (pepev  ex  nvpog.  I.  1109  hvadfievoi  'lepfjg 


ex  TteiGpara  Tterpyg.  II.  166  hvodftevoi, 
ex  neiG(aara  batyvyiq.  II.  827  ex  bovaxuv  dven- 
IV.  924  dneTtrvev  ai^ofievYi  <£>/l6£  | 
ex  Gxon&tiv.  II.  356  ex  fieyd^g  npo%odg 
<})dpayyo$.  IV.  632  ex  8'  apa  rolo  | 
eio&aaav.  Quasi-local  are  II.  303  rd  r 
!.£  'Afivxoio  faYi^aGiYis  ex6[uaaav,  and  II.  224  ex 
noSev  d<ppdaroLO  xaraiGOovaai  6%e$pov.  Cf.  N 
28,  T  137,  O  243;  f  128,  p  210,  r  445,  v  21,  etc. 
(/3)  From  buildings,  parts  of  buildings, 
ships  and" the  like: — 1. 306  $6(uuv  e^  opro  veeaSar, 
similarly  I.  1212;  II.  816;  IV.  708.— III.  249 
ex  Sahdfiov  Sdhapovbe  . . .  (teriovGav;  similarly 
III.  671,  739. — II.  468  vov  <$'  ex  fieydpoLo  xiovro^ 
similarly  III.  285,  442;  IV.  743,  876,  1119, 
1220. — I.  804  ex  be  (tehd&pGiv  |  .  .  .  dneGGevovro 
I.  640  ex  vyog  dpiGrfjeg  npoeyxav  I 
similarly  III.  316,  1199;  IV.  659.— 
I.  307  ex  vYiolo  . . .  iiGiv.  IV.  673  r^re  (tyjha  |  ex 
.  EIGIV.  I.  976  riqv  [lev  veov  e%  Irt 
.  dvyyayev  uwhom  he  led  even 
recently  from  her  father's."  For  Homer  com- 
pare r  142,  Z  377,  0  507,  A  227,  X  472;  a  441, 
/?  5,  y  441,  5  300,  310,  YI  339,  S  257,  i  548,  x  51, 
v  116,  o  19,  p  455,  G  198,  T  60,  etc. 

(y)    From  parts  of  the  body: — IV.  1308 
or'  ex  Ttarpog  xe^a^g  Sops  ['ASyjvq].     II.  666 
elfie'tcu  ex  hayovuv  re  xal  av%Evo$.     IV. 


-114  - 


704  IIOL^OL  \  Tt^ftfivpov  %,o%irj$  ex  vybvog.  II.  50 
aryjSetdv  et;  alfia  xe&daaar,  similarly  II.  207;  III. 
289;  IV.  901. — III.  1303  <pMya  tpvaiouvreg  \  ex 
aroudrcjv.  Homeric  examples  are:  F  221,  A 
109,  140,  E  110,  582,  657,  K  10,  15,  A  398,  N 
529,  etc.;  also  h.  Ap.  131. 

(5)  In  such  phrases  as  "  rising  from  the 
couch",  "drawing  the  sword  from  the  scabbard", 
"drinking  out  of  a  cup".  I.  1105  tipvvro  tf 
e%  evrijs,  similarly  II.  431,  1239;  IV.  871,  1110. 
III.  1380  ex  xoheolo  fyepsv  ££<|>og;  similarly  IV. 
207,  1054.— III.  1035  tetpav  ex  Sbtaog.  Cf.  A 
534,  E  336,  T  62,  X  190;  /?  2,  5  730,  e  1,  %  23, 
i//  349,  etc.;— A  194,  M  190;— I  469. 

(e)  Here  belong  two  examples  of  ex  with 
the  person  in  the  singular.  This  use  corre- 
sponds to  eig  with  the  person  in  the  singular. 
A  typical  example  is  II.  277  6V  eg  <&ivria  xal 
ex  3>ivYJog  loisv.  In  III.  721  ex  xeivoio  ['I^cro^og] 
ft  ixdvsL  |  vApyog;  the  preposition  might  also 
denote  the  agent.  A  Homeric  example  seems 
to  be  <£  217. 

£)   Of  implied  motion. 

II.  700  ex  be  vv  Ttdvttiv  \  . .  .(Aypia . . .  |  xalov. 
II.  1171  ex  r>7og  &&X6  GfyiGiV  elf^ara  Svvai. 
With  a  verbal  noun  IV.  255  nhoov . . .  |  e%  A.lyg 
eaaeaSai.  Of  the  direction  from  which  a 
sound  comes:  III.  1212  diovaa  \  xevSftQv  e% 


—  us  — 

vrtdruv.     Also  of  a  native  place:  III.  704  elqv 

IV.  1149  al  &  eaav  ex 
For  examples  from  Homer 
compare:  B  625,  <£>  154;  a  417,  o  267,  n  247, 
p  455,  etc. 

*:)   Of  the  position  from  which  the  operation  takes  place. 
I.  801  TtepSeGxov  S7tav?iov$  \  ex  VYI&V.     Of. 
2  210  and  La  Roche  ibid.  I.  1115  ex  &  erfyw . . . 
[tyaivevo],  i.  e.  uoii  the   other  side   appeared." 
I.  1361  dxriqv  ex  xohrtoio  .  .  .  eGibea&aL.     Cf.  A 
275;  8  524.— II.  402  '  Apapavrtiv    rqMSev  e£ 
s8ioi6   rs   KipxaioLO  \  $dcr^  .  .  .  eig    a/la 
Cf.  e  283.— II.  1107  ov  M  ny  aarpa . . . 
&eaSai  \  ex  vs&uv.     Cf.  E  864,  A  62. 
d)    Of  the  direction  with  verbs  of  looking. 
III.    745    eSpaxov   ex   VYI&V.     IV.    568    ex 
novroio ...  |  8epx6(i€vot  Kepxvpav.  IV.  898  evopfjtov 
be&oxTifievai    ex   7tepfa)7t>7g.     Cf.  A  337,  H   154; 
also  T  375,  II  715,  etc. 

e)  Of  the  extent  or  measurement  front  a  point. 
I.   222  xpdarog   e%  vrdroio  xal   av%£vo$  .  . 
boveovro . . .  e^eipai.    I.  743  ex  ...  &^ov   . . .  %VVOJ(YI 
.^  1. 1310 — 1313  rolow  be  Thavxog  . . . 


xal  ar^e'  deipag  \  vsio^ev  ex  hayovtiv.  II.  736 
ex  5'  ai'T>7g  [obcp>7$]  •  •  •  xaraxexfarai  tfrtsipovSe. 
III.  1271  OGGOV  T'  ex  (3ah@l8og . . .  vvGGa  \  yiyverar, 
cf.  @  16  OGOV  ovpavo$  ear*  and  yaiyj$.  IV.  180 


—  n6  — 


[%pvaeov 

8%  vndroLo   7to8yjvex8±.     IV.  1346  e^aatfievat 

vndroLO  \  av%evog.      IV.    1608    5e^ag  be  ol 

vndroLO  |  xpaarog  .  .  .  ?<7T5  sul 

...&XTO.     Cf.  H  177,  n  640,  2  353,  X  397,  etc. 

2.    TEMPORAL. 

I.  861  dtu/2o/U'>7  5'  e/$  >7^uap  del  s^  tffAarog  YISV 
III.  1340  %  wvg.     IV.  1772  ei$  zrog 
g.—  II.  911  Jg  o5.     III.  302  &  <5e  rofJ. 
IV.  431  %  in  xeivov,  \  %  ov.    A  6,  493,  0  295, 
I  106,  H  86;  a  188,  (3  27,  90,  $  245,  etc. 

3.    METAPHORIC. 

#)  Of  a  preference  or  discrimination. 

I.  620  oiYi  $  sx  Ttaaeav  yepapov  Ttepupeiaaro 
Ttarpog  |  'Y^invfata.  II.  1150  rov  {isv  \xyiov]  .  .  . 
eppsZev  ...  1  4>^66)  ex  ndviuv  .  .  .  Ad.  I.  1352  p^at3 
onaaaav  .  .  .  dpiarovg  \  vUag  ex  Syuoio.  Cf.  A  96, 
0  680,  2  431,  etc. 

b)   Of  the  source  or  origin. 

(a)  When  the  source  is  a  person:  —  I.  283 
ro  ydp  olov  eriv  en  hoinov  sehfttip  \  ex  a&zv.  I. 
1071  ex  Ai6g  ^ap  irtfav&ev;  similarly  II.  196 
Seaiparov  ex  Atog  fcr;  II.  527  ex  Atog  ofyat;  II. 
995  J?c  A£(»fv  nvotai  .  .  .  |  ^p3ov;  II.  1122  TO  ^ 
pvpiov  ex  Atog  ^cop  |  Tufeev.  IV.  446  J 
ovMpevai  r  IfiSeg.  IV.  1082  Jwa^cro 
opxotg.  Here  belong  the  examples  of  learning 
or  hearing  a  thing  from  a  person:  III.  182  *£ 


avrolo  .  .  .  baevreg.  III.  677  e&dyj$  ex  Tiarpog 
svLTtYjv.  III.  903  eiGatovaai  \  e%  efis^ev  Note- 
worthy is  the  example  of  naming  a  place  after 
some  one:  IV.  1762  dftsi^avo  8'  ovvopa  Qyjpyjg  \ 
s%  £$8v.  For  Homeric  parallels  compare:  A  63, 
525,  B  197,  0  140,  251,  K  68,  H  19;  a  283,  f3 
136,  o  374,  p  518,  etc.;  also  h.  Merc.  477;  Xen. 
Ana.  II.  6,  17. 

(/?)   When  the  source  is  a  thing: — III.  294 
[Ttiip]  d$£G<f)arov  e%  ohiyoio 

III.  498    $6(j£iv    &    £% 

similarly    III.   1027. —  III.    1347    ex    norapolo 
...  d<pvacd/jevo$.     IV.  157  fidnrovG  ex 
IV.  674  7tpor8p>7£  J^  l^voc,  e(37idar^a£v. 

IV.  1426  ex  $8  vv  xeivov    8ev8peG>v  .  .  .  e%e<pavev. 
IV.  1446  pco/aSog  ex  nkr^q  Ttiev.     IV.  1734  ex 
$E   yvvYi   fi&hoio    nefaiv. —  Here    belong    three 
other  examples  denoting  the  origin:  II.  931  ex 
tov  be  Ai;p>7  nehei  ovvofta  ^copco.  II.  1079  xhayy/j 
byov  Tie^si  e%  ofidboio.     III.   1301   8stv6$   &  e% 
avrov  netetat  /3po^og.     Cf.  x  350,  etc. 

c)  Of  the  material  out  of  which  something  is  made. 
II.  845    vYiioq    ex  xorivoio    <pdhay£.     III.  1324 
rvxryv  eZ  d8d(tavro$  en&vvecxzv  e%erhyjv.     Cf. 
X  152. 

d)   Of  the  progenitor. 

II.  1153  r&v  e%  dfKporspcjv  elfiev  yevo$.  III. 
919  Jg  avrolo  Aidg'y^og.  Cf.  E  544,  H  113, 
4>  157,  *  347;  v  192,  etc. 


—  n8  — 

e)   Of  the  agent. 

I.  901  ndvra  ysvoito  \  ex  (taxdpw,  similarly 
II.  608  [lopaifiov  YJSV  ex  [taxdptiv.  I.  1098  ex 
yap  r>7$  ['Peag]  dvsfioi  .  .  |  .  nsTteip^rai.  II.  426 
sx  yap  r>7g  [K^Ttp^og]  xhvrd  rtsipara  xelrou 
de&huv.  II.  798  e%  vaster  s8oaav  riaiv.  III. 
431  [dvdyxY]]  fj  [is  xal  ev^dSs  velaSat  snfypaev 
lx  /?acr6/l>7og,  which  the  scholiast  explains  by 
dfyiyfisSa  Tipog  as  (3taa&evre<;  vTto  vov  /Jctcn/Ucog. 
Of.  B  33,  70,  669,  E  384,  P  101,  etc. 
/")  Of  the  cause;  "in  consequence  of  "on  account  of . 
I.  498  vsixsog  6%  oXoolo  bizxp&sv.  I.  520  ex  8* 
dve[ioto  |  ev8ioi  exhv^ovto  rLvaaoofisvyis  a/log  d^pat; 
similarly  II.  1248;  III.  345;  IV.  215,  607.— 
I.  1073  e%  d%8Mv  €pfyoio...e(ivteoiro.  II.  432  ex 
xafidroio  da&fi'  dvatpvaiouv.  III.  627  ex  tf  dpa 
rov  velxo$  Tt&ev.  IV.  613  hin&v  ex  Ttarpog 

IV.  1725  ex  $£  vv  xeivyg  \  (tohnyjg  .  .  . 

\  dvfydai  br^iotivrai.    Cf.  H  111,  I  566, 
A  308;  7  135,  8  343,  £  29,  o  197,  a>  388,  etc. 

g)   Of  conformity:  "according  to" 
III.  1006  ex  nop&js.     Cf  K  68. 
Metaphoric  are  also  III.  616  xovpyv  $*  e% 
ai%£tev  d&ivog  xar&Gxpsev  vnvo$  "refreshing  sleep 
gave   the   maiden   rest   from    her   anxieties". 
Homer  uses  the  simple  genitive  in  i  460  xd8  be 
x    efiov  xtfp   hti<pyiaei£   xax&v.      II.  828   ex  .  .  . 
dfypdavoLo    " unexpectedly";    cf.    dno 
"earnestly"  H  359,  M  233. 


-  Ttp6  - 

The  primary  meaning  of  Ttpo  (Sanskrit  prd, 
Latin  pro)  is  "forward",  "in  advance  of", 
"before".  Homer  uses  it  chiefly  in  the  local 
sense.  In  Apollonius  Ttpo  is  used  in  case- 
construction  only  twice,  and  in  both  passages 
it  is  local.  I.  781  Ttpo  no^og  II.  811  Ttpo  dcrrsog. 
Cf.  0  351,  T  292,  X  110,  H  783;  x  105,  o  468. 

It  is  not  surprising  that  Apollonius  avoided 
the  temporal  Ttpo  (K  224,  A  50=e  469.  o  524, 
p  476),  because  this  usage  had  become  prosaic. 
Cf.  Lutz,  p.  60;  also  Sobolewski,  p.  105.  That 
he  did  not  use  Ttpo  in  its  metaphoric  sense  of 
vTtep  or  Ttepl  "in  behalf  of"  (A  156,  373,  0  57) 
may  be  accounted  for  by  the  very  small  per- 
centage which  Ttpo  holds  among  the  prepo- 
sitions in  Apollonius. 

In  the  sense  of  Ttpo  (local),  Apollonius  used 
three  double  prepositions,  none  of  which  are 
found  in  Homer. 

a)  TtpoTtap. 

I.  454  Ttohiov  TtpoTtap  ouy«x/loto;  IV.  1286 
$O?(,L%OV  TtpoTtap  aiyiaholo.  Cf.  Hes.  Th.  518; 
Eurip.  Phoen.  120. 


III.  453    TtpoTtpo    &    dp   b(p&aty&v    en   ol 
hs'to  Ttdvra. 

y)  vTtonpo. 

IV.  178  {)TtOTtp6 


—   120  — 


—  vnex  — 


This  compound  preposition  means  "from 
beneath",  "away  from  under",  and  is  almost 
exclusively  used  in  a  local  sense.  There  is  no 
notable  divergence  in  Apollonius  from  the 
Homeric  usage. 

i.    OF  PLACE- 

I  745  %vvo%?i  xe%dhaaro  %irtivog  \  vepSev 
vTtex  fia^olo.  I.  913  hvGev  vnex  7t£Tp>7g.  I.  1166 
rvr&ov  vTtex  <i>pvyiy]$  napefterpeov.  I.  1204 
vnex  nporovtiv  epvayj^at.  II.  670  vne%  a/log 
elhxov  eperpd.  IV.  931  8e^<plveg  vne 
ehiaaovraL.  III.  575  rvr&ov  vnex  Iheoq 
enexehaav.  III.  1182  vnex  yevvcw  ehdaaoa. 

III.  1318  vnex  nvpog ...  |  %a&a§Y!v.  IV.  1657  vnex 
fieteuv  epvaavro.     Cf.  A  465,  0  504,  2  232,  etc. 

2.    OF  PERSON. 
IV.  949  d/l/l>7  vne%  d>l>l>75  be^etau  [a<palpav] . 

IV.  1222  jjlvSe  $  otpog  |  . . .  vnex  A*6$.     Cf.  P 
581,  589;  3,  37. 

3.    METAPHORIC. 

III.  608  vnex  xaxor^rog  d&v};y.  Cf.  vnex 
xaxov  in  N  89,  0  700,  T  300;  ^  107. 


—  121  — 

B.     WITH  THE  DATIVE. 

3 

8V 

Form: — The  preposition  sv  was  probably 
at  one  time  a  locative  case  without  suffix, — em 
being  the  form  with  suffix.  To  sv  and  evi 
correspond  eiv  and  eivi,  which  seem  to  be 
metrical  lengthenings  of  the  former.  The 
numerical  relation  of  these  forms  in  case-con- 
struction in  Apollonius  as  compared  with 
Homer  is  as  follows: 


Apol. 
Horn. 

M 

ti> 

dv 

dvl 

157 
601 

133 
1251 

8 
36 

0 

5 

These  figures  show  a  special  fondness  on  the 
part  of  Apollonius  for  evi,  while  he  avoided  elvi 
altogether. 

Meaning: — lv  denotes  primarily  rest  in  a 
place.  Hence  in  sense  as  well  as  in  case- 
construction,  it  stands  between  zx  and  si$. 
Besides  a)  the  radical  sense  "in",  sv  has  the 
following  local  meanings: 

b)  "among",  with  the  plural  of  persons. 

c)  "on",  of  superposition. 

rf)  "into"  or  "upon"  with  verbs  of  motion 
(constructio  praegnans) .  Closely  connected 
with  these  local  uses  is  the  quasi-instrumental 
use  in  such  phrases  as  hi  %epaiv  Sovpata 


—   122  — 

oslov  8'  sy^sias  sv  TtahdftYiGLv  or  sv 
I86vrs$.  The  examples  in  which  sv 
is  used  metaphorically  are  rare  in  epic  poetry, 
and  denote  chiefly  the  occasion,  the  condition 
or  state.  Likewise  the  temporal  use  of  sv  is 
little  represented  in  the  epic  literature. 

I.     LOCAL. 

WITH  VERBS  OF  REST  TO  DENOTE: 

a)    The  place  in  which  something  is  or  happens. 

(a)  With  proper  names  of  countries, 
islands  or  cities: — IV.  425  Aiy  sv  d^d^o  .  .  . 
xdfiov,  IV.  434  Aty  SVL  xd^LTts  vyou.  III.  1177 
ov  'QyvyLYi  svl  Qyjfiri  \  .  .  .  Ttsfyvsv.  II.  522  sv 
8s  KSG)  xarsvdaaaro.  IV.  1687  Kp^r??  SVL  by 
xvs<f)a$  yvhi^ovro.  IV.  614  rov  sv 
Aaxspsiy  {...s^Lxrsv.  I.  83  Aifivri  SVL 
IV.  1483  Aifivy  SVL...  shovro.  I.  770 
sv  .  .  .  syyvdLZsv.  I.  536-537  (3oV 

YI  svl  IIi;^ot    YI  nov  sv  'OpTuytT? .  .  . 

I.    1305  T>7^6)  SV  dfKpLpVTYl  7tS<pVSV. 

I.  94  TLyhsix;  8s  QSiy  SVL  86/j.ara  vals  yltacrS^g; 
cf.  A  155  sv  <E>3t7?,  8  555  'l$dxy  SVL  olxia  vaiw. 
Find.  Pyth.  III.  101,  and  schol.  to  Nem.  V.  25 
Ti^svg  8'  sv  <J>3^7?  spL^^axL  vals  ?aacr3e^. 
Hence  there  is  no  need  for  construing  SVL  with 
vals,  as  Gerhard  and  Wellauer  have  done  for 
the  reason  that  the  caesura  of  the  verse  falls 
between  case  and  preposition.  The  Bucolic 


-  123- 

Diaeresis  satisfies  the  requirements  of  the  meter, 
so  that  there  is  no  cause  for  changing  the  read- 
ing of  the  Manuscripts  Ivi  to  hi.  These 
remarks  apply  equally  as  well  to  IV.  1687. — 
I.  45  <&v%,dxYi  zvi  fypov  e'^EiTtvo.  For  examples 
from  Homer  compare  B  766,  T  244,  N  453;  a 
395,  5  556,  e  123,  3  80,  h  325,  v  260,  etc. 

(/3)  With  appellatives  signifying  the  great 
divisions  of  the  world  and  other  localities: — 
I.  128  hi  7tp(f>ftrlGi  M.vx7jvaUdv  dyopt.Giv  |  >-.•-. 
dns^xaro:  similarly  I.  673  GVYI  &  ap  hi  (AEGGYI 
dyopy  (assembly).  A  mixed  example  is  II. 
1021-1024,  describing  the  perverted  customs 
of  the  Mossynoeci  on  the  Pontus,  offffa  fiev 
dftfyabivi  pe^eiv  &€jut£,  37  hi  5>7^G),  |  37  ayopy?,  Ta8e 
rtdwa  ^o^uotg  EVI  ^j^av6^vetai  \  oGGa  5'  hi 
rtertovrifi&a,  x&va  Svpa^e  \  d 
hi  f*e%ov0iv  dyvial$. — I.  499  h 
£%OVGIV.  I.  831  Aiyairi  OGOLL  \VYIGOI\  siv 

vouerdovGiv-  similarly  III.  1293;  IV.  562, 
588,  790,  981,  1635.— IV.  1713  Sfooei  tvicrxiepv 
tefievos  .  .  .  \noisov.  III.  114  evpe  be  vovy'  .  .  . 
&a/Up7?  h  dXco^.  II.  910  c5  h  [arrpo]  ...aytag 
evvd^sro  vvxrag-,  similarly  III.  134;  IV.  1129, 
1137. — I.  126  hi  pyGGyg  \  tpepfaro 
III.  1031  Toi  53  evi  [/363pco]  &y]?iV^ 
G<pd?6cv.  I.  1323  [tolpav  dvan^Gecv 
h  dneipovi  yaiy;  similar  examples  are:  II.  151, 


-  124" 

872,  1018;  III.  204,  855;  IV.  480,  986,  1498.— 
IV.  916  Kvnpig  £T3  ev  Stratg  aveptya&o 

II.  820  xelvo  yap  elafievy  $oraxu§£og  s 

IV.  316  elaftevalai  $'   ev  aonera  Ttcosa  helnov. 

nn>roc^5(7j3\  ^  /  i    M       ^ 

.  Zio  cog  o   or   evi  xvyjfiotGi  xvveg  .  .  .  |  YI  ouyag 

xepaoix;  re  Ttpomg  l^vevovre^  similarly  II.  1213; 

III.  851.— II.  972  ev  xohnu  .  .  .  |  xefaav.    I.  965 
acrreog  evfafievi  rtpvfiviqGia  VTIOC,  dmv/at;  IV.  1123 
Toig  53  svpev  ...  |  eTA/l^c5  ev  ^levt.    III.  42  co  e vi 
[^t>^6)]  ndvra  $Gt6<5aXa  %&hxsvev.   11.387  TT?  ^uez^ 
T'  f^6   [^^(Tco]    y>76v  .  .  .  Ttoiyjaav,    similarly  IV. 
452,  544,  1726.     IV.  331  erepy  per  ev  [v^ay] 
iepov  eaxev  e$e$hov  \  ev  &  erepy  .  .  .  fialvov  is  a 
typical  example  of  ev  with  a  verb  of  rest  and 
of  motion   in   the    same    sentence. — II.  1006 

eve    Ttotftaivovoiv.     I,    1006    evl 
.  .  .  reravro;  similarly  II.  318; 

IV.  627. — I.  375  ev  5'  bhxti  £eara$  oropeaavro 
fpd^ayyag.      III.   976    Ttdrpri    evi    vaievdaaxov. 
III.  1206    TI^O    eve  (36$pov   op^ag;    IV.   1394 
7te$ov,  &    evi    AdScdv  .  .  .  pvero    (iyjha.       I.    81 

.i(3vyi$  evl  TteipaGi.    II.  131  wg  be 
.  .  .   uefaaaoxofioi    rterpy  hn 
II.   939    c5   evi  [Ttara^o]    XOV^YI  \ 
.  .  .  \  ov   5^ag   .  .  .  dva^v%ei;    III.    57 
evi  <t>dcn$i  vrja  xario^ei]  III.  168  ^poeg 
.  .  .  ev  7tora^6j  xa$'  ?/log  ^e^o^^evoi. — I.  16 
evl  novtti  .  . .  voorov  oXeaa^;  similarly  III.  743; 


—  125  - 

IV.  1705. — II.  1193  hi  novrov 
IV.  13  #£^(zg,  yjvre  (3a$eiyi$  rdpfyeGw  h 
xvv&v  e<p6(3y]Gev  o^uox/lxy.     II.  843  xe%vrat  rovtf 
sv  %6ovi  xeivy  rvftfiog.     III.  170  y  hi 

ri *  .  .  s8pi6(dvre$  "sitting  in  their  place";  III. 
1163  ore  by  erdpoi$  e^avng  efiixro  h  %cop??. — I. 
529  e&dGavro  . . .  speGGefiev  c5  em  ^copo;  similarly 
III.  944,  980;  IV.  1396.  For  Homeric 
examples  compare  A  105,  358,  F  34,  A  483, 
I  634,  0  20,  631,  2  36,  $  77,  239;  a  186,  7  103, 
5  335,  v  244,  i  25,  36,  57,  200,  x  210,  v  188, 
o  441,  p  136,  etc. 

(y)  Of  buildings,  parts  of  buildings  and 
the  like: — I.  148  86fioi$  svi  Tw&xpaxo  .  .  .  vexev; 
.similarly  I.  225;  II.  437,  459, 1022, 1154.  I.  818 

t'  olac  xovyai  Jl>7tTt5e$  sv  re  $O[AOLGLV  \  ev  re 
dyopy  re  xal  eihaTtivyGi  [tehovro,  is  a 
mixed  example. — IV.  1022  en  [tot  [tirpr]  (ievei, 
wg  hi  Ttarpog  bteuacnv.  IV.  810  ov  &YJ  vvv 
X^tpo^og  h  Yi^eci  Kevravpow 

III.  656  ore  n$  vvfltyq  Sahepov  noaiv  h 
[toiGiv  [ivperai-,  similarly  III.  671,  798,  1127. — 

IV.  1093  offivaiy  hi  %ahxov  dherpevovaa  xahiYi. 
I.     285      xeveolai     fatevbopat     h    [AeydpoLGiv, 
similarly  I.  810,  909;   II.  304,  778,  1023;    III. 
228,  305,  1116;  IV.  8,  1083,  1160.— II.  1028 
h  v^iaro)  (3aGi?iev$  ^LOGGVVI  S^adcrcj^;    cf.  Xen. 
Ana.  V.  4,  26.     III.  939    vyovSe  Sea*   »i,  T(5 


-    126  — 
6V  I     XOVpYjV     $Y!Sl$.        III.    278     TtpO^O^G)     EVi     TO^OC 

vavvaaat-;  similarly  III.  648,  838;  IV.  471.— 
I.  1174  ev  Ttpo^o^vy  .  .  .  yovvar'  exa^sv^  III.  215 
eatav  &  sv  Ttpofiohyai.  —  rll.  381  &ovpar60i$ 
sv  oixia  tzxTYivavreg.  IV.  1283  fivxal 
EVI  (pavrd^uvTai.  I.  121  ora^ftolcnv  sv 
faoyyGe  A(5o/U5?7$];  II.  123  o>g  5'  or 
6vl  ara^fiolGiV  artsipova  [i^a  6<p6(3yiaav  hvxoi.  — 
Here  belong  three  examples  of  ev  with  the 
genitive  in  the  elliptical  construction,  i.  e.  with 
the  characteristic  place  understood:  I.  960 


cf.  ^282;  also  Aesch.  Sup.  228?  416;  Arist. 
Ran.  774.  —  IV.  1159  ov  fiev  h  'Ahxivooio  ydpov 
(iev8aiv6  r^&Tcrcu;  IV.  1722  6v  'A^XLVOOIO  (3oo- 
xraaia$  opo^crat;  cf.  YI  132;  Herod.  I.  36.  The 
examples  in  Homer,  coming  under  this  cate- 
gory are  numerous.  Cf.  H  339,  A  132,  U  642; 
f  15,  7t  441,  v  1,  etc. 

(5)  Of  beds:—  I.  264  ev  te%6eaai  xahv^- 
d[ievo$;  IV.  1069  xovpyiq  Ttepi  [trjVidaGxov  \  olcnv 
6vl  fa%E6aai.  —  1.  872  rov  ft  zvi  /lexrpotg  'T^inv^g 

;  II.  1238  rov$  ft  hi  hsxrpoig  (in  concubitu) 
^ed.—Cf.  X  503;  a  437,^337,  x  497,  etc. 

(e)  Of  vehicles  and  the  like.  —  III.  309  ev 
7Hf/ltoto  8t,v£voa£.  IV.  219  6  ftevrvxro) 
6vl  ^6<|)pco  Aiifaiq$  InTtoiGi  /jisteTtpenzv.  I.  1111 
Ttavporspovg  vtdty&v  6v  VYII  hiTtovrsg;  III.  525 


—  127  — 

hi  vr\l  —  .1.  622  hdpvaxi  $  sv 

fixe.     II.  132    ao^l/leeg    <5    hi 
xhovEovrai   [^ue/Ucrcrcu].     III. 
801    fyupiafiov  .  .  .    y    sv  L    7to/l/la    <pdp[iaxa  .  .  . 
III.  858  xehatvYjv  ixpdba  <pyyov 


sv   xoG)   a^traro.     III.  1298    c5g    53    or' 


I.  746  ^a/l^mz  .  .  .  sv  aani8i  t 
Of.  B  87,  0  345,  0  367,  U  402,  *  248,  etc. 

(£)  Of  parts  of  the  body.  —  II.  956  ifispryaiv 
sv  ayxoivriGiv  $d[iaaaev.  IV.  1732  slaato  ydp 
ol  baipovirj  /3c5/la^  .  .  .  c5  sv  dyoarti.  III.  1160 
vypd  &  svl  /3Xe^)dp06g  £%ev  ofifiava.  IV.  696 
i&vg  svl  (SfafydpoLGLV  dvEG%e$ov.  II.  281 
sv  ysvveGGi  (tdryjv  dpdfiyjGav  obovrag.  III. 

63  OGGOV  SflolGiV    SVi  G$SVO$    STt^STO    ^ViOL^.      IV. 

1142  dv&ea  .  .  .  favxol$  svi  .  .  .  xohnoig  \  £G<p6peov. 

III.  644  svl  xpatiri  G^GOL  dtyog.     III.  728  py 
yap   fioi  sv  6<p$ah[iolGL    fyaeivoi  w$;  similarly 

IV.  853,  1145.—  III.  93  cu&og  eGGs*'  sv  df 
III.  457  sv  ovaGi  .  .  .  opcopa  av^rf.    III.  635 

53  sGaysipato  Svpov  |  wg  Ttapog  Jv  (Trep^otg;  IV. 
1059  sv  Grepvoig  d%£G>v  eihiGGsro  &V[AO<;.  —  I.  478 
^opo^  (t&v  SapGaheov  xyp  olbdvei  sv  GrySeGGt,; 
similarly  III.  397,  759;  IV.  1721.—  Cf.  A  83, 
238,  I  554,  B  213,  316,  2  555,  T  169,  <£  417,  etc. 
Here  belong  also  typ/iv  and  Svftog.  The 
examples  are  mixed,  i.  e.  partly  local  and 


—   128  — 

partly  metaphoric: — sv  (ppsai  Si^uog 
similarly  IV.  782,  794,  1671.  Of.  0  202,  413, 
K  232,  P  111,  4>  386,  <P  600;  n  73,  v  38,  etc.— 
1 1 1.551  xsap  be  [AOL  tig  svi  $v/.iti  .  .  .  nporLoaasrai', 
similarly  III.  700;  IV.  1045.  Cf.  B  223,  I  459; 
2  11,  etc. 

Noteworthy  are  two  examples  in  Apollonius, 
for  wrhich  Homer  seems  to  have  no  parallel; 
viz.  I.  460  slv  sol  atVco  Ttopfyvpeoxev  sxaora  "he 
pondered  everything  within  himself*.  III.  23 
av$i%a  Ttopcpvpovaai  svi  G<pioiv  "thinking  differ- 
ently within  themselves". 

(vj)  The  instrumental  use  of  sv: — This  use 
of  sv  with  the  dative  is  the  more  plastic  form 
for  the  simple  dative.  Both  uses  are  well 
represented  in  poetry,  while  in  Attic  prose  the 
latter  construction  prevails.  Some  of  the 
examples  here  given  are  on  the  boundary  line 
of  the  local  and  of  the  instrumental  use;  others 
are  more  clearly  instrumental. 

1st.  Examples  which  are  local  as  well  as 
instrumental:  I.  254  svi  xrspesaaiv  &txj&et$j 
similarly  III.  1030;  IV.  214.— I.  1034  6  5'  svi 
^a[idSoiGiv  &ltx&£t£.  Homer  uses  the  simple 
dative  in  n  640,  $  319;  £  479,  etc.— I.  561  svi 
%£poiv  . . .  UYI&OL^I  O{jL<pie7t&JxJ;  II.  1057  nhardyyv 
svi  %epoi  rwdaaw,  similarly  III.  1263;  IV.  222, 
1153,  1175,  970,  1053.  Cf.  A  14,  238,  0  221, 


—  129  — 

etc.—  IT.  399  em  VYI\  7tsipe$\     Cf.  M  16;  a  211, 
(3  226,  y  131,  v  317. 

2nd.  Examples  that  are  more  clearly 
instrumental:  II.  332  xaprvvavreg  eal$  evl 
#£pow  eper/td  "plying  the  oars  with  their 
hands";  similarly  II.  712;  III.  140;  IV.  904.— 
I.  814  ev  ofySatyolGL  .  .  .  opocoro;  IV.  1617  repag 
aivov  ev  o^a^olGiv  tiovrs$.  Cf.  A  587,  T  306, 
2  135,  190;  3  459,  x  385,  £  343,  etc.  For  the 
dative  compare  (1)  Apollonius  I.  519,  631;  III. 
1009;  IV.  128,  476,  1038,  1668;  (2)  Homer 
T  28,  169,  E  770,  K  275,  N  99;  (3  155,  y  373, 
$  47,  226,  269?  etc.— II.  44  In  <£oufy)6g  ev 
oftpaaiv.  Cf.  Boiling  on  the  Epic  Fragment 
from  Oxyrynchus,  A.  J.  P.  XXII.— III.  343  $ 
&  em  yofKpoig  lateral  [VYIV$]  "the  ship  is  held 
together  by  bolts".  III.  206  h  dSe^roLac 
(3oeiai$.  IV.  888  ravvaavreg  ev 

L',  cf.  the  scholiast. 

£)  Place  "among  "  or  "between" . 
In  Apollonius  as  in  Homer  this  use  is 
limited  to  plurals  denoting  persons  or  an 
assembly  of  persons.  I.  441  and  III.  605  are 
plural  in  sense,  and  II.  597  is  personification. 
The  examples  are: — I.  1213  ov  ev  ApvoTteaoiv 
67ts<pv6v.  II.  238  or  evl  Qpyxeoaiv  avaooov. 
Cf.  A  109,  A  470,  H  45,  etc.— I.  343  YI^VOI  ev 
;  similarly  I.  441,  464;  II.  309,  881. 


—  I30 -- 

Cf.  H.  417,  M  206,  209,  2  569,  etc.— I.  656  %y 
svl  ryGiv  .  .  .  dyopevsv.  I.  1338  $dg  svl  roloiv 
II.  10  rolov  <53  sv  TtdvrsGGi  .  .  .  Zxfyaro 
;  similarly  III.  443;  IV.  1276.  Cf.  n  378, 
etc.;  also  Aesch.  Pro.  973;  Arist.  Nub.  1366.— 

II.  597  sv  6'  apa  [isaaaig  TlfyyaGi  $wqet$  ii 
poog.     II.  748  rov  {izv  ev  &3/vy6voiGi 

II.  1281  <3p>7  &  fjfiiv  svl 
i;  similarly  IV.  1191.  Cf.  K  435; 
^  144,  etc.  III.  605  evl  ^Ka^xion^  yevsy  tdbe 
kvypa  recv%$ai.  Cf.  I  634;  7  103,  etc.— III. 
667  5?  5'  svl  Ttacolv  %ar\  Cf.  a  114.— III.  812 
ocr'  evl  ^cjotat  nshovrai.  Cf.  Aesch.  Pro.  442. — 

III.  1105  Anfnyg  8*  ov  tofog  kv  dvfyaGw.     Cf.  p 
354. — IV.  88  S-eoDg  svl  aolacv  tVatpotg  .  .  .  re&v 
/J,V$G>V  STtuaropat;  .  .  .  Ttoi^aac.    Cf.  $  703,  etc. — 
Without  Homeric  parallel  is  III.  314=835  sv 
Ttoaiv  in  the  sense  of  s/j,7to86v,    but    compare 
Pind.  Pyth.  VIII.  43;  Soph.  Ant.  1327;  Eurip. 

Ale.  739. 

c)    To  denote  superposition. 

Kuehner-Gerth  and  Sobolewski  are  princi- 
pally responsible  for  this  category.  Greek  or 
Roman  writers  would  hardly  have  formed  this 
sub-division.  The  distinction  rests  with  us, 
and  it  comes  from  our  trying  to  express  with 
greater  logical  ^accuracy  the  position  of  things. 
Whether  we  should  render  the  Greek  sv  by 
"in"  or  "on"  depends  largely  on  our  idiom. 


—  13*  — 

We  can  say  "to  hunt  in  the  mountains",  but  we 
can  not  say  "to  sacrifice  in  the  beach".  "'On  the 
campus"  and  "in  the  campus"  show  no  difference. 
Either  is  correct,  but  one  may  be  more 
habitual  than  the  other.  Idiomatic  differences 
exist  in  all  languages.  Thus  the  German  "aui 
dem  Lande  wohnen",  is  in  English  "to  live  in 
the  country".  The  most  important  cases  are 
those  in  which  a  distinction  in  meaning  is  to 
be  expressed;  as,  "fish  live  in  the  sea",  but  "a 
log  floats  on  the  sea". — In  the  following 
examples  from  Apollonius  we  would  translate 
ev  by  "on".  I.  728  ev  $  ap  exdary  \  reppan 
8ai$a?ia  7to/l/la  $iaxpL&6v  ev  exexaaro,  i.  e.  on 
either  end  of  the  Argo  were  separately  wrought 
many  curious  works.  Cf.  Lalin,  p.  2,  b. — 

I.  1090  xex?u(ievov  pahaxols  hi  xtieaotv  "reclin- 
ing on  soft  skins".     II.  26  Xaji>,  ovr'  ev  opeaaw 
dvepe$  d{i<pinevovraL;    similarly   II.    478,    525, 
1102;  III.  857,  968;  IV.  265,  287,  518,  1680.— 

II.  927  s v  ouyia/lc5  ^reve^ov  rdfyov  dfifyeTtevovro: 
II.  1235  efa'  sv  'OX^TtQ  TiTyvuv  yvaaai-v.    IV. 
232  evpovtes  IT'  eh  a^6$  olfyan  vya.     IV.  280 
xvpfiiag,  olg  BVI  nacai  o8ol  .  .  .  eaGiv,  "maps,  on 
which  were  all  the  roads".     IV.  882  %a[ievvag 
r'  d[u3>e7t£vovro,  r^$  evi  .  .  .  vvxr'  aeaav.     IV. 
1717  epyjfAaiy  evi  pe^ew  dxrri.    For  Homer  com- 
pare A  29,  34,  *  316;  a  108,  y  287,  T  520,  etc. 


—  132  — 

WITH  VERBS   OF  MOTION,  IMPLYING  SUBSEQUENT  REST: 

When  motion  is  expressed  by  kv  with  the 
dative  instead  of  «g,  eni  or  Ttpog  with  the 
accusative,  we  have  what  is  known  as  the 
"constructio  praegnans",  i.  e.  the  rest  or 
position,  consequent  upon  the  motion,  is  antic- 
ipated; e.  g.  kv  yaiy  neoeetv  (IV.  388)  "to  fall 
(to  the  ground  and  remain  lying)  on  the 
ground".  This  use  is  chiefly  epic.  For  the 
examples  in  Aeschylus  see  Lalin,  p.  3-4. 
Apollonius  adheres  to  the  Homeric  usage. 

BouVa>:  1)  Of  going  aboard  a  ship  II.  962 
hi  VYil  .  .  .  ifaaav.  Of.  B  610.  2)  Of  landing 
IV.  332  kv  $  srepy  |>>7<r6)]  .  .  .  (3alvov. 

BdU*>:  II.  107  kv  xovir&i  fidfov.  Cf.  E  588; 
x  352,  etc.;  similarly  III.  1307  rov  8*  kv  %SW 
xd(3(3afav  6xhd%.  Metaphoric  are  II.  256  uy 
pot  ravra  vote  zvi  fidhheo;  IV.  1109  YI  ft  enoc,  h 
nvxivbv  @dher\  Cf.  E  513;  i;  65. 

:  III.  585    $e%$ai    em    [teydpoiGiv 
;  IV.  186  $s%&ai  <53  svl  %^lv  eyatv;  IV. 
1133  c5  em  x6tou  $e£aro.   Cf.  2  331,  *  89;  p  110. 
AT;G)    (8vvG>):    I.  638    'T^iTtu/laa    8vv'    hi 
rsv%8Gt,  rarpog.    IV.  769  $v  &  svl  Ttovro)  Aiyaiu 
[TIp6$].     Cf.  K  254,  *  131;  co  496,  etc.* 

<o:  I.  1247  evi  ora^olai  vo^s^  ehoav 
Cf.  (I  210. 

et^cj:  I.  1234  c5g  rd  Ttpcora  pow  SVL  x 
epeioev. 


£G>:  III.  251  3%t£*i>  |  sv 

II.  453  01  xal  Ttpoa&ev  en'  tffj.an  xelae 

©ptttrjtto:  IV.  487  hi   <7< 
Cf.  E  161. 

'I<5pixj:  IV.  1548  <E>oi7?ou  x<repa£  <$puov   Ir 
I  x$ovi     Cf.  y  38,  e  86. 

°I^6):  I.  788  x/lt(T|U6J  Iff . . .  elcrej';  similarly  II. 
36;  III.  49;  IV.  689.    Cf.  I  200,  0 150, 4>  202,  etc. 

Mvpofiai:    II.  371   xo/lTta  ev 
HvpsTai;  cf.  schol. 

HrpyvviAi:  IV.  694  <pd<jyavov  ev  j(^ovl  Ttrfe 
IV.  1091  y^vaig  evi  .  .  .  xevtpa   TI^^S.     Cf.  Z 
10,  K  374,  X  276,  etc. 

TIiTtTw:  I.  506  ertetiev  5'  evi  xvfiatfiv  ttxeavolo; 
similarly  I.  757,   1027,  1056;  II.  1014,  1038; 

III.  1312;  IV.  388,    1290.     Cf.  A  482,  E  370, 
400,  0  538,  n  258,  etc. 

:  III.  1114  sv  6<j 


tTtro):  11. 

i:  II.  233    xoLxrt    h   yaarept 
Cf.  A  441. — IV.  159  ai'TT?  evl  %&py  Sfjxsv  [yevvv]. 

Xra:  III.  757  [i556)p]  TO  &?  veov 
rie  nov  8v  yavhti  xe%vrat.     Cf.  v  261. 
In   IV.  930    TtZayxrriGLV   svl 
i  the  preposition  means  between, 


-  13,4  - 

2.    TEMPORAL. 

I.  1080  s7tLrt?io[ievYi  &  svl  vvxr'i;  similarly 
III.  798,  862;  IV.  60.— III.  327  nporspu  hi 
;  similarly  IV.  236,  1477, 1500.— IV.  217 
hi  IIYIVI.  IV.  244  ^ot  svc  vpiTdry. 
For  examples  of  this  use  in  Homer  compare 
n  643,  2  251;  p  76,  p  176,  a  367,  %  301;  also 
h.  Merc.  67,  155,  400.  A  blending  of  the 
local  and  temporal  use  gives: 

3.    THE  flETAPHORIC  USAGES  TO  DE  NOTE 

a)    The  occasion. 

A  good  example  to  show  this  transition  is 
I.  818  a/l/l'  olai  xovpai  /U?£rt&£g  sv  re  bofioiGiv  ev 
re  %opolg  d^opy?  re  xal  dhartivYiGL  fietowo,  "only 
the  captive  maidens  were  honored  in  the  house, 
at  the  dance,  at  the  meeting  and  at  banquets". 
Other  examples  are:  I.  200  h  araMy  $e8ayj(t£vo$ 
dvn<))6peG$cu.  I.  215  %op<5  evi  8tvevovGav.  I. 
290  oi)8*  h  ovsipo)  toiGdfiqv;  II.  306  olov  r'  ev 
ivtiv.  I.  467  xv&og  svl  nroh- 
i. — Cf.  A  258,  fl  568;  e  395, 
8  497=^1  384,  r  581,  etc.  Another  metaphoric 
usage  is  that  of 

£)    The  condition  or  state. 

I.  160  hi  £vvo%y  Ttohepoio,  ain  the  pressure 

of  war".     I.    1211    roioiGiv   h   tfSsGiv   avtog 

e$epf3ev.     Cf.  I  143,  285.    II.  66  xaxy  ^Gavreg 

h  aiGy.     Cf.  X  61,  etc.     II.  214  fodp^]  ml 


-  135  ~ 

dvanrofiat  ev  xafidroLGiv,  "even  in 
hardships  I  return  thanks".  II.  333-334  enel 
<pdo$  ov  vv  n  roGGov  \  Saver'  ev  ev%ohriGiv,  OGOV 
r  evl  xdprei  %eip&v  "since  safety  will  depend 
not  so  much  upon  entreaties  as  upon  the 
strength  of  your  hands". — II  643  vuerepy  apery 
evL  $dp(7og  de^G).  II.  646  evre  ne^eG^e  euneSoc 
dpyaheoig  evl  deifiaaiv,  "when  you  are  bold  in 
painful  fears".  Cf.  YI  212,  $  88.— II.  1132= 
III.  476  ev  xaxorriri.  Cf.  T  20,  H  40,  51;  r  360. 
—IV.  1735  tiijfiri  8e  oi  ev  QiUryn.  Cf.  B  232, 
H  314,  331,  n  130;  3  313. 

Noteworthy  are  I.  1113  rolGL  be  Maxpidbeg 
axomai  xal  Ttdcra  nepaly  \  Qpqixiyis  evl  %epalv 
ealg  npovfyaiver'  C3jla3ae;  IV.  202  vvv  8*  evl 
^epcrii^  Ttalbag  eovg  Ttdrpyv  re  tpihyv  yepapoix;  re 
roxrjaq  la^o^ev^  III.  549  <&ivev$  ye  $ey  evl 
Kvnpih  voarov  nefypaSev  eaaeaSai.  Cf.  I  97, 
0  741;  x  69;  also  Soph.  0.  C.  1443,  0.  T.  314; 
Arist.  Lys.  30  ev  ral$  yvvai^lv  e$riv  YI 
In  IV.  998  [teMov  8e  (joy  evi 
purpose  seems  to  be  expressed.  The  phrase 
is  equivalent  to  1$  nohefiov  ^cop^eo^ou  226,A 
E  737,  0  376,  K  78,  T  36,  etc.  As  Homer  has 
no  instance  of  evi  to  express  the  purpose,  and 
no  other  example  occurs  in  Apollonius,  I  am 
enclined  to  believe  that  Ivi  in  IV.  998  should 
read  em. 


-136- 

—  Gvv  — 

B.  Gildersleeve  (A.  J.  P.  XXIII. ,  p.  15)  calls 
ffov  ' '  a  false  Smerdis  on  the  list  of  the  prepositions' ' . 
T.  Mommsen  (Beitr.,  p.  29)  says:  "Mir  ist  der 
linguistische  Ursprung  und  also  auch  die  Urbedeut- 
ung  des  Wortchens,  wie  bei  vielen  andern  Praposi- 
tionen,  dunkel."  Generally  speaking  it  means 
* '  with* ' ,  ' '  in  company  with  "  "  with  the  help  of ' ' 
or  "attended  by  ".  When  used  with  a  person,  it  is 
sociative ;  otherwise,  it  is,  as  a  rule,  modal  or  instru- 
mental. As  in  Homer,  so  also  in  Apollonius  ffov  ap- 
proaches occasionally  the  local  sense  of  t^rd  c.  dat. 
as  in  I.  415  (  ^829),  I.  869;  IV.  861.  In  as  far  as 
Apollonius  has  ffuv  more  frequently  with  the  person, 
he  conforms  with  the  use  in  the  Odyssey  ;  but  in  the 
preponderence  of  the  plural,  he  agrees  more  closely 
with  the  Iliad.  Cf.  T.  Mommsen,  Beitr.  p.  55,  and 
187.  The  combination  of  a  person  and  thing  with 
ffov  does  not  occur  in  our  author ;  nor  has  he  an 
instance  of  two  nouns  in  different  numbers  governed 
by  only  one  ffov.  In  four  passages  (I.  1200;  III. 
1287;  IV.  1228,  1589;  cf.  £498,  /  194;  v  n8,  etc.,) 
ffov  is  used  after  a&ro?,  in  place  of  the  simple  dative, 
of  which  Apollonius  has  twelve  examples.  Cf.  T. 
Mommsen,  Beitr.  p.  66,  188.  The  variant  form 
£6v,  which  occurs  nine  times  in  Homer,  is  found  twice 
in  Apollonius,  and  only  where  the  meter  calls  for  it. 

As  ffov  belongs  chiefly  to  the  higher  class  of  poetry 
(  Mommsen,  pp.  3-7  ),  it  is  not  surprising  to  find  an 
increase  of  this  preposition  in  Apollonius  in  propor- 
tion to  its  frequency  in  Homer.  It  may  be  classified 
as  follows : 


-   137  — 

i.    SOCIATIVE,  TO  DENOTE: 

a)  Accompaniment. 

I.  70  dpiGTrfiGGi  GVV  dvfyaGiv  5<ppa  vzoifo. 
I.  131  avv  xai  ol  *T?ia$  xisv;  similarly  I.  263, 
415,  557,  754,  756,  869,  888,  992;  II.  122,305, 
458,  466,  705,  815,  1166;  III.  240,  450,  703, 
869,  1000,  1164,  1238;  IV.  22,  72,  734,  861, 
1019,  1039.  Homeric  examples  are:  A  227, 
307,  325,  Z  372,  A  140,  P  407,  2  65,  ®  460, 
*  829,  II  430;  a  191,  362,  (3  183,  /?  32,  85, 
8  751,  f  52,  80,  etc.  . 

b)  Partnership  or  co-operation. 

I.  111=11.  1191  avv  U  ol  vAp/os  |  rsv&v. 
III.  539  GVV  $oi[iovi  nzipYi^eiriv}  similarly  IV. 547, 
822.  Cf.  T  439,  Z  314,  I  49,  A  792;  YI  235, 
$  493,  v  391,  v  2,  etc. 

Here  belongs  the  metaphoric  expression 
'to  lie  with',  found  in  the  following  examples: 

III.  839  otmco  hexrpa  avv  OLV^OLGL  nopGvvovGa. 

IV.  1105=1117  hextpov  be  GVV  avspi  nopGaiv- 
ovGav.     IV.  793  rte  GVV  a3>ai'aTrou$  ^e  SvytiiGiv 
laveiv  IV.  1152  GVV  dhhfaoiGiv  6(u%av.     Homer 
uses  Ttapd  c.  dat.  instead.     Cf.  e  154,    YI  347, 
%  464,  4  219. 

2.     nODAL. 

The  best  examples  of  this  use  are:  I.  512 
GVV  dfifipoGiy  .  .  .  avbrr,  cf.  B  787;  o  193;  Aesch. 
Sept.  487.  — II.  1069  GVV  XS^OL^  cf.  A  161; 


—  138  — 

£  151;  Aesch.  Pers.  470.— III.  126  (3ij  xevealg 
avv  %6paiv,  cf.  h  359. — Examples  which  border 
on  this  as  well  as  on  the  following  category 
are:  I.  241  avv  tsv^eaiv  diaaovvag ;  similarly 

I.  1059;  III.  499.— I.  1207  "TAag  xateey  avv 

.  .  .  $i£ifeo  xprjvyjg  iepov  poov.  III.  176 
vfja  avv  sweat  (lifivs^9  exYifai;  similarly 
IV.  1122,  1533. —  III.  862  avv  o^vaioiai 
<pdpeaaiv.  III.  899  avv  Ttohesatv  oveiaaiv  olxatf 
IxoiaSe.  III.  1197  ($%  ft  eg  sp^fiairjv  .  .  . 
nc,  <|)cop  avv  naaiv  %pYieaai.  III.  1278  %vv 
xai  daniSi  fialv  Jg  as^ov.  III.  1287  (3$  5' 
avrii  Ttporepocre  avv  dani&i.  Cf.  A  170,  A  419, 
E  297,  I  80,  194,  K  182,  H  498,  II  248;  a  359, 
v  118,  258,  etc. 

3.    INSTRUflENTAL. 

II.  1224  avv  evreai  nei^nvai.  IV.  1096 
avv  vevxeatv  e%e%daai[ii  K6h%ov$. — Cf.  E  220, 
Z  418,  A  386,  N  719,  etc. 

4.  CONCOfllTANT:  "TOGETHER  WITH." 

I.  617  avv  triatv  zovg  Ippatcra^  dxoirag. 
1. 1200  s%yjeipe  avv  avvois  e%(jtaai  yaiyjg  [ehdvrjv]. 

II.  828    avv    ocrrea)    lva$   exspaev.      II.   1120 

d)  avv  Sovpan  xv/^a^og  opfiYj  \  vlfjag  <&p%oioi 
riiovag   fidhe.       III.    689    (iiq   a<pe   natvip 
avv  dvftpdaiv  avrix'  oheaavi.     IV.  1228 
.   .  xal   atsLvdg   avrolg   avv   'E 
IV.  1589  afyavvog  \  awdi  avv  rpino 
v  enteto.     Cf.  n  803,  P  57;  '(i  408,  etc. 


—  139  — 
5.    TENPORAL. 

IV.  1005  GVV  Aifaao  xefav&Q.  Here  GVV 
seems  to  have  the  same  meaning  as  apa 
(temporal);  i.  e.  "at  the  arrival  of  Aeetes." 
The  example  has  been  variously  interpreted. 
Of.  Haggett,  p.  29.  The  difficulty  arises  from 
the  doubtful  sense  of  xefav^og  in  this  particular 
passage.  Herwerden  (Mnemosyne,  XI.  p.  120) 
suggests  xshsvapti,  taking  GVV  in  the  meta- 
phoric  sense  of  xard  "according  to".  It  is  not 
impossible  that  the  phrase  means  "with  the 
expedition",  hence  "with  the  fleet  of  Aeetes". 
What  Gildersleeve  said  in  regard  to  GVV  in 
general,  viz.  that  it  is  "a  false  Smerdis  on  the 
list  of  the  prepositions",  may  be  said  more 
particularly  of  this  example. 

C.   WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 


Form:  —  Morphologically  el?  bears  a  close  relation 
to  iv.  Originally  there  were  the  two  forms  &  and 
^9,  related  to  each  other  as  ix  and  ££.  The  doublets 
&  and  &s  were  employed  to  differentiate  the  specific 
in  and  into  relations,  &  being  restricted  to  the  dative 
and  &>?  to  the  accusative.  Exceptions  to  this  restric- 
tion are  seen  in  Pindar  (Ol.  X.  90;  Pyth.  II. 
21,  157;  Nem.  VII.  46),  where  ^  governs  the 
accusative  ;  cf.  Latin  in  with  the  accusative  and  with 


—  140   — 

the  ablative.  The  form  &?  was  in  turn  bifurcated, 
owing  to  the  influence  of  following  sounds,  into 
£9  before  consonants  and  ^9  before  vowels,  for  which 
the  Inscription  of  Gortyna  still  gives  evidence.  In 
Ionic- Attic  at  a  later  period  &?  became  el?  by  loss  of 
the  v  with  compensatory  lengthening.  The  doublets 
£9  and  el?  were  both  used  for  a  time,  until  finally 
el?  became  the  standard  prose  form. 

In  Apollonius  the  form  £9  occurs  112  times  in  case- 
construction,  while  el?  is  found  only  53  times,  giving 
the  proportion  of  2  to  i,  as  is  also  the  case  in  Homer. 

Meaning: — Besides  its  local  meanings,  "to", 
1 '  into*  * ,  '  *  toward* ' ,  el?  developed  in  the  later  language 
a  number  of  metaphoric  usages.  Krebs  (p.  no) 
says:  "  Bei  der  Fliichtigkeit  seiner  Natur  verliert 
sich  el?  mehr  als  jede  andere  Proposition  in  eine  reich 
ausgebildete  Phraseologie" .  Most  of  these  meta- 
phoric usages  are  not  represented  in  epic  poetry,  and 
Apollonius  remained  true  to  his  department.  He 
uses  el? : 

i.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

a)    The  place  to  which  or  into  which  a  motion  tends. 

(a)  With  proper  names  of  countries, 
islands,  cities,  seas  and  rivers:  III.  61  eg  *At&x 
rauT^U^Tat ;  similar  is  the  example  with  a 
noun  which  implies  motion:  IV.  1508  eg  * 
yiverai  ol^og. — IV.  652  eg  AiSahiyv 
vfjaov.  II.  692  el  53  dv  OTtecroto  |  yalav  eg 
aGxYj&ea  voatov  oTtdaGy.  III.  601 
eg  'A%cui8a  yalav;  similarly  III.  1080; 
IV.  1327.— I.  336=11.  416  eg  €EUcWa 


-  141  — 


similar  examples  are  gg  'E/UldSa  yalav  ixea&ai 
1.  904;  cf.  II.  639,  893;  III.  992;  IV.  98;  *g  'EMdSa 
.  .  .*<3a£  ayeiv  II.  1139;  cf.  I.  416;  III.  29,  339, 
1059.—  IV.  608  'Hpt&xvo*'  npoxvMrtai  d^poa 
cf.  IV.  626  —  III.  2  Ig  'lo^o^  db^yays 
g;  cf.  also  III.  89,  1113  1134;  IV.  1161.— 
IV.  1490  Jg  Ai^iV  dnevaaas.  I.  623  4g 
Qivoiyv  epvaawro.  I.  419  Ig  'Qprvyiqv  .  .  .  &3pa 
cf.  IV.  1Y03.—  II.  1156  wv^y  Jg 
II.  986  Hovrov  s$  *A.%eivov  .  .  . 
a^^v.  —  For  Homeric  examples 
compare:  B  667,  752,  T  75,  Z  207,  I  381,  K  28, 
A  22,  n  753;  a  18,  85,  172,  y  159,  ^  160,  £  295, 
Z  128,  etc. 

(/3)   With  appellatives  signifying  the  great 
divisions  of  the  world  and  other  localities:  — 

I.  635  fg  aiyiahov  npo%eovro.     I.  1108  s$  ain- 
eivqv  avayov  (36a$  ovpeog  axpyv.    IV.  759  eh&elv 
eig  dxrd$.     II.  368  sAiaasrai  6t$  a/la  similarly 

II.  403,  746.—  IV.  100    Jg  lepov  dteog   dvuyei 
vya  .  .  .  s^dav.     I.   1010    n68ag    8'    elg    fiev^og 
[a/log]  epsibov.     III.  589  eqv  fg    yalav   lovrag. 
Different   is   III.  1358    eg   yalav  .  .  .  nsaovreg 
afalling  to  the  ground  ",  for  which  no  Homeric 
parallel  can  be  found.     The  same  may  be  said 
of  I.  1051;  IV.  597.    Homer  has  h  c.  dat.  after 
TUTtTG).  —  II.  831    ei$    ?>log    op^S^rog    xartpiov. 

III.  1196  j3yj  $  Jg  Jp^atV.     H-  1081  Ig 


-   142  - 


di)r>7;  III.  1382  dvefcovvag  eg 
similarly  III.  1396;  IV.  949.—  I.  1263  eg  & 
xehsv^ov  .  .  .  Sesv.  IV.  636  fyepe  .  .  .  xohnov 
eg  uxsavolo.  I.  1110  yjpeaav  eg  hif 

I.  916  exefaav  vfjaov  eg  'Hhexrpyg  ' 
similarly    IV.    521.  —  II.    1091    aiaaovreg  .  .  . 
Ttspdtyg  elg  ovpea  yairig;  similarly  II.  1242.  — 

III.  1269  eg  rte&iov  TO  'Apyjiov  riTteiyovro:,    also 

IV.  809.  —  II.  934  %  $    eg  n&ayog    7te<p6pyro. 

II.  934   XaZ^og  .  .  .  tavvovro    eg   7t68ag   d^o- 
repovg.     II.  1167  veo^i  eg  ntikiv  A(>yrao;  cf.  III. 
1404  YIIS  V  eg  nvoMeSpov.     IV.  597  neaev  .  .  . 
^i^LVYig  eg  7tpo%odg  TtohvfievSeog.     I.  1051  eg  8e 
nvhag    ofidSa)   neasv.     I.  1007    eg   dhfivpov  .  .  . 

^TtTo^reg;  similarly  IV.  1599  eg  vbata  .  .  . 
I.  1188  (3yj  8s  Iftev  sig  vhyv.  III.  41  eg 
tiva  xal  ax^tovag  .  .  .  (3s(3rpcei,  ahe  went 
to  his  forge  and  anvil";  cf.  3  273.  I.  1236 
eg  ri^evra  <j)opev[i£vov  [t5&jp],  IV.  1566 
exofAiGGafiev  eg  robe  ^i^ivYig  %evpa. 
(y)  Of  buildings,  parts  of  buildings, 
enclosures  and  the  like  :  —  I.  577  yuf\ti 
etpenovrcu  .  .  .  elg  afatv,  similarly  I.  1173.  —  I. 
853  'T^iTtu/bfg  fiaGikYiiov  eg  $6{tov  cbpro  Alaov- 
t&7s;  similarly  III.  177,  528?  538;  IV.  348,  440. 
Here  belong  the  examples  of  eg  with  the 
genitive  to  denote  the  characteristic  locality  of 
a  person:  I.  337  Zvvai  tf  d^iu  n&ovrou  eg 


-  M3- 

xehevSot-,    III.  212   eg    Aiyrao   xtovreg. 

II.  353    ev$a  per  eig   *A'&ao   xaracfidng    sari 

III.  419  roSe  x&ag  dno'iGeat,  eig 
IV.  1002  MySeiav  .  .  .  sov  sg  Ttarpog 
also  IV.  1077;  cf.  4>  48,  II  160,  482; 
/?  195,  etc.;  also  Herod.  I.  92,  113;  V.  51. 
Noteworthy  is  the  example  with  the  possessive 
pronoun:  I.  708  eig  sov  wpro  reecrScu;  cf.  <P  574. 
— IV.  1602  Innov  sg  evpea  xvxhov  ay&vog 
are^Yi.  IV.  689  d<pixovro  Kipxyg  sg 

III.  738  VYIOV  olaofiai  tig  'Exdryg;  III.  841 

eig  'Exdr^g  nspLxahhsa  VYIOV  dyoisv.  IV.  104 
eig  yap  yuv  [vija]  fiyjGavreg.  This  last  example 
may  also  be  tmesis.  Homeric  examples  for 
this  category  are:  A  222,  Z  490;  a  276;  8  674, 
x  60,  n  328,  407,  p  442,  etc. 

(3)  Quasi-local  are  the  examples  of  sg 
with  nouns  denoting  meetings,  contests  and 
the  like: — I.  654  iovaai  eig  dyopyv  " going  to 
the  assembly";  similarly  IV.  214.— III.  1239 
*la&[iiov  elai  .  .  .  sg  dytiva  "he  went  to  the 
Isthmian  contest".  III.  1278  (3alv'  sg'ae^ov. 

IV.  1154  pj  npiv  sg  dhxyv  . . .  smfipiGeiev  opihog 
"before  the  crowd  might  rush  to  the  fight". 
III.  1384  sneiyofievovg   sg  dpya   Crushing  into 
fight".     IV.  1742  elpi  8'  sg  avydg  r^iov.     IV. 
805   ^eovg   $   eig    Salra   xdheGGa.     IV.  454  sg 

yev;  in  N  277  purpose  is  signified.    I.  109 


IJLIV  Tptromg  dptcrnyG^  eg 
iyi;  similarly  III.  1165;  IV.  183,— III. 
820  Iva  . . .  dvryaeiev  eg  tortyv;  similarly  III.  907 
avvov  xexhopai  elg  o)7t^v  "I  summoned  him  into 
my  presence".  Of.  0  13,  I  487,  P  129,  T  34,  45, 
173,  *  685,  II  204,  520;  y  420,  etc.  Under 
this  subdivision  belong  a  few  figurative 
expressions:  IV.  404  eg  aryv  fitfaoftev:,  similarly 

I.  477;    IV.    1014.— I.  363    eig    epyov    Ttpcorog 

';    II.  886  eypea^   elg   tyyov.     IV.   385 
;'  8i$  epefiog.     III.  903  (IYJ  Ttarpog  «g  ovara 

ai.  III.  298  aTta/ldg  be 
Ttapadg  eg  %%6ov.  The  expression  eg 
TM^og  t^ea^at  "to  fall  into  one's  hands'7  occurs 
three  times  in  Apollonius:  II.  1170;  IV.  415, 
1041,  with  which  compare  K  448.  Other 
examples  in  Homer  are  II  327;  a  421,  ^  372, 
etc. —  The  phrase  elg  ev  "into  one  place", 
which  occurs  four  times  in  Apollonius  (I.  39; 

II.  322;  IV.  135,  1333),  is  the  equivalent  for 
the  Homeric  eg  %copoi>  eva  A  446,  0  60.    Similar 
is  II.  606  rterpai  $3  elg  era  %c5po^  .  .  .  Jppt^co^^v, 
which  borders  on  the  brachylogical  use  of  eig, 
i.  e.  the    "constructiopraegnans",    seen   more 
clearly  in  the  following  examples:  I.  647  YI  ye 
[^ir^]  (Aepopyjrai . . .  eg  avyag  r&iov;  cf.  A  789, 
ip  305.— IV.  336  etg  dxrag  nfySvv  Mnev  uhe 
left  a  force  at  the  headland".    Cf.  0  276  e& 


-  145   - 

/Ug  rivyevetog  \  elg  b$6v\  *P  148  pj/l'  iepevaeiv  eg 
Ttyyag-,  y  36  aTtebeiporo^aa  |  eg  (36&pov.  Cf. 
also  Herod.  III.  11,  V.  12,  108,  VIII.  57. 

(e)  Examples  in  which  mere  direction 
toward  a  place  is  signified,  chiefly  after  verbs 
of  looking  or  their  equivalent: — IV.  310  [i^crog] 
eg  alyiahovg  dve%ovaa;  a  similar  example  is 

I.  938  elg  aha  xexfafieviq,  " extending  toward  the 
sea";  also  II.  73 2  slg  aha  8epxo[iev^. —  III.  744 
vavrai    elg    'Ehixyjv    re   xal    dcrrepag     'Uptco^og 
ebpaxov    ex   VYI&V;    cf.  I.   248    e$    a&epa  ^^pag 
aeipov.     I.  725   Jg  rfyiov  aviovra  \  oaae  /?a/lotg. 
III.  951  eg  $e  xefav^ovg  \  r^hoa 

II.  684    avydaaaaSai   Jg    o^uara    xaha 

III.  560   eg   be  neheiag  \  xal  xipxovg   hsvaavrsg. 

IV.  681  slg  re  fyvyv  elg  r'  ofiftara  Ttanraivovreg. 
Cf.   B  271,  A  81,  M  239,  N  7,   0  371;   i  166, 
[i  247,  etc.;  also  h.  Ap.  24. 

b)    The  person  into  whose  presence  motion  takes  place. 

This  use  with  the  noun  in  the  singular 
is  poetic.  Examples  in  prose  are  rare;  cf. 
Thucyd.  I.  128,  4.  II.  37,  3.  III.  3,  6.  IV. 
67,  2;  also  the  example  from  Isaeus  VII.  14 
JJUkiiJ  elg  ry]v  s^v  [iqrepa.  The  examples  in 
Apollonius  are: 

(a)  With  proper  names: — II.  777 
eg  A-iYirriV  roaaov  Tthoov;  III.  1172  eg 
levai.  IV.  762  eg  Al6hov  &§elv.  IV.  773  elg 


—  146  — 

*K<paiGTov   efiyoaro.     I.    1330    sfiefiyxei 
Te/la/ucov    gg    'Itfaova.      I.   12    I^ero    4 

I.  1296  ^  'AyvMqv   TiQw  Sope.     II.  277  or' 
sg  QLVYIOL  .  .  .  606e^.     For  Homeric  examples  see 
H  312.   0  272,   I  480,  0  402,   U  574?    X  499; 
y  317,  £  175,  £  127,  etc. 

(/?)    With   pronouns   in   the    singular:  — 

II.  467  et$  E  xopiaoai;  IV.  772  copers*'  re  {iiv  eig 
e  vesaSai.     Cf.   *  203;   #  436.     In   II.  49   «'g 
avroi/    1^'    ofiftara    direction    is    signified;    cf. 
S>  170.     In  a  figurative  sense  I.  250  dJl/to?  53 


(y)  With  plurals:—  III.  1147  «g 
xal  vfja  .  .  .  copro  vesa^ai.  This  example  is 
noteworthy  because  person  and  thing  are 
governed  by  the  same  preposition;  cf.  /I  331 
snl  vfja  3o>7^  s^ovr'  s$  evaipovg.  —  IV.  1479  f$ 
^  £crdpoi;g  avi&v;  cf.  A  141,  X  492,  etc.  Of 
direction  III.  503  Jg  dMfaovs  opoovro;  cf.  H  484. 
2.  IN  A  TEMPORAL  SENSE. 

I.  603  oaaov  Jg  ev8t6v  xev  evOfotos  6hxa$ 
dvvaaai  uas  far  as  a  vessel  can  sail  up  to 
midday".  I.  690  s7tsp%6[A6vov  nov 
Irog  ain  the  following  year".  I.  861 
8*  eig  >7/uap  del  t%  rjfiatos  yer  \  vavrt^iyig  "from 
day  to  day  the  voyage  was  put  off".  Similarly 
IV.  1772  eig  erog  e%  Ir^og  "from  year  to  year"; 
cf.  Theocr.  18,  15.  —  I.  1151  Jg  ^c5  .  .  .  vrjaov 


—  147  — 

"  toward   dawn   they  left  the  island"; 
similarly  IV.  1620,  1688.—  III.  1389  fiifivei  eg 
upaiyv.  Cf.  A  601,  T703;  t!35,  a  375,  £384,  etc. 
3.    IN  A  flETAPHORIC  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

a)  Purpose: 

II.  64  napyyopeovreg  eg  dhxYiv  "exhorting 
him  to  fortitude".  II.  1051  ovx  ehnoftaL  lovg  \ 
rooaov  enapxeaaeiv  eig  exfiaaiv.  III.  1176  nope 
$6  a<pw  .  .  |  .  .  Aitfryig  %ahe7tovg  eg  aeShov  o^ovrag. 
IV.  1459  fypevoi  eg  robe  epyov.  Cf.  A  226, 
E  737;  r  429,  etc. 

b)  A  limit  or  measure: 

I.  1193  Tocrcr>7  .  .  .  (ifjxog  re  xal  eg  rtd%og 
far  i&eaScu.  II.  221  yfjpag  .  .  .  eg  tehog  e/lxco; 
II.  314  Atog  voov  .  .  .  %$siuv  .  .  .  eg  rehog.  III. 
1381  ovra  .  .  |  .  .  noheag  {iev  er  eg  VYJ&VV  hayovag 
re  |  nftiGeag  dve%ovtag.  Cf.  II  640,  2  353, 
X  397,  etc.;  also  h.  Merc.  462,  h.  VII.  29. 
Without  Homeric  parallel  is  eg  with  the 
numeral  in  II.  976  rsrpdbog  elg  exatov  SevoLto 
xev  "it  would  lack  but  four  to  one  hundred". 


—  nep   r     ftfy   re  — 

This  combination  of  Ttepi  and  dfi<pi  occurs 
once  in  Apollonius  and  once  in  Homer  in  case- 
construction;  viz:  III.  633  nepi  r'  dp<pi  re 
roi%ovg  \  Tidnryivev,  cf.  P  760  7to/l/la  8e  rev%ea 
neaov  nepi  r9  d[*<pi  re  rd<ppov. 


II.    PREPOSITIONS  WITH  TWO  CASES. 

(GENITIVE)  AND  ACCUSATIVE;.) 


The  preposition  did  means  "through",  first  in  a 
local  then  in  a  causal  sense.  In  composition  with 
verbs  it  has  frequently  the  meaning  "apart",  "in 
twain  ".  Its  numerical  relation  with  the  cases  as  well 
as  its  different  usages  vary  much  in  poetry 
(especially  epic)  and  in  prose.  In  Homer  the 
relation  of  the  cases  is:  4  gen.,  3  ace.;  in  the  Orators: 
i  gen.,  3  66  ace.  Apollonius  agrees  with  Homer, 
having  36  examples  of  the  genitive  and  29  of  the 
accusative.  While  in  Homer,  as  also  in  Apollonius, 
this  preposition  is  confined  almost  exclusively  to  the 
local  use,  in  prose  and  in  comedy  the  metaphoric 
uses  to  denote  cause,  origin,  author,  quality,  means, 
manner  and  the  like  preponderate.  Cf.  Lutz,  pp.  63- 
69;  Sobolewski,  pp.  109-121;  Krebs,  pp  65-69. 

A.     WITH  THE  GENITIVK. 
ONLY  IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE. 

(a)  Of  linear  motion  "through"  a  place 
and  beyond  it,  bid  being  equivalent  to  Siex  and 
StaTtpo;  cf.  Kuehner-Gerth,  Sec.  434.  In  some 
of  the  examples  motion  is  implied:  —  I.  237 
laav  pera  vfja  &i  dcrreog;  also  III.  871,  884.  — 
II.  686  (3?j  p  Iftsvai  novrovbe  <V  ^epog;  similarly 
I.  777;  II.  935,  1036;  III.  141,  275,  1357,  1378; 


-  149  - 

IV.  966,  1169,  1285.—  IV.  123    &' 
iepov  ahao$  txovro.     II.  779  ore 

J   IV.  1567 
IV.  1662  & 

lovaav.    II.  187  &d  vefysov  .  .  .  (ucrcroixrou.    IV. 

913    ?'>?£    $e    noipvsoLO    5t3  o^uarog.     I,  789 


II.  329  ^t3  avt&v  |  TteTfduv  novrovbe  GQYI  ntepv- 
ysaai  ft'iyrai;  also  II.  565.  —  IV.  1543  &d  pco^^uolo 
$7;>7Tou.     IV.  632   gTtrd   5td  aro^dror  IKL  poor. 
IV.  847  aevar  ...M  vSatog.    I.  377  &'  avrdtov 
[^cOciyyoi/]  <|>opeo6To.     Of.  B  458,  E  752,  I  478, 
H  288,  T  49,  X  309;  o  183,  293,  etc. 

(/?)   Of  diffusive  motion,  remaining  within 
a  space  but  spreading  all  through  it:  —  III.  211 

novhvv  s^yxe  <V  dareog.      I.  1137 
i  r^pog.    IV.  1458  5t'  ^Tt^poto 
also  IV.  1472.—  III.  761    o&Si^   cr^owra 
^poog.     Cf.  ^  118  etc.;    also   h.  Merc.  231,  h. 
Cer.  67,  130. 

In  IV.  199  5td  VY]6$  d[K>i(3a£i$  dvepog  dvyp 
e^ofisvog  the  sense  of  5td  fades  into  that  of  h. 
Cf.  i  400.  Similarly  in  the  quasi-local 
examples  III.  1312  & 
and  IV.  872  anaipovra 

A  figurative  local  use  is  to  be  found  in 

III.  792  ^e  &d  crTo^arog  ^opeovcrat.    The  closest 
Homeric   parallel   H  91  is    not   so   bold   and 


-  150- 

shows  the  accusative  instead  of  the  genitive. 
Cf.  Xen.  Cyr.  1,  4.25. 

The  uses  of  bid  with  the  genitive  denote 
the  time  or  the  instrument  are  post-Homeric 
constructions,  and  are  for  that  reason  not 
found  in  Apollonius. 

B.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
i.     IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE. 

This  use  is  poetic  and  mainly  Homeric. 
No  distinction  between  the  accusative  and  the 
genitive  can  be  drawn  except  that  bid  in  the 
sense  of  " between"  (I.  2,  etc.)  is  confined  to 
the  accusative: — I.  2  bid  TteTpag  \  Kvaveag  .  .  . 
Jttoaav  'Ap^co;  similarly  II.  214,  422;  IV.  784, 
1000.  Cf.  *P  846.— I.  922  bid  (levSea  novTov\ 
IV.  644  $i  e&vea  (ivpia  KS/ITCOJ'  |  xai 
7t£poG)vreg.  IV.  272  bid  Ttaoav  ofavaou  \ 
Giqv  re.  IV.  290  (3aSvv  8id  xohnov 
IV.  374  tyaaydvo)  avrixa  v6v$s  (tecrov 
8id  haLfiov  dfirjaai.  III.  1052  arvfyeliyjv  bid 
VSLOV  dpocrcr^.  IV.  1763  bid  [ivpiov  olb^ta 
Aiyiwjs  dxryaiv  en£a%e&ov.  I.  9 
XLUV  bid.  IV.  306  Kahov  8e  bid  aro^a 
similarly  IV.  647.  Cf.  H  91,  P  283, 
*  122,  etc. 

As  an  example  of  diffusive  motion  can  be 
cited  only  III.  709   opro  5'   IUYI  \  fanraheri  bid 
';  cf.  A  600;  f  50. 


2.     IN  THE  TEMPORAL  SENSE. 

In  Homer  this  use  is  confined  to  the 
Odyssey  and  chiefly  to  0,  K  and  fl  of  the 
Iliad;  cf.  Vogrinz,  p.  215.  The  examples  in 
Apollonius  are  —  &a  xvefyaq  I.  518,  651,  1255; 
II.  155,  729,  1287;  III.  1361;  IV.  70,  1069. 
Sid  vvxra  II.  42;  IV.  868.  Cf.  B  57,  K  41, 
142,  etc. 

3.     IN  THE  CAUSAL  SENSE  "OWING  TO". 

I.  423  GYIV  bid  p7ftiv\  also  II.  75.  Cf.  A 
73,  K  497;  S  520,  etc;  also  h.  Cer.  414. 


In  the  use  of  this  preposition  Apollonius  differs 
considerably  from  Homer.  He  has  it  21  times  in 
case-construction,  whereas  Homer  has  it  only  12 
times  (all  in  the  Odyssey,  except  O  124).  Homer 
uses  it  only  with  the  genitive;  Apollonius  has  it  n 
times  with  the  genitive  and  10  times  with  the 
accusative.  It  occurs  only  in  the  local  sense. 

A.  WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 
II.  746  $16%  dxpris  dvepsvysrat  ;  also  II. 
752,—  I.  1157  81%  frM$  dfaaowrav;  cf.  I.  1328; 
II.  351,  806.—  II.  644  &<£  'AiSao  8ep&pw\ 
Gre^oifiYjv.  III.  158  fifi  §£  &LZX  [isydpoio.  III. 
887  8iex  Ttebitov  shdovaa;  similarly  III.  915.  — 
IV.  161  nohvnpe(uvoio  8te%  v^g  rerdvvaro. 
Homer  has  only  the  two  phrases  hex 
x  388,  p  61,  cr  185,  r  47,  etc;  and  $iex 
0  124;  a  101,  etc. 


—  152  — 

B.  WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
1.  1014  &e£  caog  ol^ia  v£ov*o;  also  IV.  457, 
657.  —  II.  622  vija  hex  n&ayo$  aevev.  II.  560 
Iv  eTtsira  hex  Tterpag  shdastav;  similarly  11.618; 
IV.  304,  858,  961;  cf.  8ia  TteTpag  s.  Sid.  III.  73 
(i  draetpag  .  .  .  &fiOLOi  hex  TtpoaJleg  tyepev 


The  radical  sense  of  xar'd  is  "down".  Collateral 
with  this  is  the  meaning  of  extension  '  '  through  '  '  . 
These  two  local  uses  are  practically  the  only  ones  in 
epic  poetry,  the  metaphoric  use  to  denote  conformity 
excepted.  While  the  meaning  "down"  predom- 
inates in  the  use  with  the  genitive,  (l  through"  is 
expressed  chiefly  by  the  accusative.  In  Attic  prose 
these  local  usages  disappeared  almost  entirely  and  in 
their  place  developed  a  number  of  metaphoric  uses  to 
denote  time,  cause,  occasion  and  the  like.  Cf.  Lutz, 
pp.  69-81.  Apollonius  avoided  all  these  later  prose- 
constructions. 

In  point  of  the  frequency  of  xard  with  its  respective 
cases,  the  accusative  ranks  first  in  all  departments  of 
the  literature.  The  proportion  in  Apollonius  is  as 
i  to  3,  which  is  also  that  for  the  Orators.  In  Homer 
it  is  as  i  to  8,  and  in  the  later  historians  it  varies  as 
much  as  i  to  25.  Cf.  Westphal  for  Xenophon  and 
Krebs  for  Polybius. 

A.     WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 
The    only     use    with     the     genitive    in 
Apollonius  as  in  Homer  is  the  local  use.     The 


-  153- 

examples  in  Apollonius  express  (a)  motion 
"down  from",  (/3)  motion  "down  upon"  and 
(y)  position  "down  beneath"  or  "in".  This 
last  use  is  not  Homeric. 

(a)  To  denote  the  origin  or  starting  point 
from  which  the  motion  proceeds.  The  genitive 
is  ablatival  and  the  line  of  motion  usually 
vertical: — II.  286  xara  5'  ou^epog  ahro:  similarly 
II.  429;  III.  1264;  IV.  510,  840,  1704.— IV.  34 
o)^  <5e  year'  d^poa  bdxpva  %evsv.  IV.  911 
xara  %vyov  Iv^ope  Ttovrte.  I  565  m<5 
&  avrov  [krroi;]  /U'ra  %svav.  I.  1261  xara 
xpordtpuv  a/Ug  i<5pcog  XYIXISV.  III.  70  xar'  avr&r 
[opao^]  ^^appot . . .  <|)opeovro;  IV.  444  ^U/3aT(uo 
xar*  oiSp^og  tfyaye  ^>7pa.  IV.  1600  YJXS  xara 
similarly  IV.  1594  afydZe  xara 
Here  belongs  IV.  638  *Hpyj  axoTt&oio 
'Epxvviov  id%yiasv,  where  motion  of  the 
sound  is  implied.  For  Homer  compare:  Z  128, 
A  196,  811,  N  539,  0  74, 169,  T  52;  £  399,  etc. 
(/3)  To  denote  the  "terminus"  to  which 
the  motion  tends:  —  IV.  654  xarj 
xe%vvrai.  III.  1021  xar*  ov8eo$ 
(the  direction  of  sight  is  practically  a  motion 
of  the  eye).  IV.  158  <pdp[iax  pairs  xar' 
IV.  1523  noT^yi  xar  cxpSahp&v 
cf.  E  696=H  344;  also  T  217; 
123,  T  321,  421,  *  100,  etc.  More  difficult 


~  154- 

to  classify  and  without  Homeric  parallel  is 
IV.  315  v^ov  VYjGoio  xar'  dxpordryg  sveovro. 
Cf.  Haggett,  p.  33. 

(y)  To  denote  position  "down  beneath"  or 
"in"; — I.  155  Avyxsvg  .  .  .  exexaaro  \  o^aGiv, 
si  sreov  ye  n&ei  xhsog,  dvepa  xelvov  fai^i^s  xal 
xard  #3w6g  avyd^aSai.  IV.  1326  xard 
.  .  .  Qepovaa;  also  IV.  1352,  1371. 
Though  post-Homeric,  this  use  is  still  poetic; 
cf.  Krueger  Sec.  68,  24  A.  1. 

B.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
i.     IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE. 

As  xavd  with  the  genitive  denotes  the 
starting  or  finishing  point  in  a  line  of  motion, 
so  the  accusative  usually  describes  the  whole 
of  that  line's  motion.  The  line  need  not  be 
vertical,  and  so  xard  comes  to  be  used  like 
dvd  or  Sid. 

a)   Of  motion  to  signify. 

(a)  "Over"  or  « through",  like  Sid:— Two 
very  good  examples  to  show  that  xard  is 
almost  synonymous  with  Sid  are:  I.  2 
xard  crofta  xai  bid  Tterpag  .  .  .  ^Jlaaav  ' 
also  IV.  1000.— III.  1241  elm  .  .  .  xar' 
III.  873  rpo^G)^  evpzlav  xar  dpaZirov;  similarly 
III.  1237.— III.  1335  p&Mev  df^o^v^v  aiel 
xaTa  fitihov  o&ovtag.  I.  575  xaur*  l%via 


-  155- 

rfjpog  .  .  .  tfyeuovrai  III.  411  rovg  &C£G)  .  .  . 
Grv<p6%,Y]v  xard  veiov  "Apyjog.  IV.  363  xard 
novrov  .  .  .  (popevpar,  IV.  1319  n?ia%6{Asvoi  xard 
novrov. — III.  113  (3ij  <5'  Ipev  OvhvfinoLo  xara 
nrv%ag.  IV.  473  alfia  xar*  fattdJiv  i)7toiG%ero. 
Cf.  A  483,  A  276,  278,  K  136,  A  68,  II  349, 
2  321,  T  25,  X  146,  4>  559,  *  330;  (3  406,  429, 
g  473,  7i  150,  a  97,  etc. 

(/3)  "Upon",  of  inflicting  wounds.  This 
use  is  frequent  in  Homer;  but  Apollonius  has 
only  two  instances,  having  had  little  occasion 
for  it  in  a  descriptive  poem: — I.  429  xara 
av%eva  xo^a$.  II.  Ill  ovra  .  .  .  xara 
ToaocoZo.  Cf.  E  66,  73,  579,  Z  64, 
H  447,  n  343;  *  406,  etc. 

(y)   "Under":— IV.  964  xara  0&&os  .  .  • 

&vvov.    Cf.  Z  136,  etc.    Other  more  noteworthy 

examples  are:    II.  1037  nva^dfievog  nrepvya$ 

xara   vya;    cf.    x  122.— III.    809    &%'    bhoov 

arvyepolo  xara  <ppeva$  fa&  'At^ao;  cf.  T  125. — 

IV.  145  xar3  o^ara  veioero;    cf.  h.  Ven.  156. 

£)  Of  extent  "over'\  or  of  place  "within"  "among" 

"on"  or  "at". 

IV.  1769  xar3  dy&va  .  .  .  §Yiyi6uvro.  III. 
1353  xard  naaav  dvaGra%v6Gxov  dpovpav. 
I.  621  xard  Sfjfiov  dvaaaev,  III.  639 
eov  xard  SfjfjLov  .  .  .  xovpyv.  IV.  968 
xard  bpia  TtoipaiveGxev.  I.  974  xard 


-156- 

axoin$;  II.  499  xard  $&[iar'  .  .  . 
£vvd£ovro.      III.    168    mS^    ?/log 
IV.  1216    $8%ovrai .  .  .  m&3  ispo 
IV.  414   mrd  (itihov  a^e^eo  Sovpara 
III.  753  <p$ia&ai .  .  .  mrd  raw  *Ap>70$;  also  III. 
777.— 111.  176  xard  vfja  .  .  .  ^veS.     II.  773 
dfiofyaav  .  .  .  xard  VYJGOV,  similarly  III.  324. — 

I.  247  &g  fydaav . .  .  xard  nrohiv',  also  IV.  1066. 
— II.   995    dhasog    s A/^xfiovioLO    xard    7trv%a$ 

pi.    684     evsp^s     xard     oryj$o$ 
I.    1253    ^v/i^^ro   xard 
',  similarly  III.  534,  926,  1217. 
—  IV.  1645    avpiyZ   ai[Aar6£Goa  xard  afyvpov. 

II.  824  xard  nharv  fioaxero  rl<po$.     III.  1053 
xard   ohxag   dvaara%v(*)Gi  Tiyavres;    similarly 

III.  1332.     Of.  A  487,  B  99,  130,  211,  E  332, 
Z  391,  0  54,  A  77,  M  318,  N  707,  0  682,  II  96, 
T  231,  X  146;  a  247,  375,  (3  140,  383,  etc. 

2.     IN  A  flETAPHORIC  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

# )  Fitness  or  conformity. 
I.  8  xard  (3d£iv.     I.  371-372  Gxdnrov  ft 
al^a  xar^   svpog    oaov    Ttepifidhfa 
xard    Ttpopa^.       I.    299    (tolpav    xard 
dvid^ovad  nep  8[i7tr]$  T^St  fyspeiv.     I.  382  xard 
xaip6v.     II.  756    xard   xMo$.     I.  333=1.  839, 
1210;  III.  1040;  IV.  360  xard  xoGpov.    II.  1162 
xard  /iolpav.    III.  552  xar3  oiavov.    I  660  xard 

fo;  III.  189=IV.  530,  887  xard  ^peo$.     Cf. 


—  157  — 

A  136,  286,  B  214,  E  759,  0  146,  K  169,  A  48, 
M  85,  P  205,  fl  622;  $  489,  etc. 
&)  Distribution. 

I.  358  n6rtdha%§6   xard    x^l8ag    eper^d. 
II.   999    xexpcftevai    mrd   <pv%a.       Cf.   B  362, 
I  521,  etc. 

—  napex  — 

This  double  preposition,  formed  from  napd 
and  Jx,  governs  either  the  accusative  or  the 
genitive,  according  as  the  stress  falls  on  the 
first  or  second  element. 

A.     WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 
i.    LOCAL. 

II.  975    j^e&pa  .   .   .  7tape£    e&ev 
/?d;Uctt>;  cf.  K  349.— IV.  550  rfatie  7tape£  a 
cf.  i  116. 

2.    HETAPHORIC,  "  CONTRARY  TO". 

II.   344    IIYI   T^r5    oitivolo    reaps!;    en, 
rtepfjaou;  cf.  III.  552=111.  742  7tape£  ov  Ttarpog. 

B.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
i.    LOCAL,  "ALONGSIDE  OF". 

II.  1012  oAovto  7tape%  Tt/3ap>7^^a  yalav, 
cf.  I  7;  fi  276,  443.  Quasi-local  is  also  II.  1115 
rtape%  ohiyov  Savdroio. 

2.    HETAPHORIC,  "CONTRARY  TO". 

I.  130;  323;  IV.  102  napex  voov;  cf.  K  391, 
T  133.— I.  1315    Ttapsx  .  .  .  Aidg  .  .  .  /Soi^; 
cf.  h.  Yen.  36.— II.  341    ^   rMfre   na?e%  J^d 
^  cf.  h.  Merc.  547. 


—  158- 


Form;  —Ynip  and  bneip  (poetic)  are  etymologically 
the  same  as  Sanskrit  updri  and  Latin  s~uper.  The 
form  bxetp  occurs  five  times  in  Apollonius,  as  also  in 
Homer;  and  only  in  the  phrase  bxe}p  alat  where  the 
long  syllable  is  necessary  for  the  meter. 

Meaning:  —  The  fundamental  meaning  of  6^  is 
"over",  "  above".  With  the  genitive  it  denotes 
chiefly  position  "over"  or,  in  a  geographical  sense, 
"beyond",  where  the  prospective  might  justify  one 
to  say  "above";  and  sometimes  motion  "over"  or 
'  'across"  a  space  or  an  object.  This  last  use  is 
more  common  with  the  accusative.  In  Apollonius 
uxip  signifies  a  few  times  motion  "along  side  of", 
which  is  not  a  Homeric  usage.  While  these  local 
meanings  prevail  in  epic  poetry,  in  the  later  language 
the  metaphoric  usages  to  denote  "in  defence  of",  "in 
behalf  of"  come  into  greater  prominence.  Cf. 
Kiihner-Gerth,  Sec.  435;  Sobolewski,  pp.  134-136; 
Lutz,  pp.  89-97;  Krebs,  pp.  40-43  Likewise,  the 
accusative  diminishes  very  much  in  the  later 
language,  as  the  following  figures  show:  Aristophanes 
—  gen.  24,  ace.  2  of  which  one  passage  is  disputed; 
the  Orators  —  gen.  1270,  ace.  21;  Polybius  —  gen.  533, 
ace.  39;  Xenophon  —  gen,  130.  ace.  13.  Cf.  Sobolew- 
ski, L,utz,  Krebs  and  Westphal  respectively.  Apollo- 
nius agrees  with  Homer  in  the  numerical  relation  of 
&K&P  with  its  cases.  Homer  has:  gen.  49,  ace.  331; 
Apollonius:  gen.  29,  ace.  15. 


—  159  — 

A.     WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 
i.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

(a)  Position  " above"  or  "over":— I.  776 
vrtep  dvre^ovra.  II.  171  vnep 
II.  580  vnep  xe<pahfi$  ydp  df 
cfteSpog;  similarly  IV.  1348  earav  vnep 
II.  1087  xovafiov  reyeuv  vnsp  daat- 
IV.  139  &g  fr  ore  rv<po[j.£vy]<;  v^g  vnep 
xanvolo  GrpotydhLyysg  dneipLroi 
elhiaaovrai.  IV.  1269  yaiqg  vnep  OGGOV  e%ovGa. 
Of.  B  20,  59,  N  200,  2  226,  *  68;  8  803,  £  68, 
etc.  Here  belong  three  examples  in  which 
vnep  means  practically  "on":  II.  94  xo^e  .  .  . 
vrtsp  ovarcx;.  II.  103  37/lacr'  ert£GGV[isvov 
vnep.  II.  108  rov  ft  &GGOV  lovroq  \ 
Gxaiyjs  vnep  6<ppvo$  YI^OLGS  %8ipi.  Cf.  A  528, 
N  616,  0  483. 

(/?)  Position  "beyond": — I.  940  xdvrai 
8*  vTtep  65aTo$  AiGynoio.  II.  362  T)7g  [d^p>/g] 
xal  vnep  .  .  .  nepLG%i%ovrai  d&hai.  II.  398  &v 
vTtep  [Bf^pcoi^]  .  .  .  Ko/l^ot  s%ovrai  (dwell);  cf. 
Herod.  VII.  69.  — IV.  286  Ttyyai  /dp 
^opeao  . . .  fiopfivpovGLV.  IV.  1576  ne 
g  V7t8p.  IV.  1624  dyx&vog  vnep 
ovrog  iSovvo.  Cf.  *  73;  v  257. 

(y]  Motion  "over"  or  "across":— I.  1084 
vTtep      %av$olo      xaprjatos      AiGovi8ao 
dhxvovi$.  II.  585  vy6$  vrtep  Ttdcr^g 


i6o-- 


III.  1362  2id[ATtov  dva?i$'/]Gxovre$  vnep 

IV.  1424  {'Tiep  j/a£>7g    opSoora&ov  r^ovro.     In 
II.  271   and  III.  1112  vnep  novroio  is  used  in 
the  sense  of  iWp  o&a  p  575;  H  320.    Of.  further 
0  382,  etc.     Significant   is   IV.  1691  pfaoiev 
vrtep  2afy/Gm'5og  a*p>7g,  i.  e.  "  alongside  of";  cf. 
£  300.     This  seems  to  have  been  the  start  for 
the  un-Homeric  vnep  c.  ace.  to  denote  motion 
"  alongside  of". 

2.    IN  THE  METAPHORIC  SENSE. 
(a)   "In   behalf  of":—  II.  636  ifa 
akeyw  vrtep.     IV.  380  bewtiv  vnsp  .  .  .  o 
IV.  406  K6/l^otg  ^pa  (pepotsv  vrtEp  deo.  Gf.  A  444, 
Z  524. 

(/?)    aAbout"?   "concerning":  —  IV.    531 
ipriv    7tEva6[i£VO$    fAerexia&e 
vavrMyg.     IV.   1175    ov    voov 
vTizp.     This   usage   seems   to  be   post- 
Homeric. 

(y)  In  entreaties^  like  Ttpdg  c.  gen.:  —  III. 
701  hiaaofi  vrtep  fiaxdpwv  ceo  r*  avr?j$  r$e 
roxfav.  Cf.  0  660?  665,  X  338?  II  466;  o  261. 

B.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
i.     IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

(a)  Motion  "over"  and  "beyond":  —  1.236 
vTtsip  a/la  vavrihhea&ai  ;  similarly  I.  918;  II. 
1140;  III.  1071;  IV.  299.—  III.  198  vnep  Sovaxdg 
re  xal  t$a>  |  8Gov&  s%a7t£{3qGav.  III.  219 


ovSov  . .  .  e(3av.  III.  1191  r$Uos  ...Mt 
.  .  .  vedrag  vnep  axpiag  M^ioTt/iav .  IV.  1692 
Kp>7Touoi>  vnsp  fzeya  halrfia  Seovrag.  Cf.  E  16 
<P  227,  fl  13;  y  73,  5  172,  >?  135,  i  254,  260, 
v  63,  etc. 

(/?)      Motion     " alongside    of":  — I.   568 
{;7tep    hohixj/iv  &eov  OLK^YIV.     I.  599 
;7t^p  OLK^YIV  \  tfvvaav.     This  use  is 
post-Homeric. 

(y)  Position  " above": — II.  378  revyrairiv 
vnep  axpyjv  [vaierdovoi].  Also  this  use  is  post- 
Homeric.  Cf.  Xen.  Ana.  I.  1,  9. 

2.     IN  THE  METAPHORIC  SENSE  "CONTRARY  TO". 

I.  1030=IV.  20  vnep  fi6pov  and  IV.  1252 
vnep  Aiog  alcav.  Cf.  T  59,  Z  333,  487,  II  780, 
T30,  336,  <I>  517;  a  34,  35,  e  436,  etc. 

III.    PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THREE 
CASES. 


As  its  counection  with  d/i.<pa>y  L,atin  ambo,  shows, 
&wi  denotes  primarily  in  a  local  sense  a  surrounding 
from  both  sides.  This  limitation,  however,  disappears 
in  most  cases,  and  d^i  comes  to  have  the  same 
meaning  as  nep(t  i.  e.  "around  about",  "on  all 
sides".  Of  the  two  prepositions  dp??  is  the  more 
poetic  and  the  rarer.  It  is  not  found  in  the  Orators 
(L,utz,  p.  63,  Note),  nor  in  Polybius  (Krebs,  p.  98), 


-    162  — 

nor  in  Aristotle  (Hagfors,  p.  70).  In  Plato  it  is  rare. 
In  Thucydides  it  occurs  only  twice  (Debbert,  p.  29). 
Aristophanes  has  five  examples,  one  c.  dat,  and  four 
c.  ace.  (Sobolewski,  p.  229).  Xenophon,  differing 
here  again  from  the  other  Attic  prose- writers,  has  it 
147  times,  twice  c.  gen.  and  145  times  c.  ace. 
(Westphal,  p.  3). 

Herodotus  and  the  Tragedians  approached  more 
closely  to  the  epic  usage,  and  they  construe  r^pi  with 
three  cases.  Cf.  Lundberg,  pp.  24-25;  Lalin,  pp. 
1 8-2 1 ;  Schumacher,  pp.  6-16. 

Apollonius  agrees  with  Homer  in  general  usage; 
but  differs  from  him  in  the  numerical  relation  with 
cases,  as  the  following  figures  show: 

Apollonius:  gen.  n,  dat.  32,  ace.  26. 
Homer:     "       2,     "     88,    "   135. 

The  increase  with  the  dative  is  not  surprising, 
because  this  is  the  most  poetic  of  the  three  con- 
structions. The  increase  with  the  genitive  is  due  to 
the  tendency  to  replace  the  prosaic  xspt  by  a 
poetic  dwt. 

A,     WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 

ONLY  IN  THE  METAPHORIC  SENSE  "ON  ACCOUNT 
OF",  "FOR",  "ABOUT": 

I.  120  T%    &    dfupi  .  .  .  8[i6yr]ae.     I.  1150 
Seaav.     I.   1214    /5oog 
;  similarly  II.  89  r^vre 
/?oog  .  .  .  (^ptdaaSw. — I.  1343 
epev  .  .  .  fypiGaaSai.     II.  637  dfupi  be  rolo\ 
KOI  rov  6^co$?  xal  aelo,  xal  d/Moi'  &ei$i  etaiftiv. 
II.  971  'InTtohvry  ^'uxiT^pa  . .  .  eyyvdfaZev  \  d/j,<pi 


—  i63  — 

III.  1100  d^i 

IV.  491  dfAtf)'  avrolo  (t&ovTo.  IV. 
1469  ov  e&ev  d^fi  zrdpoio  fiera^yjaai  rd 
exaara.  The  two  examples  in  Homer  are 
n  825  and  3  267;  cf.  also  Aesch.  Ag.  62,  1083, 
1141;  Sept.  1012. 

Noteworthy  is  the  example  in  an  entreaty, 
where  d(t<pi  is  synonymous  with  evexa,  vuep  or 
Tipog:  —  II.  216  <&oi(3ov  r'  a^l  xcd  avrrjg  elvexev 
f/Hp>7g  ^ioaofiaL  Homer  has  no  parallel;  but 
compare  Eurip.  Supp.  280. 

B.     WITH  THE  DATIVE. 

i.  IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE  POSITION 

"AROUND",  '•AT",  "NEAR",  "AHONQ", 

"ON"  OR  "IN": 


(<z)0f  a  place  or  object:  —  I.  618  avv 
eppoucray  dxoira$  \  d(t<p'  evvy  (i.  e.  in  bed). 
I.  1033  aiupi  Ss  Sovpi  oareov  sppaia^.  II.  Y03 
d^l  &s  SaLOftevois  [^^ptot$]  evpvv  %opov  s 
oavro.  II.  733  d[*<j)i  $e  TTJCT^  [Tterpatg]  xv^ia  . 
.  III.  137  a[A<f)i  &  exdaro)  [XVX^G) 
.  .  .  eitiaaovrai.  Cf.  2  344,  X  443,  *  40; 
$  434,  etc.  —  Quasi-local  are  also  III.  117  d[i<p' 
datpaydhotGi  .  .  .  s&fovro  "they  amused  them- 
selves around  the  dice",  i.  e.  they  played  dice. 
The  simple  dative  occurs  in  <p  430;  in  *  88  the 
preposition  is  causal.  Apollonius  has  also 
c.  ace.  with  ^do^ou  in  II.  813,  and  napd 


—  164  — 

c.  dat.  in  I.  458. — III.  623  olero  &  du<pi 

OLVTYI  d&favovaa;   similarly  IV.  364. — IV.  731 

ojot  T'  a[i(pi  3ootg  sftoyyiaav  dsSvloig. 

(/3)  Of  parts  of  the  body:— 1. 221=11.  680 
du$i  Se  vuroLS.  I.  721=111.  1281  a/.ifi  &Luoiai. 
L  1172  d^l  &E  Ttoaaiv.  Cf.  B  45,  r  328,  A 
527,  N  36;  /I  586,  £  23. 

(/)  Of  persons: — L  1306  d^^aaro  yalav 
d[i<j)*  arroZg  [i.  e.  vidai  Bopeao].  I.  1327  dftfyt  $e 
ol  [Fhavxc*)]  .  .  .  atype&v  i^op.  IV.  136  d{i<pi  $e 
Ttaioiv  |  VTjnid^oig  .  .  .  pot^co  na^o^e 

(xcr^a/l6(o(Tat   [/le^ot^g].     IV.  957 
lpab-.     IV.  1061  T^  S' 
opfyavd    fexva 

g.    Cf.  M  396,  N 181;  y  429,  p 38,  $223,  etc. 

2.     IN  A  HETAPHORIC  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

(a)  The  cause  "on  account  of",  "for": — 
II.  838  d[i<pi  be  XYibeiYi  rexvog  fievov  dG%ah6wT6g 
"they  remained  sorrowful  on  account  of  the 
burial  of  the  dead".  III.  318  v7to^eiaa$  du$i 
<7To/l6j  Aioovibao.  III.  459  rdpfisi  &  du<p' 
ai>T<5.  IV.  575  (3ovld$  d^'  aiVotg.  IV.  1029 
dfirpi  T  d&hoig  .  .  .  drvfritat.  Cf.  F  157,  I  547, 
a  108;  5  153,  ^  546,  etc.  Here  belong  two 
examples  of  the  inner  cause:  II.  96  6  fr  d[i<p* 
obvvy  yw£  Yipinev;  cf.  h.  Merc.  172.— IV.  1065 
o%eii(i$  .  .  .  Ttsrtap/Asvov  d(t<p'  O^VVYIGIV,  cf.  1P  88. 
The  simple  dative  occurs  in  E  399. 


—  i65  — 

(/3)  The  object  of  contention  "for": — 
I.  747  dftfyi  $e  fiovaiv  Tyjfafioat  (idpravro.  III. 
1385  d^)'  ovpoiGiv  eysipopevov  Tto^e^OLO.  Of. 
T  70,  M  421,  H  447,  0  587. 

(y)  With  verbs  of  hearing  and  the  like: 
"about",  "concerning":  — III.  678  e$dw  ex 
Tiarpog  Mityv  \  apty'i  r*  eftoi  xal  naiGiv.  IV. 
356  viva  ryv8e  avvaprvvaa^e  ftsvotv^v  \  dfifi 
euoi.  IV.  1331  d[*<pi  Se  voartt  \  ofai  ^d/l3  avnxpv 
vob*  Qfaiv.  Cf.  n  647;  8  151,  etc. 

C.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
ONLY  LOCAL  IN  APOLLON1US  AS  IN  HOMER. 

(a)  Of  a  place  or  object: — I.  1178  du<p* 
' ApyavSuveiov  opog  Ttpo^odg  re  Kioto  [dfyixovro]. 
I.  1184  du<pi  nvp/iiaL  &IVSVSGXOV.  I.  1248  d 
$e  %&$ov  fyoira  xsxfafydg.  II.  376  d[ 
epya  ttEhovrai.  II.  516  d/i<pi  r'  epv(iv 
xai  Ttorapov  Upov  poor  'Ajtibavolo.  II.  767 
Kv^ixov  d[i<pi  Ao^iovi^v  sT&eGGav.  II.  813 
Sarf  d[i<pi  .  .  .  e^LOtevro.  II.  850  a[i<pi  8s 
(pd^ayya  Ttahaiyeveos  XOVLVOLO  \  atiw 

III.  881   dufyi  ahaea  xal  Gxortia$ 
[aypofievai].      IV.   51-52     dhu[.ievy]     ap<pi     re 
vexpovg,    d[t<pi  re  8vana7iea<;  pi^ag  %&ovo$.     IV. 
535  xev^erai  alri    dftfyi  no^iv  dyavyv  'YhhYjifia. 

IV.  550    d{i<pi   re   yalav  \  Avooviyv   vyaovg   re 

^  . .  |  . .  3Apyco>7g  nepi&aia  ay  (tar  a  VYJO$  \ 
efyarai.    IV.  1452  pvlai  \  ap$'  ohiyyv 
yhvxepov   hi(3a  nenryjvlai.     Cf.  B  461, 
533,  A  425,  H  135,  434,  435,  I  530;  Ji  513,  etc. 


—  166  — 


Of  persons:  —  I.  843    dii<pi    be    tovye 
..  .elhiaaovro  xs%apuevai.    I.  883  drs 

II.  452  rov 
III.  1215 


Cf.  T  231,  A  419,  M  414,  II  601;  3,  570,  etc. 
(y)   Of  parts  of  the  body:  —  I.  427 
xdyyi  a[j,<pi  f-ieruTta  \  n%fj%6v;  IV.  44 

isrtdTta  |  GTeihaiisvYi  xai  xahd 
III.  121    yhvxspbv    $£   ol    d^l    Ttapaag 
S&Mev  Ipei&og;  similarly  III.  461;  IV.  1277.— 

III.  761    d{i<pi   r*    dtpcudg  |  lva$  .  .  .  bvvei 

IV.  1347  s%cdG(A£vai  .  .  .  dfttpi  re  v&ra  xai 
similarly  IV.  1609.     Cf.  K  573,  II  580,  2  414; 
£  153,  etc. 

3          f 

—  ava  — 

The  preposition  «va  belongs  chiefly  to  the  depart- 
ment of  poetry.  Attic  prose-writers  avoid  it  almost 
entirely.  To  use  the  words  of  Gildersleeve,  '  '«>«  is  dead 
to  the  prose  of  everyday  life  and  xard  reigns  in  its 
stead.'  *  Lutz  (  p.  4  )  cites  only  three  examples  from 
the  Orators  (  Andoc.  2,  Dem.  i  ),  to  which  Sobolewski 
(  p.  66  )  has  added  another  from  Demosthenes.  Like- 
wise, of  all  prepositions  in  Polybius  «v«  has  the  least 
number  of  occurrences  ;  cf.  Krebs,  pp.  33-34. 
Herodotus  and  Xenophon,  who  approach  nearer  to 
the  poetic  diction,  use  it  somewhat  oftener  ;  cf.  Lund- 
berg,  pp.  16-17  ;  and  Westphal,  p.  3.  "  The  large 
use  of  «>«,"  as  Gildersleeve  remarks  in  the  American 
Journal  of  Philology,  Vol.  XXIII.,  p.  26,  "gives  at 


—  i67  — 

once  an  antique  hue  and  we  may  expect  to  find  it  in 
conscious  poetry. ' '  In  this  regard  we  are  not  disap- 
pointed in  Apolionius,  who  in  proportion  to  the  bulk 
of  his  work  uses  it  more  frequently  than  Honier. 
He  restricts  its  use,  however,  to  the  accusative  (  with 
the  possible  exception  of  II.  701,  where  it  might  be 
construed  with  the  dative,  although  tmesis  is  evi- 
dently intended  ),  and  employs  it  only  in  a  local 
sense.  In  lyric  poetry  and  in  the  lyric  parts  of 
tragedy  «>«  is  used  with  the  dative.  Homer  also  has 
nine  examples  of  this  use,  and  in  three  passages 
(/?  416,  .'  177,  o  284),  he  seems  to  use  it  even  with 
the  genitive,  according  to  Delbriick,  Monro,  Vogrinz 
and  others.  As  this  construction,  however,  does  not 
occur  elsewhere  in  the  literature,  it  seems  preferable 
to  take  avd  with  the  verb  in  those  three  passages. 

Of  the  two  apocopated  forms  in  Apolionius,  «>  (be- 
fore dentals)  occurs  only  in  tmesis  (  eight  times  ), 
but  the  corresponding  form  «/>-  ( before  labials )  is 
used  twelve  times  in  case- const  ruction.  All  these 
forms  are  found  in  Homer.  The  uses  of  «>«  in  Apol- 
ionius may  be  classified  as  follows  : 

ONLY  WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE  AND  ONLY  IN  A 
LOCAL  SENSE: 

0)   Of  motion  up  through  a  place  or  through  a  crowd 
of  people. 

I.  308  elaiv  .  .  .  Afjhov  dv  nyaSfyv,  fie 
KZdpov.  I.  310  dva  nfy&vv  .  .  .  xiev;  II.  590 
dvd  7tdvra$  i&v. — I.  812  atu  Tttohie&pov  .  .  . 
c&ci^i/To;  similarly  I.  653;  III.  823;  IV.  1172, 
1279.— III.  166  av  a&epa  noMov  torn.  III. 
685  dvd  arofta  Svlsv  evianelv.  IV.  1056 


—  1  68  — 


dv*  o^uhov  hiifavStev  evvqrsipa  \ 
eGGi.  IV.  1110  avrixa  5'  <5pro  | 
ex  fa%8G)v  dvd  te^oc.  IV.  1336  heuv  og?  og  pd 
<r3  dv'  V^TIV  \  avvvo^ov  YIV  [isSsTttiv  tipvevai.  Cf. 
Z  505?  K  362,  N  199,  11  349,  2  493,  X  452, 
*  74;  e  456,  x  251,  275,  o  80;  $  234,  etc. 

b)   Of  motion  over  space. 

II.  a^pat,  our3  dva  TtaGav  \  yalav  6^c5$  .  .  . 
rtveiovoiv  II.  697  di^d  VYJGOV  e&iveov.  II.  1086 
s<peqxe  %d/ta?av  \  ex  vefyEuv  dvd  r3  acrTu  ^ai 
otxta.  II.  1091  aiaaovre$  .  .  .  d^  Tte^ayog;  IV. 
1536  TtprfaovTog  d^rsG)  \  &fi  Tte/laj/og.  —  IV.  231 
d^d  yalav  .  .  .  &%ovaw.  IV.  1382  At^w^g  dra 
S^Ivag  eprtftovs  VYJOL  .  .  .  fyspzLV.  Cf.  E  87,  96, 
Z  71;  ^  329,  330,  x  308,  p  143,  333. 

<:)   Of  motion  up  io,  or  simply  to;  t.  e.  of  the  goal. 

I.  528  ciivd  ae^uara  fidvreg.  I.  838  elfii 
ft  {;7iorpo7tog  avn$  avd  nroluv:,  similarly  III. 
573.  —  IV.  115  and  vy6$  sfiyjaav  \  Ttoitfevr*  dvd 

Cf.  x  77. 

d)  Of  motion  up  along,  or  simply  along. 
I.  526=IV.  580  dvd  [teaariv  arelpav  .  .  . 
I.  781  dvd  arifiov  YIIEV  57pcog;  similarly 
IV.  43,  47.—  II.  168  hvjew;9  dvd  Boanopov 
i^vvovro.  II.  825  Ihvoevtog  dvd  3>pcocr^o{>g 
norafiolo  veiaer  'A^avnd^g.  Cf.  E  87,  K  339; 
X  176,  4,  136,  etc. 


—  169  — 
t 

e)   Of  motion  up,  upon. 

II.  1367  rov  p3  dvd  #apa  Aa/3(5i/;  cf.  K  466; 
y  492,  etc.  The  reverse  of  this  is  rest  "on": 
III.  44  >7(Tro  $6//6)  Sn'onToi'  dm  Spovov,  cf.  2  278. 
Homer  uses  dvd  c.  dat.  in  E  352,  0  153,  etc. 

/)    With  verbs  denoting  extent  over  or  in  a  place. 

In  this  category  dvd  is  nearly  synonymous 
with  ei/,  as  in  I.  166,  825,  1130.—  I.  127 


ata    #£ya    Tkfog.      I.    166 

/;  similarly  I.  825;  II.  9982;  III. 
748;  IV.  1177.—  I.  1061  snei^aavro  r  d&Zuv 
dfi  nsbiov  fai[i&viov;  also  II.  516;  IV.  974.  — 
I.  1130  dvd  aneog  .  .  .  e^da^aev.  I.  1292 
xv8o$  dv'  eE/l/ldcSa  ^  oe  xahv^y-  II-  1018  dv* 
ovpea  vaierdovviv  [IOGGVVOLS;  IV.  1338  (phoyyii 
VTtorpoftfovaiv  dv'  ovpea  .  .  .  flyjaaai.  —  IV.  623 
dvd  Keforcoz'  jjneipov  Ttenravrai  [yl^Mrou].  IV. 
996  di'd  T&AJ&VV  xexdpovro.  IV.  1359  ov&  en 
tdvfr  dvd  %copo^  eae&paxov.  IV.  1440  nai<paaae 
be  rovtf  dvd  ^(5po^,  |  i'Scop  e%ef>ewv.  IV.  1742 
(V  Tt&ayog  rafciy.  Cf.  0  517,  0  488;  y  215? 
v  367,  £  474,  o  80,  n  96,  etc. 

g)    With  verbs  denoting  the  direction  toward  or  over 
a  place. 

II.  363  dp  7t&ayo$  rerpapfiewr,  II.  810  ap 
i.     III.  1283  TtaTtr^rag  53  dva 
Cf.  T  212. 


87ti 

Of  all  the  prepositions  ini  (  Sanskrit  dpi )  is  per- 
haps the  most  difficult,  because  its  meanings  are  so 
numerous  that  at  times  it  is  hard  to  distinguish  one 
from  the  other.  In  a  local  sense  it  denotes  rest  upon 
a  place  or  object,  position  bordering  on  a  place,  or 
motion  toivard  or  upon  something.  From  these  primary 
local  meanings  (upon,  at,  near,  to),  have  been 
derived  the  metaphoric  meanings,  which  Monro  sum- 
marizes in  part  as  follows :  "  After  (  as  we  speak  of 
following  upon)\  with,  at  (i.  e.  close  upon)-,  in  ad- 
dition, besides,  esp.  of  an  addition  made  to  correspond 
with  or  complete  something  else  ;  also  attached  to  as  an 
inseparable  incident  or  condition  of  a  person  or  thing  ; 
and  conversely,  on  the  condition,  in  the  circumstances, 
etc." — In  other  words,  ini  in  the  metaphoric  usages 
may  denote  sequence  in  time,  as  well  as  succession  in 
order ;  it  may  be  used  in  a  hostile  sense  against,  or  in 
a  friendly  sense  for,  in  regard  to  ;  it  may  express  the 
occasion  or  the  action  at  which  one  is  present  or  in 
which  one  participates,  —  the  person,  in  whose  power 
something  is  (  hence  depends  upon  the  person ) : 
furthermore,  it  may  signify  the  cause,  the  means,  the 
condition,  the  purpose \  the  circumstance,  and  the  like. 
Apart  from  these  embarrassing  metaphoric  usages,  it  is 
astonishing  how  the  question  regarding  the  difference 
of  M  with  the  genitive  and  dative  in  a  local  sense, 
apparently  the  easiest  of  all  usages,  was  for  a  long 
time  involved  in  a  haze  of  conflicting  opinions.  Cf. 
Forman,  The  Difference  between  the  Genitive  and 
Dative  used  with  M  to  denote  Superposition,  p.  4 
seq.  According  to  the  investigation  of  Forman,  the 


. 

dative  is  the  picturesque  and  emphatic  means  of  in- 
dicating locality  and  the  genitive  the  colorless  means. 
In  this  fact  lies  the  solution  for  the  large  use  of 
tnt  with  the  locative  dative  in  poetr}',  and  its 
limited  use  in  prose.  For  the  Orators  compare  lyUtz, 
pp.  104-106.  In  his  conception  of  superposition  and 
proximity  with  the  genitive  and  dative,  Apollonius 
agrees  with  Homer,  as  the  following  calculations 
show  : 

Ap. :  a)  Superpos.:  gen.  38,  dat.  51;  b)  Prox.:  gen.  3,  dat.  29. 
Ho  :— a)  "  "  138,  "  223;  b)  "  "  9,  "  121. 

Also  in  the  other  usages  Apollonius  remained  within 
the  limits  of  his  department.  Thus  he  keeps  the 
metaphoric  usages  almost  entirely  to  the  dative, 
though  in  the  later  language  a  large  share  of  these 
usages  fell  to  the  genitive  and  accusative.  Cf. 
Schumacher,  pp.  54-59,  Sobolewski,  pp.  141-146  and 
166;  Lundberg,  pp.  32-36;  L,utz,  pp.  101-104  and 
117-124;  Krebs,  pp.  80-84  and  93-98. 

After  these  introductory  remarks  we  may  proceed 
to  classify  the  different  uses  of  ini  in  Apollonius. 

A.     WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 
i.     IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

SUPERPOSITION. 

a)    With  verbs  of  rest,  or  words  implying  position. 

(a)  Of  place,  usually  the  large  divisions 
of  space: — III.  930  v^ov  sn  dxpepovcdv  cHp>7$ 
rivinane  (3ov?idg.  II.  407  en  axpri$  nsnrdfievov 
<|»7/oZo;  similarly  III.  202. — 11.916  sn  d 
Sdvev  axr*/j$:  cf.  L  444  Saveeiv  .  .  .  en  ' 
rpteipoio. — II.  401  en9  fineipoio  KvradSog  . 


—  172  — 

svpvv  poor  ei$  a/la  (3&%fai.     III. 
455    ?£W    enl   Spovov.     IV.  954    xopvfyfjs    £7ti 

axpyi$   6p36g.     II.  259    en     c 
ve$o$.     I.  320  crri?  &  dp  enl 

II.  1058  &oi)7t8L  S7tl  axoTttfjs  TtspifiYjxsog.    IV.  1318 
o(73  €7ti  2$oi;6g  .  .  .  m^a^;  cf.  IV.  1330,  1357. 
For  Homer   compare    A  46,  536,  A  38,  N  12, 
H  157,  2  422,  T  50,  *  61;  a  104, 162,  185,  190, 
y  90,  5  718,  e  82,  151,  195,  £  136,  etc. 

(/?)  Of  vehicles:— I.  658  [fcpa]  aya*  Jm 
6g;  similarly  II.  211,  1187. — II.  1254  <r6v  fiev 
sn'  dxpordr^^  I8ov . . .  vyog  vnspnrd^ievov 
G%s$6v.  Here  belongs  I.  566  STI  ixpi6<piv 
uupon  the  deck".  Cf.  E  550,  0  455,  N  665 
n  223,  H  275,  447;  a  260,  /?  332,  y  505,  %  188, 
p  249,  etc. 

b)  With  verbs  of  motion. 
(a)  Of  motion  down,  down  upon: — 11.550 
Stfx8v  £7t'  d^eivoio  Tto^ag  Qvvyji^og  dxrrj$.  Of 
throwing  the  cable  on  the  shore  to  fasten  the 
ship:  IV.  660  Tteia^ar^  sn'  r(i6vu>v  .  .  .  /3d/lo^; 
cf.  III.  569,  IV.  78.— Of  disembarking  or  land- 
ing: II.  631  sn'  firteipoio  (3aivtt(.icv,  similarly 

III.  199;    IV.  514.— Of    sitting   down    upon: 
II.  203  ex  &  f/lScoy  [.isydpoio  xa^e^sro  .  .  .  ov&ov 
bt9  ai^aoto;   cf.  H  522;  e  195,  x  314,  366,  etc. 
Here  belong  the  examples  of  looking  or  fixing 
the  eyes  upon  the  ground:  I.  784  enl 


—  173 — 

0/j.ftar'  speiaa$;  similarly  11.685,111.22.  Homer 
has  xard  c.  gen.;  but  compare  Theocr.  II.  112. 
(/3)  Of  motion  up,  upon: — Here  the  prin- 
cipal expression  is  that  of  embarking,  or  going 
on  board  a  ship.  IV.  1535, 1584  enl  VYIO$  efiav 
(!/fy<rai/);  cf.  N  665,  X  534,  etc.  Similar  to 
this  is  IV.  1661  (3yjaar9  en  ixpio<pLv  "he  mounted 
the  platform";  also  III.  573  knl  vyj6$  \  evvaia$ 
epvaavre$  "  drawing  the  mooring  stones  upon 
the  ship".  Other  examples  are:  I.  1237  en9 
av%6vo$  avSero  nr^vv  "she  put  her  arm  upon, 
or  around,  his  neck".  III.  683  (tvSog  .  .  .  oi 
in  dxpordrvs  dvers^sv  \  y/lcocKDyg.  IV.  578 
$opa>i*ro  |  vqaov  era  xpavafjs  'H^«eTpt&>$.  IV. 
939  v^ov  en  ai'Tact)^  O7tt%d8tev  xal  xvftarog 
dyfc  |  pcoow'.  Cf.  I  588,  M  265,  2  531;  5  817, 
3  500,  <?)  51,  etc. 

PROXIMITY. 

In  three  examples  sni  c.  gen.  means 
"close  upon",  "at"  or  "near". — Though  prox- 
imity is  clearly  meant,  yet  the  perspective 
renders  the  image  of  the  object  as  one  of 
superposition,  and  so  this  category  can  not  be 
said  to  differ  much  from  the  preceding.  The 
examples  are:  I.  29  <pyjyoi  fr  dypfd^g  .  .  .  dxrfj$ 
^g  zm  .  .  .  crTr^ooxn?'.  III.  880  en 
ayp6[.ievai  uriy^  'A[ivioi8o$.  IV.  516  sn 
[iE%a(j,(3a&£Q<;  Ttorapolo  |  .  .  .  nvpyov 
Cf.  X  153;  e  489,  x  96  etc* 


-174  — 

OTHER   I.OCAI,  USES   ARE: 

Motion  "over"  or  "across",  without  any 
definite  goal:  1.  182  novrov  em  yhavxolo  Ssz 
o^arog,    Homer  has  no  close  parallel. 

Motion    "toward":    IV.   1576   enl 
&£iwpife  .  .  .  i$vvea$e;    cf.  T  5,  E  700;  y  171, 
s  238. 

Succession:  IV.  671  <mo  ^  cV  &UGW  | 
avpfuyesg  fte%£&v.  Seaton  reads  an'  for  sn, 
as  suggested  by  L. 

2.     IN  A  TEMPORAL  SENSE. 

II.  782  Jra  Hptoylao  xaOLyvyroio 
III.  918    ouTto   rig    rotog    €7ti    Ttporep 
avfytiv.     Cf.  B  797=1  403,  X  156    JTI'  cip 
ain  time  of  peace";  E  637?=*  332  enl  nporepuv 


B.     WITH  THE  DATIVE. 
i.     IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

SUPERPOSITION. 

a)    With  the  idea  of  rest  or  position  "upon"  or  "over"  . 
(a)   Of  place:  —  I.  549    en*   dxpordryai   be 


.  II.  735  en'  dxpordry  [/Itacrd^]  nsfyvaGiv;  cf. 
A  484.  —  I.  178  enofaoaev  en  bfypvciv  ai 
similarly  IV.  1298  vdovroc,  en'  ofypvai 
XVXVOL  xivriGovGiv  sov  ^e/log.     IV.  605 
em  repGaivovTai;    IV.  1503  xelro  $  enl 

.     Cf.  T  151,  *  853;  y5,  38,  v  119,  284, 


etc. —  Noteworthy  is   I.  497  rjei&sv  fr  &$  yala 
xai  oi'pavog  r$e  SdhaaGa,  \  TO  nplv  en* 
GwapypoTa  (loptpii  \  veixso$  e^  oAoolo 

emara;  cf.  I.  946;  also  E  141;  #  389,  ^  47. 
((3)  Of  the  object:— II.  1103  en'  dxpor- 
d>7(Ti;pog  dxpetioveGGiv;  similarly  II.  1148, 
1273  neurd^isvov  haGioiGiv  eni  5pf6g  dxpefiov- 
eaoiv.  In  II.  481  %  lm  [5pi>6]  TIOV^OV  ai&va 
rpifaaxe  [a^uafyudg],  Ivi  would  seem  more 
natural:  cf.  A.  J.  P.,  XVII.  31.— 11.487  Xox^ta 
£e£ou  en  aiiro  [/3a)^c5]  £spa;  a  similar  example 
is  II.  496  f>%<n>  en  eo%ap6$iv.  III.  218 
Xfi&xeyfliv  eni  yhvfyiSeGGtv  dp>7p«  [S'pt/^og];  cf. 
2  275. — IV.  955  6p36$  €7tt  or&eYi  rvnibog  .  .  . 
epdaag.  III.  1158  l£e  6'  enl  ^a^a^ 
i.  I.  435  xalov  enl  a%i£'YiOiv.  Cf.  A  462? 
0  240;  ^  273,  459,  e  59,  etc. 

(y)  Of  vehicles: — III.  877  %pvG€ioL$  .  .  . 
e<p'  appaaiv  Icrr^vZa;  cf.  Z  354,  A  600,  P  459. 
In  IV.  85  enl  v^l  Qevyunev,  the  dative  seems 
to  be  instrumental;  cf.  (3  414. 

(5)  Of  parts  of  the  body:  — I.  219  en 
dxpordroLGL  nof&v  (on  tiptoe);  also  II.  90. — 
IV.  1403  i^vlat  nv^o^EvoiOLV  sty*  E^xeai  nopaaiv- 
ovro.  IV.  1404  'Eanepibes  xe<pa^alg  em  ^apocg 
e%ovoai  dpyvfyeas  ^av^riac  ^Jiy  earevov.  IV.  172 
enl  gavSyai  napyjiaiv  r$e  (terAno)  |  .  .  .  i&v 
I.  946  reaaapsg  alvordryGiv  enl 


-i76- 

dpapvlcu  [#etpeg]  III.  167  snl 
.  tetojpiiLhoi.  Cf.  0  436,  K  26,  91, 
A  623,  H  419,  0  102,  393,  P  210;  v  60,  p  90, 
a  378,  £  102,  etc.,  also  h.  Merc.  388. 

£)    With  verbs  of  motion  (construct™  praegnans)  : 

(a)  Of  place:  —  I.  1104  Sovpara  .  .  .  snl 
$Yiyylvi  /3d;U>(7^;  similarly  II.  430,  IV.  902.— 

II.  365-366    £7i£    nsipaGiv   aiyiaholo  \  dxry   em 
npoS^YJTi  poal  ^Ahvog  norafiolo  \  beivbv  epsvyovrai. 
I.  1194  67tl  %$ovi  $yjx6  tpaperpyv;  similarly  IV. 
523. — IV.  1555  en9 

I.  453    eni   ^a[i 

Cf.  E  72*9,  Z  273,  303,  473,  A 161,  N  654,  X  60, 

a  487;  i  284,  *  315,  o  60,  348,  #  387,  etc. 

(/3)  Of  the  object: — I.  329  fafafievois  snl 
%ai<peGLv  r$e  xal  laroj  xex%i[i£VQ  .  .  .  e&piouvro. 
I.  365  dno  $5  slfiar'  .  .  .  vyiYioavro  yletco  knl 
nharaii&vL.  I.  376  xluvav  snl  Ttpcor^cn  fydhayZiv. 

III.  1286    ty%o<;  sTtYi^ev  .  .  .  sn    ovpid%6).     IV. 
124    %   eni    [^>7/c5]  ^coag   fieffaqro.      IV.  187 
[xcoag]   TCO  59  €7tt  <|>apog  |  xd(3(3a%s.  IV.  717  elow 
M  geavolaiv  .  .  .  3p6^otat^.     Cf.  Z  213,   H  60, 
A  371,  4>  18,  *  876;  p  422,  7t  408,  r  101,  etc. 
Under  this  category  seems  to  belong  II.  1285 
vff  exehevGev  sn'  svvaiyaiv  spvaaai.     Cf.  A  485; 
also  Haggett,  p.  46. 

(y)   Of  parts  of  the  body:— I.  517  %oi(3d$ 
. . .  sni  rs  yXcoaa^m  %sovro  a^o-ueratg.     II.  104 


[j.oiGtv   en 

'Eptwg  Xa£  STtefiy.  III.  1159 
/lou?;/  snl  X£Lf'L  7iape6>7i>;  similarly  IV. 
693.— III.  1227  JTII  xpart  xopw  $ero.  III.  1393 
nlnrov  .  .  .  en  ayoarcj  xal  Tthevpolg.  IV.  44 
nen^ov  sn  otyvGiv  .  .  .  GTedaftewq.  Cf.  F  336, 
E  743,  H  165,  0  102,  480,  n  137,  *  396,  727; 
a  364,  5  213,  #  123,  G>  230,  etc. 

PROXIMITY. 

(a)   On  the  border  of  bodies  of  water: — 

I.  554  7to/U77  5'  STtl  xv[iarog  ayy  reyye  no&ag. 

II.  505  7tora^<3  em  TtOLftaivovaiv.     I.  1321  snl 

Kioto  .  .  .  TieTtpcorou  .  .  .  polpav  dva- 
;  similarly  II.  972;  III.  67;  IV.  615.— 
IV.  251  snl  fayfuGiv  eftsLfiav  [?5o$].  I.  54  kri 
' AfuppvGGoio  poyGiv  .  .  .  rsxev;  similarly  I.  309. 
— I.  36  yeivaro  8iVYj£vro$  e<py  v8aGiv  ' ATtibavolo; 
similarly  I.  537;  II.  658;  III.  875;  IV.  1309.— 
Cf.  E  36,  479,  598,  Z  15,  H  86,  133,  0  490, 
501,  K  287,  A  712,  M  168,  n  719,  P  263,  T  390, 
4>  87;  o  442,  co  82,  ete. 

(/?)  Of  other  localities: — III.  1033  nvpxa^v 
et>  wjYiGa$  STtl  /36$po).  IV.  691  sty'  eGriy  di^avrs 
l^avov.  III.  235  r^  &  em  [fieGGav^o)]  noKhcd 
Salapoi  T'  eGav.  IV.  1272  bt' 
III.  679  snl  yaiyj$  TtsipaGi 
;  similar  examples  are:  IV.  1173,1225. 


-I78- 

1565,  1595.  —  IV.  1158  vfievaiov  enl  n 
asibov.  IV.  1605  sni  crTo^drscrcu  %ahtvd  .  .  . 
xpoteovtai.  —  IV.  1613  oute  [dmi'Sou]  Gxofaolg 
£7tl  vsio&i  xevvpoig  .  .  .  SiftdtoWo.  —  Cf.  B  788, 
T  153;  a  196,  (3  419,  8  579,  £  52,  153,  i  105, 
284,  X  461,  etc. 

(y)  Of  the  occupation:  —  I.  730  en  d<p§iro) 
Yllievoi  ?pyco  "  sitting  at  or  around  the  immortal 
work".  Cf.  A  175,  258;  n  111;  also  Eurip. 
Ale.  361,  439.  Similar  to  this  is  IV.  1658  fV 


OTHER  I<OCAI<  USES  ARE  THOSE  WHICH  DENOTE: 

-(a)   The  limit:—  II.  112  foov  V  eni  Mpfian 
"i.  e.  skin-deep".    IV.  938  dvaa%6nevai  favxolg 


The  direction  towards  or  against:  — 
III.  444  sri  avrti  5'  dfifiara  XOV^YI  .  .  .  a%o[i£vw 
similarly  III.  1022.  Cf.  A  88;  a  364,  n  439, 
$  358,  etc.—  III.  284  fEpcog]  yhvQitias  .  .  .  9pt 
srti  M>7^67?;  cf.  III.  276  STtl  <pop(3daw  olatpog  \ 
rehfarai.  —  II.  285  vifaouriv  em 
xiX,6vre$.  Cf.  T  283,  etc. 

(y)    The   motion    over:  —  IV.  952 
eni  xvpaaw.     Cf.  B  6;  q  264. 

Examples  of  a  figurative  local  use  are: 
I.  1140,  III.  497;  IV.  1197.  Cf.  A  55,  K  46; 
e  427,  $  554,  v  209,  etc. 


—  179  — 

a.    IN  A  TEMPORAL  SENSE. 

(a)  Of  a  particular  point  in  time:  —  I.  934 
eni  vvxri.  II.  453  en'  tffiarr,  similarly  IV.  977. 
—  Cf.  K  48,  N  234,  T  110,  229;  (i  105,  etc. 
Here  belongs  I.  260  eni  npofiohyai  xiovruv  "at 
the  departure  of  those  going".  Cf.  Schol.:  ry 


(/?)  Of  succession  in  time:  —  II.  475  en 
5'  >^uap  opcopa.  II.  633  Grovosaaav  en' 
vvxra  Qvldaau;  cf.  11.622,947;  IV.  1632. 
Homer  has  no  parallel.  Akin  to  the  preceding 
examples  are  the  following,  most  of  which 
refer  to  the  order  in  which  the  Argonauts 
enlisted:  I.  40  eni  roZtft  .  .  .  Hohv<py](Ao<;  Ixavev; 
similarly  I.  53,  86,  90,  95,  115,  133,  179,  190, 
740,  1046;  II.  792,  955.—  Cf.  H  163-167,  *  355, 
401,  514;  v  162,  185,  etc.  Different  are  the 
examples 

OF  GEOGRAPHICAL  SUCCESSIONS: 

a  )    With  verbs  of  motion,  '  '  after"  ,  '  *  next  to  "  .• 

I.  932  snl  ry  ['A/^co]  xal  'A@apvi$o$  .  .  . 
Yiiova  .  .  .  7tapvi(Asi(3ov.     II.  357    snl   ry   [a#p>2] 
napavela&e  xofavovg  Hafflayovw,    cf.  also  II. 
654,  1017,  1247;  IV.  564,  570.     This  use,  as 
well  as  the  next,  is  not  Homeric. 

£)    With  verbs  of  rest  denoting  the  position  "beyond"  '. 

II.  379  T'p  $  eni  [axpy]  Moaavvoixoi  .  .  . 
vepovrai.     II.  397-398    egeiw    &  SdtTtapeg    eni 


—  i8o  — 

3  sni 


OF  ACCESSION,   ACCUHULATION  OR  ADDITION: 

I.  297  sn  atyeaiv  dtyog  dpoto.  II.  81  en9' 
d/U,G)  8'  d/l/log  ayrai  $ovno$.  Notice  the 
alliteration  in  the  last  two  cases.  Similar 
examples  are:  I.  811,  1064;  II.  1044;  III.  125, 
178,  1284;  IV.  411,  447,  1188,  1274.  Cf.  I  639, 
H  130;  y  113,  YI  120-121,  216. 
OF  THE  CAUSE. 

I.  286-287  $  em  noMyv  \  dyTia^v  xal  xv&og 
£%ov  Ttdpog,  cJ  em  [tovvti  I  [tirpyv  Ttp&rov 
xal  varavov.  II.  860  o^ooi  sni  n^ftan 
zhovro.  III.  643  sni  Gfysrspoig  d%sovaa  natal; 
cf.  IV.  995  eolg  sni  naioi  ydvvoSai.  III.  692 
IIYI  ft  afayeivov  sfy*  vidtii  xyj$o$  Ihoio.  III.  1056 
sn  avrti  \  .  .  .  ohexotev  dhhfaovs.  III.  1254 
.  .  sn  shntipr}0iv  de^ov.  IV.  8 
sni  .  .  .  deSvlcd  .  .  .  xsj^o^ofievog.  IV. 
994  sni  be  a<pia  xay^a^daaxev  .  .  .  7to/Ug.  IV. 
1294  olxriaro)  Savdry  em.  IV.  1495  KdvSov 
enefyvev  sni  priveGGiv.  IV.  1604  sn'  av%evi 
yaCpog.  Cf.  A  162,  I  492,  H  67;  y  549,  fi  43, 
n  19,  a  414,  v  358,  374,  $  376,  6)  91. 

OF  THE  CONDITION  OR  ATTENDANT 
CIRCUMSTANCE. 


I.  252  sn'  dyhaiy  /?idroto,  "with  the  joy  of 
life".     I.  422   sn    anY^iovi  i*oipy,  "with  good 


luck".     I.  514   opSolacv   en'   ovaaiv 
"with  eager  ears";  cf.  III.  1260.— I.  652   eni 
/^opaxo;  cf.   I.  1013. —  I.  767    ^YI^OV    Tiep 
uo.     II.  205    d/3^l>7^;p6j    8*    eni 
xexhir*  avav8o$.     IV.  711  [i£i?uxrpd  re 
xalev   en     £v%G>hy]ai;    cf.  IV.  1599 
v.      IV.    1305    dvyvvarG)    kri 
IV.    1455    ftispolg    £7tl  %£ifaaiv    elnev 
$.     Cf.  N  485,  2  501,   T  181;  n  99,  etc. 

OF  THE  PURPOSE. 

I.  425  sTti  fiovaiv  ^ModoSyv,  athey  girded 
themselves  for  the  purpose  of  killing  the  oxen". 
III.  403  en9  oSvsioiOiv  ifave.    IV.  15.47  QpQevg] 
og    rp'iTtoSa   .   .   .  voaro)    STti 
SeaSai.    IV.  1430  s<p*  v/AerepoiGtv  ovsiap  \ 
e^ev    xapdroLGiv.      Cf.   I  602,    K  304, 
574;  a  44. 

OF  THE  PERSON  OR  THING  UPON  WHICH 
SOHETHING  DEPENDS. 

I.  713  £ivac  kri  a[*[u.     III.  507  eni  xdprei 
c5i>.    IV.  545  xoipaveovrog  en  o<ppvai  Nai;crt- 
$6010.     This  use  is  post-Homeric. 

IN  A  HOSTILE  SENSE,  ••AGAINST",  "UPON". 

I.  1025  sni  afyiGi  %etpag  oceipav;  cf.  II.  92. 
— II.  5  oar3  eni  xai  facivotffiv  deixea  Seaftov 
eSyxev,  awho  imposed  an  unjust  law  even  upon 
strangers".  II.  69  en  dhhfaotat  (levog  <pepov. 
III.  1351  b&ovra  Syei  Syevvriaiv  en  dvSdaiv. 


-  182    ~ 

IV.  7  Sohov  ainvv  enl  afyiai  {lYjndaGxsv;  cf.  IV. 
462.     Other  examples  are:  I.  42;  II.  1038;  IV. 
448,  971,  1087,  1101,  1665.     For  Homer  com- 
pare: A  382,  T  15, 132,  A 178,  E  14,  630,  A  293, 
442,  II  608,  *  362;  8  822,  o  182,  etc. 
IN  A  FRIENDLY  SENSE,  -FOR". 
1.  612  e%ov  &  enl  ^TjidbeGGiv  erpYij(i)v  epov. 
III.  28   XOV^YIV   AiVrao   $sX£at  .  .  .  en 
cf.  III.   143.— III.    708    d^G)    871 
(mutually)    Seaav   yoov.      III.   742    en     dvept, 
P7<nda<r£ou.     Cf.  A  162,  I  492;  n  19. 

WITH  A  VERB  EXPRESSING  A  flENTAL  ATTITUDE 
TOWARDS  ANOTHER  PhRSON. 

III.  405  ga^olg  yap  en  dvfydaiv  ovn 
Heyaipu.  Cf.  B  270;  a  414,  #  412. 

C.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
i.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

a)  Motion  "to"  or  "towards"  a  place  or  object. 

I.  832  eTti  vfja  xiw;  similarly  II.  71,  295, 
814,  835,  III.  826,  1165,  1318,  1345.  Cf. 
A  12,  371,  B  8, 17, 168,  etc. — In  three  passages 
(I.  523,  910;  II.  933)  Apollonius  uses  enl  vya 
fiaiveiv  in  the  sense  of  "going  on  board",  for 
which  Homer  uses  enl  vy6$  (3aiveiv.  The 
phrase  enl  vfja  fiaiveiv  in  Homer  means  only 
"to  go  to  the  ship". — Other  examples  are: 
I.  849  enl  a$ea  ^aT3  ayeaxov;  cf.  I.  872;  III. 
36.— I.  881  i&vaaat  .  .  .  dX^oT3  en  aMwv  \ 


-   i83  — 

xapnov  .  .  .  nsnoryuevai;    cf.   0   684. —  I.   925 
em    npov%ovaav    Ixovro.      I.    1298 
enl   yalav  Ixovro;  similar  are:  II.  404; 

III.  891;  IV.  631, 1761.  Cf.  I  619,2  240,  *  205, 
x  55,   %  43,  91,  o  88,  492,  p  205,  r  170,  etc. 
The  examples  with  animate  beings  that  fall 
under  this  category  are:    II.  677  ave$%6[ievo$ 

en  dneipova  Sfjiiov;  cf.  £  43. — II.  1046 
&  en  oitivov  ra%iarbv  fiehog.  This  is  the 
nearest  approach  to  the  Homeric  use  with 
persons,  as  B  18,  E  590,  etc. — In  II.  371  it 
seems  best  to  read  vn  instead  of  en. 

fr)  Motion  upon. 
III.  803  6v&€{ievri  5'  S7tl  yovvav*  6$i;pero;  cf. 

IV.  1046.— III.  1334  halov  em  cwipapy  nceaag 
TtoSL     III.  1373  enl  yalav  . . .  nlnrov.     IV.  885 
(3alvov  enl  xfylSag;  cf.  Z  386,  0  442.— IV.  1516 
QLX^YIV  en  axav&ov  erear^pi^aro  . . .  rapaov  no86g. 
Cf.  T  270;  a  146,  etc. 

c  )  Limit  or  a  point  of  measurement  '  'as  far  as' ' , 

"upto". 

1. 565  en  r&axdryjv  epvaavreg  [hiva].  1. 744 
ex  be  ol  &IJLOV  n9i%vv  em  axatov  £VVO%Y]  xe%dhaaro. 
II.  791  ear9  enl  'Pyfiaiov  npo%od$.  III.  412 
enl  re^aov.  IV.  947  xohnov  en  i%vag 
IV.  1401  and  xparog  8e  xe^atvYiv  \ 
en  axv^anv  xelr  anvoo$.  II.  1609  ear 
enl  VYI^VV  |  ...  paxdpeaai  .  .  .  eixro.  Cf.  F  12 
A  7;  £  120. 


—  184  — 

d  )  Extent  or  motion  over  a  space. 
I.  424  snl  novrov  s^vao^;  cf.  IV.  1318  e$* 
nha^o/Asvoi.  —  II.  975  freeSpa  .  .  .  snl  yalav 
III.  743  vvZ  .  .  .  snl  yalav  aysv  xvEfyag. 
IV.  183  r.cog  [isv  p3  snl  yalav  sxiSvaro.  III. 
1054  ansipofievtjv  6<piog  8vo<})£pYjv  enl  fl&Aov 
ofovrav.  Cf.  H  88,  ©  1,  K  27,  H  695;  y  105, 
5  381,  etc.  Here  belongs  the  example  denot- 
ing direction  "over":  1.631  TtaTtraivov  snl 
n^arvv  .  .  .  Ttovrov.  Cf.  A  350,  *  143;  8  84, 
158,  etc.—  Noteworthy  is  IV.  1357  !$>'  vypqv 
cf.  3  370 


)  Position. 

I.  930  €7ti  S^td  yalav  e%ovre$]  cf.  II.  347; 
IV.  1621.—  II.  1269  tyov  V  en  dp6(Trapd  .  .  . 
Kavxacov.  Cf.  E  355,  N  326;  y  171,  e  277. 
This  use  is  common  in  military  language. 

A  figurative  local  use  is  seen  in  IV.  618 
eni  yyj$oGvva$  rpaneto  v6o$;  cf.  F422.  —  IV.  678 
rd  5'  snl  ari%a<;  fiyayev  al6v;  cf.  B  687,  T  113, 
2  602.—  IV.  1773  snl  xhvra  neipaS  ixdvu  \ 
-  cf  ^  226,  %  338,  ^  248. 


2.    IN  A  TEHPORAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE  THE 
EXTENT  OF  TIHE. 

I.  605  enl  xve$a$,  "till  night".  I.  793  snl 
%povov,"foY  a  time";  similar  are  IV.  960,  1255, 
1545.  —  IV.  1293  vvxr'  snl  naoav  xal  <£>do£, 
"for  a  whole  night  and  day".  IV.  1632  sn' 


—  i85- 

"by  day".     For  examples  like  snl 
see  the  chapter  on  the  prepositions  in  adverbial 
phrases.—  Cf.  B  299;  YI  288,  o  494,  etc. 

3.    OF  PURPOSE. 

II.  1129  em  2p«>g,uon  business".  III.  375 
S7ti  Koxxg  .  .  .  v66G&ou,  "to  go  in  quest  of  the 
fleece".  III.  389  Tt'g  ft  av  roaov  ol8(ua  nspfjoai 
rhaiYi  sx&v  o^velov  enl  xrspag.  Cf.  II  43;  7  421, 
p  295,  also  Aesch.  Sept.  861,  Ag.  1535. 


Originally  i^rd  meant  between  or  among  Cf.  Brug- 
mann,  Griech,  Gram.,3  Sec.  503  From  these  local 
meanings  developed  the  sociative  or  comitative  idea, 
in  which  i^rd  is  equivalent  to  <™v.  In  prose 
PS™  (c.  gen.)  in  a  sociative  sense  restricted 
the  use  of  ffuv  to  such  an  extent  that  in  some  of 
the  Orators  ffw  is  practically  an  unknown  quantity. 
Isocrates  never  uses  it  ;  Andocides  has  it  only  once  ; 
Aeschines  once;  Antiphon  and  Lysias  each  have 
it  twice.  Cf.  T.  Mommsen,  pp.  3-7,  where  the 
facts  for  the  rise  of  p-^A  c.  gen.  and  the  fall 
of  ffvv  in  prose  are  admirably  set  forth.  —  Apollonius 
avoids  fj-erd  with  the  genitive  altogether.  Homer  has 
only  five  examples,  for  which  compare  Mommsen,  p. 
52;  Monro,  Sec.  196;  Vogrinz,  p.  219. 

As  p-^rd  c.  gen.  is  chiefly  a  prose  construction, 
so  nerd  c.  dat.  is  almost  exclusively  an  epic  usage. 
It  is  foreign  to  all  departments  of  prose  ;  while  in 
the  drama  we  find  a  mere  trace  of  it.  Cf.  Aeschylus, 
Choe.  365,  Pers.  613;  Sophocles,  Phil,  mo;  Euri- 
pides, Hec.  355;  Aristophanes,  Av.  251,  Lys. 
1283,  Ran.  336.  —  Apollonius  has  always  the  plural 
after  i^rd  with  the  dative.  Homer  has  six  examples 
with  the  singular  of  collective  nouns.  Cf.  Mommsen, 


—  i86  — 

p.  44.  In  as  far  as  the  dative  of  the  person  pre- 
dominates in  the  Argonautica,  our  author  stands 
closer  to  the  Iliad  than  to  the  Odyssey,  in  which  the 
dative  of  things  is  more  numerous. 

Msrd  c.  ace.  was  used  primarily  with  plurals  and 
collective  nouns  after  verbs  of  motion  to  denote  into 
the  midst  of,  among;  then  in  the  sense  of  to  with 
words  like  city,  ship,  etc.  This  last  use,  as  that  with 
proper  names  of  countries,  is  an  extension  on  the  part  of 
Apollonius.  In  Homer  ^rd  is  sometimes  used  with 
the  accusative  without  a  verb  of  motion,  Cf.  Monro, 
Sec.  195.  This  does  not  occur  in  Apollonius.  Our 
author  differs  also  from  his  predecessor  in  the  frequency 
of  IJ.STO.  with  the  dative  and  with  the  accusative. 
Homer  has  it  215  times  with  the  dative  and  164 
times  with  the  accusative.  Apollonius  reversed  this 
numerical  relation,  using  it  36  times  with  the  dative 
and  47  times  with  the  accusative. 

A.     WITH  THE  DATIVE. 

i.     IN  THE  LOCAL  SENSE  "AMONG":  ONLY  OF 
PERSONS. 

I.  17  dhhobanolGi  per'  dvtydcn-,  similarly 
I.  648,  779;  III.  341,  891;  IV.  481,  616,  1209, 
1640;  also  I.  679;  IV.  1102.  Cf.  E  86,  II  493, 
570,  *  476,  etc.  —  I.  979  rol$  pera  Sal*'  dhsyvvs. 
III.  544  tolov  67to$  [isrd  rtaai  .  .  .  dyopevaev; 
similarly  II.  144;  III.  90,  505,  889;  IV.  56,  189. 
Cf.  K  250;  it  336,  etc.—  III.  908  &w6ps$a  (tera 
otpiaiv,  "among  ourselves".  Other  examples 
are:  IV.  975,  1418.  Cf.  N270,  *122;  i  418,  etc. 

2.    IN  THE  SOCIATIVE  5ENSE  "WITH":  ONLY  OF 
PERSONS. 


I.    303    per' 
$6(101$;  cf.  x  204  and  Mommsen,  p.  43.  —  I.  340 


-i87~ 


TF  [tsra  fyivoiai  fiaheaSaL.  Cf.  I  434, 
A  428.  Other  examples  are:  II.  536,  757; 
IV.  6,  1465.  Cf.  K  208;  i  335,  etc. 

3.     IN  THE  CONCOHITANT  SENSE  "WITH":  ONLY 
OF  THINGS. 

I.  223  boveovro  perd  nvoiriGiv  ISapou.  III. 
1214  fyvivoiai  [isTa  nropSoiGi  [sare<pdvcdVTo]  . 
Compare  also  IV.  423,  427;  for  Homer  *P  367; 
<3  118. 

More  singular  is  the  phrase  [isrd  <ppsaiv 
(1.463;  11.952;  111.18,629;  IV.  56?),  where, 
according  to  our  idiom,  we  render  perd  by 
"in".  Cf.  Haggett,  p.  49. 

B.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
i.     IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  "TO",  LIKE  irpds: 

a)   Of  persons. 

(a)  In  the  singular:  —  III.  25  lopev 
Kvnpiv.    Schol.  Tipog  TYIV  K.  —  III.  1138 
c>7J>  fiera  [irjTepa.     IV.  77  [terd  rtfrye 
.  .  .  frdaaxov.     Cf.  K  63,  73,  N  252,  297;  also 
E  152,  614,  etc. 

(/?)  In  the  plural:—  III.  1148 
[opro  veea&ai].  IV.  1499 
.  .  .  exopiaaav.  Cf.  A  222,  K  149,  etc. 
Here  belongs  the  example  of  a  collective  noun: 
III.  434  ep£€o  vvv  pe$'  O^LL^OV.  Cf.  A  478, 
H  21,  T  47,  etc.  Similar  is  the  example  in 
which  fierd  denotes  direction  towards:  III.  951 


—  188  — 
ocr<7£ 


cf.  11  247. 

£)   Of  place  or  object. 

The  examples  under  this  heading  have, 
with  the  exception  of  II.  1121,  the  noun  in 
the  singular.  In  this  respect  Apollonius 
differs  entirely  from  Homer,  who  never  uses 
the  noun  in  the  singular:  — 

(a)  With  proper  names  of  countries:  — 
II.  424  fierd  8*  Alav  dX<g  7to(unyje$  ecrovrou. 
Schol.:  n  (tsrd  dvrl  rtfs  Ttpog.  Cf.  II.  1188 


&6LOV    TtO^LV  'OpfcO/jLeVOlo.       III.    13 

dyo^ro;  similarly  IV.  349,  369.—  III.  1242 


With  appellatives:  —  I.  137  laav 
also  I.  701,  1255;  III.  1187;  IV.  1766.— 
II.  461  s^avLovra  [tsvd  ntofav',  similarly  II.  762, 
892,  1095,  1189;  III.  331,  621.—  II.  1172  xlov 
[terd  vYibv  vAp>;og;  cf.  III.  914.  —  IV.  57 
Adrftiov  avrpov  dhvaxd).  IV.  123 
d/lcrog  Ixovro.  IV.  289  fisr'  'loviri 
also  IV.  630,  844.—  IV.  720  fierd  yalav 
xai  ^co^ar'  lovreg.  —  II.  1121  fist'  ftova$ 
2.  OF  SUCCESSION  IN  ORDER  OF  PLACE,  "BEYOND". 
II.  367  [isrd  rov  53  dy^tppoog  TIptg  .  .  . 
s/U'crcrerat  elg  d/la.  Closely  allied  to  this  is 
the  use 


—  189  — 

3.    OF  SEQUENCE  IN  ORDER  OF  TIME,  "AFTER". 

I.  698  (isra  tqvye  dv&pvo  'T^irtuJtoy; 
similarly  II.  898,  1011,  Of.  K  516;  o  147,  p  336. 
—I.  1309=IV.  1211  ^rd  zpovov.  Of.  %  352; 
also  h  .  Merc.  126. 

4.    OF  PURPOSE,  "IN  QUEST  OF",  "AFTER", 
LIKE  4irC. 

The  only  example  of  this  use  in  Apollonius 
is  (iera  xtiag  in  I.  4;  II.  211,  873;  III.  58.  Of. 
N  247,  T  347;  a  184,  it  151  (of  the  person); 
h.  Cer.  106. 

An  example  of  a  figurative  local  use  is 
fisr  l%via  veeoSou  in  I.  741;  III.  447.  Cf,  2 
321;  (3  406. 

—  Ttapd  — 

Form : —  Besides  napd  (24),  which  becomes  ndpa  (2) 
by  anastrophe,  nap*  (8)  by  elision,  nap  (i)  by  apocope, 
Apollonius  has  the  form  7tapai  five  times.  Homer 
has  twelve  examples  of  r^apai. 

Use: — Of  all  the  prepositions,  xapd  is  one  of  the 
best  to  show  how  close  Apollonius  drew  the  line 
between  poetic  and  prosaic  usages.  In  prose 
Ttapd  c.  gen.  predominates ;  in  epic  poetry  it  is  com- 
paratively rare,  in  Apollonius  even  more  so  than  in 
Homer,  as  appears  from  the  following  figures; 

Apollonius :        gen.        4,        dat.      16,        ace.      18. 

Homer:  "        67,  "       219,           "      133. 

Orators:  "      974,           "      60?,  "      328. 

Polybius :  "      554,  "      416,          "      491- 

Again,  in  prose  napd  is  largely  restricted  to  a  per- 
sonal use,  or  to  animate  beings  in  general.  Upon 


—  190  — 

this  fact  was  based  the  maxim  of  the  old  gram- 
marians "  y  napa  lfj.il>b%u>v  kerb."  In  epic  poetry,  how- 
ever, it  is  used  much  more  frequently  of  the  thing 
than  of  the  person.  Apollonius  has  in  all  only  six 
instances  of  the  person  (3  c.  gen.  and  3  c  dat.) 

Furthermore,  in  prose  a  number  of  metaphoric 
uses  have  grown  around  napa ;  cf.  Ktihner-Gerth, 
Sec.  440;  Lutz,  pp.  145-154;  Krebs,  pp.  51-58.  In 
epic  poetry  these  usages  are  rare.  In  Apollonius 
they  are  practically  conspicuous  by  their  absence. 
Only  one  example  occurs  with  the  genitive  and  one 
with  the  accusative. 

Meaning: — The  radical  sense  of  napd  is  beside. 
This  meaning  appears  most  distinctly  in  the  adverbial 
use  of  the  preposition.  In  case-construction  it  is 
modified  according  to  the  general  nature  of  the  cases. 
With  the  genitive  it  is  ablatival,  from  the  side  of, 
French  de  chez ;  with  the  dative  it  is  locatival, 
by  the  side  of,  beside,  near ;  with  the  accusative 
it  denotes  a)  the  goal  of  motion,  to  the  side  of, 
and  b)  motion  or  extent,  alongside  of. 

A.     WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 

(a)  Of  a  person: — II.  1096  sveovro  nap3 
Aiyrao  Kvraiov-  cf.  B  787,  N  211,  ete.— III.  38 
Ttotpai  Atog  Jryev  axortiv;  cf.  0  5,  175;  Hes.  Th. 
348. — Un-Homeric  is  the  metaphoric  example 
of  hearing  something  from  a  person:  II.  417 
acTTtacrtcog  xe  Ttapd  aeo  xal  ro  Saeiyv. 

(/?)  Of  an  object: — III.  568  "Apyog  ph 
rtapa  V7ib$  .  .  .  ar&tea$G);  cf.  N  744,  B  28,  46, 
T  143;  y  431,  etc. 


B.     WITH  THE  DATIVE. 
(a)    Of  a   person:  —  I.  455  napd  be  a<picn 


exerto  slbara  xai  [te&v  Xapov;  cf.  0  504; 
x  9.  —  IV.  223  nap  be  ol  ey%og  .  .  .  rerdvvaro; 
cf.  Z  43,  O  547;  v  387,  etc.  In  II.  503  nporsporti 
nap'  avSpdaw,  the  preposition  is  used  partly  in 
a  local  and  partly  in  a  temporal  sense. 

((3)  Of  an  object  or  of  a  place:  —  I.  319 
'Apytiri  .  .  .  Ttapd  VYI\  [levovtss;  similarly  I.  855; 
IV.  849,  1122.  Cf.  A  329,  H  383,  0  345,  K  35, 
256,  etc.  —  I.  530  afystepoiai  nap*  evtsGw 
%6o)*ro;  cf.  H  135.—  I.  694  =  11.  61  Ttapd 
noaaiv;  'cf.  N  617,  0  280,  etc.  II.  309  Ttap3 
sa%dpy  *7<7To  yepatog;  similarly  II.  158,  498; 
III.  1193.  Cf.  0  562;  8  449,  $  239,  385,  ^  71. 

—  II.  868  ov'IfadpaoioLGi  nap'  vSaaiv'Aarvnd^ata 
rixre;  similarly  IV.  132,  973.    Cf.  A  475;  f  97. 

—  In  1.  458  Ttapd  ftairi  xai  olvG)  rspnv&$  s^iotdvro, 
the  idea  is  temporal  as  well  as  local.    Cf.  y  37. 

C.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

Apollonius  has  no  instance  of  Ttapd  with 
a  person  in  the  accusative.  The  example  in 
III.  486  is  one  of  tmesis,  not  of  case-construc- 
tion. Homer,  however,  uses  occasionally  Ttapd 
with  a  person  in  the  accusative,  as  E  837, 
A  592,  2  143,  H  169;  y  469,  8  51,  etc. 

The  uses  in  Apollonius  are: 


(a)  Of  motion  "to",  "to  the  side  of":— 
L  217  ayuv  .  .  .  Ttapd  £601;  'Epj^Voto.  II.  906 
Ttapd  Ttpo^odg  Ttoraftolo  fjhv&ov.  II.  1003 
Xa^iJ/^G)!'  Ttapd  yalav  Ixovro.  III.  1276  Ttapd 
^a/log  8?uGa6(j.evov  Ttora/woZo.  IV.  825  Ttapd  ^xvh- 
%y]$  avvyepov  xevS[i&va  veea&ai.  Cf.  0  220,  etc. 

((3)  Of  motion  "alongside  of':— I.  1279 
fyopeovro  Ttapat  Ilocrt^to^  axp>7v.  II.  621  Ttapai 
yata^  r>7a  .  .  .  a  ever.  II.  946  Ttapd 
.  .  Ti^avvov  ...  |  afyaa/l6i>.  III.  1252 

Ttap'  ovpia%pv.    IV.  324  a^oTtfylo^  Ttdpa .  .  . 

avro.  IV.  564  Ttapat  Kepxvpav  Ixovro. 
IV.  787  Ttapd  2*u/l/l>7£  cr^oTt^/lov  fieyav  n^e 
Xdpvfibiv  beivbv  spevyoftev/jv  bej^rtai  o^og,  i.  e. 
the  road  leads  alongside  of  S.  and  Ch.  Cf. 
£  127. — IV.  1578  Ttapd  %epaov  sepyopevoi 
ISvveaSe.  Cf.  A  166;  £  89,  etc. 

(y)  Of  direction  ^towards"  or  "upon": — 
III.  445  6/i/uara  .  .  .  Ttapd  /ItTtap^  a%o(i6VYj  .  .  . 
xahvTtrpyjv.  Cf.  4>  603. 

(5)  Of  extent  "alongside  of",  "near":— 
I.  967  siod[A£voi  Ttapd  Siva.  II.  502  e/lo£  Ttdpa 
II>7retoto  /u>7/la  ve^isiv.  II.  507  Aifivyv  eve^tovro 
Ttapai  MppTGicrto^  atTtog.  Cf.  A  316,  B  522, 
711,  Z  34,  A  622,  M  313;  i  46,  etc. 

(e)  In  the  metaphoric  sense  "contrary  to": — 
III.  613  Ttap'  alcrar,  with  which  compare  Ttapd 
(N  787),  Ttapd  ^oZpai>  (£  509). 


—  193 


Akin  to  a[j.<pi  in  meaning  and  in  case-construction 
{  (Sanskrit  pdri,  L,a  tin  per}.  The  us  never  elided. 

The  original  meaning  of  nept  has  been  the  subject 
of  quite  a  controversy.  Cf.  Delbriick,  Vergl.  Syn. 
I  Sec.  284  ;  Vogrinz,  Gram.  d.  horn.  Dial.,  p.  225- 
226.  —  In  Apollonius,  as  in  Homer,  it  shows  the 
meanings  around,  and  above,  i.  e.  over  and  beyond,  as 
in  7T£^  7tdvTo>vt  above  all.  The  former  meaning  is 
generally  considered  the  original  one,  and  I  believe, 
correctly.  Secondary  meanings  are  :  about,  for,  con- 
cerning, on  account  of  and  the  like. 

The  most  distinctive  difference  between  epic  poetry 
and  the  other  departments  of  literature  is  that  in  the 
latter  the  use  of  mpi  c.  dat.  practically  disappeared, 
except  in  two  sets  of  phrases  ;  viz.  ,  in  regard  to 
clothing  and  with  verbs  of  fear.  Even  in  these 
expressions  Kept  was  not  used  much,  since  there  was 
a  tendency  for  the  accusative  to  encroach  upon  the 
first,  and  the  genitive  upon  the  second  usage.  Prom 
the  Orators  Lutz  (p.  125),  cites  only  one  example  to 
which,  however,  two  more  are  to  be  added;  viz., 
Ant.  V.  6  (i)  and  Lys.  Frag.  52.  Aristophanes 
recognized  that  the  construction  was  Homeric,  as  is 
shown  by  his  parody  of  it,  apart  from  which  he  uses 
it  only  four  times.  Cf.  Sobolewski,  p.  207.  The 
examples  in  tragedy  are  few,  as  also  in  Thucydides 
and  Xenophon.  Polybius  has  only  one  example  of 
xepi  c.  dat.  against  1114  c.  gen.  and  1819  c.  ace. 

In  the  use  of  nept,  Apollonius  differs  from  Homer 
in  several  details,  as  will  be  indicated.     He  shows 
a  special  fondness  for  using  it  with  the  dative. 
Homer  has  :        gen.     79,        dat.      85,        ace.      72. 
Apollonius  has  :    "        19,          "        31,          "        10. 


-  194  - 

A.     WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 
i.     IN  THE  LOCAL  SENSE  "AROUND,"  "ABOUT". 

This  use  does  not  occur  in  prose  and  it  is 
rare  in  poetry.  Homer  has  only  two  cases  of 
it,  (e  63,  130)  and  Apollonius  has  only  two:  II. 
1131  i&viia  Ttepl  2Po6g;  c£  II.  1191. 

2.    IN  THE  METAPHORIC  MEANINGS:  "ON  ACCOUNT 
OF",  "FOR",  CONCERNING",  "ABOUT". 

a)   To  denote  the  object  of  contention. 

II.  141  [idpvawo   GiSypofyopov   rtspi  yai^g:, 

similarly  III.  1057;  IV.  1485,  1765,  1770.    Of. 

M 170,  P 157, 734, 2  265,  *437;  y  403,  o  515,  etc. 

b)   To  denote  the  object  of  thought,  anxiety  or  fear. 

I.    901     8[A&6V     Ttepi     &V[AOV     dpSLG)    \   \<S^V\ 

III.  60  ki&iiiev  .  .  .  Ttepi  ^  Aiaovifao.     IV.  492 

vavt&'uqs  . .  .  Tiepi  (lyiVidaoxov;  also  I.  1342;  III. 

688;  IV.  1068,  1355.  Cf.  T  17,  *  553;  YI  191,  etc. 

3.    IN  THE  SENSE  OF  SURPASSING:  "ABOVE". 

I.  65  MO^OS,  oz^  rtepi  Ttdvrov  \  AYjroi^g 
J^a^e;  similarly  I.  830;  II.  179;  III.  304,  585. 
Cf.  A  287,  417,  BS31, 138,281;  YI  108,  etc.  From 
this  usage  developed  expressions  like  nepi  Ttoh- 
hov  noiela&ai,  etc.,  which  abound  in  the  Orators. 

Examples  of  n^'i  c.  gen.  used  after  verbs 
of  saying  and  asking  (a  135,  405,  y  77;  o  347, 
etc.),  and  phrases  like  nepi  [iv&uv,  "in  words" 
(0  284),  Ttepl  rofav,  "in  archery"  ($  225),  n^i 
<nvo$  eibevai  (p  563),  Ttepi  nvog  dxov&v  (<t  270), 
are  not  found  in  Apollonius. 


-  195- 

B.     WITH  THE  DATIVE. 
i.     IN  THE  LOCAL  SENSE:  "AROUND". 

a)    With  verbs  of  binding ,  fastening  or  putting  around. 

I.  379  Ttepi  axatyolaiv  efyoav.     III.  1224 
Tispi  fi£v  G^Ti^sGGiv  ££Gro  $cop>7m;  cf.  also  1. 1020; 
II.  57,  160,  1251;  III.  867.     For  Homer  com- 
pare:  T  330,  332,  H  207,  6  43;   £  528,  etc. 

£)    With  verbs  of  falling  upon,  or  around. 

II.  128    TtiTtrovra    Ttepi    GfyiGi.      II.   833 
fefipvXPS  ^  ^°c5  Ttept  xdnneGe  Sovpi.     IV.  93 
Ttepi  yovvaGi  Ttenryvlav.     Cf.  A  303,  ©  86,  etc. 

c)    With  verbs  of  whirling  around.     + 
IV.  936  eihiaaovro  'Ap^Q^  nepi  vyi.     Cf. 
A  817,  X  97.     Also  with  the  accusative  in  IV. 
932,    1196,   1450.— IV.  1454    Ttzrpaiy   Mivvai 
Ttept  Ttibaxi  biVEveaxov,  for  the  accusative  com- 
pare IV.  1642,  1664.— Here   belongs  IV.  325 
Gxon&ov  .  .  .  0)  7tFp6  ^>7  Gfti^tev  ''laT'pog  poor, 
d)  Examples  in  which  the  idea  of  surrounding  from 

all  sides  is  especially  prominent. 
I.  389    7i£p£    be   Gfyiv   al8v/i   xiqxie   hiyvv$\ 
similarly  II.  162,  323,  1173;  III.  1019;  IV.  953. 
Cf.  P  133,  *  598,  II  96,  etc. 

2.     IN  THE  HETAPHORIC  SENSE:  "FOR",  "ON 
ACCOUNT  OF". 

a)    To  denote  the  object  of  contention. 
IV.  549  dypavhoiGiv  d^s^6(uevov  Ttepi  fiovGiv; 
cf.  n  568,  P  4,  133;  p  472.     In  IV.  1485  the 
genitive  is  used  in  the  same  sense. 


-  196  — 

b}   Of  a  negotiation. 

III.  904  Tiepi  fiovaiv  imecrT^;  cf.  h.  Merc.  236. 
c)  In  expressions  of  fear  and  anxiety. 

II.  875    &o$    Ttepi  VYI'L.     III.  638  Ttepi  .  .  . 
fypeveg    ^eoe^ovVQU.      III.   1171    sftehovro 

Qioiv.     Cf.  K  240. 
d)    To  denote  the  object  about  which  anger  exists. 

1. 1340-1342  oi>  nepi  nusai  n*ifa>v,\  ov  be  nepi 
xrsdrsGGt,  ^a/le^d^evog  (tsveYjvas,  \  d/l/l'  grdpof 
Ttspi  c|)6)T6g.  IV.  614  %G)6[*evo<;  Ttspi  nai&i.  Cf.  h. 
Cer.  77.  This  use  is  post-Homeric;  cf.  Delbrueck, 
Vergl.  Syn.  Vol.  I.  p.  712. 

e)    With  a  verb  of  asking. 

III.  1155  7t£fi  TtaLoiv  . . .  epesivsv.     Cf.  a(A<pi 
c.  dat.  in  8  151,  s  287;  etc. 

/)    To  denote  the  inner  cause. 

III.  865  earsve . . .  O&VVYI  Tiepi.  IV.  440  nepi 
ydp    (uv   dvdyxy  .  .  .  boaav   ^sivoiGiv   aysaSai. 
Homer  has  no  close  parallel,  but  cf.  h.  Cer.  429 
SpeTto^v  Ttepi  'fcdpfian  [drS-ta];  also  Find.  Pyth. 
V.  58;  Aesch.  Pers.  696.  Choe.  35.    Noteworthy 
is  III.  1257  nepi  aShei  (P  22). 

C.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
ONLY  LOCAL  IN  APOLLONIUS  AS  IN  HOMER: 

a)    With  verbs  of  motion,  chiefly  M(<r(ra>  and  dweuw. 

IV.  932  S&tylveq  .  .  .  &iaOG>vrai  rtepi  vya; 
similarly  III.  1218;  IV.  1196,  1450.— IV.  1642 
Ttepi  .  .  .  Kp>fr>7*> .  . .  ^ivevov^a^    cf.  IV.  1664. — 
I.  538  nepl  fitefAov  .  .  .  nebov   p^craoxn  nobeaoiv. 
Cf.  A  448,  M  297;  8  368?  f  308,  o  69,  etc.    Un- 
Homeric  seems  to  be  IV.  436  Sedg  nepi  wibv 
txYirai,i.e.  to  <the  neighborhood  of>  the  temple. 


-  197  - 
With  verbs  of  rest. 


III.  216 

IV.  321  itepl  Aavpiov  .  .  .  vaierdovTEs.  Cf.  B  757, 
M  177,  2  374;  i  402. 

—  Ttpog  — 

Homer  uses  xp6$  327  times  in  case-construction. 
Apollonius  has  it  only  13  times.  L,ike  the  later 
Homeric  imitators,  he  shows  a  preference  for  the 
poetic  form  nori,  which  he  uses  7  times,  against  2 
examples  of  the  other  poetic  form  Kpori  and  4  ex- 
amples (with  cases)  of  the  common  form  ^09. 
Cf.  La  Roche,  Wiener  Studien,  XXII.,  p.  49.—  In 
Homer  nori  and  irpori  are  about  equal  in  number,  and 
the  two  together  amount  to  a  little  above  one  half 
of  7zy>09.  Apollonius  did  not  use  npos  with  the  dative. 
With  the  genitive  he  has  it  only  in  entreaties  (three 
times),  and  with  the  accusative  only  in  tbe  local 
sense,  except  I.  684  (temp.).  The  Homeric  examples 
of  7T/>09  c.  ace.  with  verbs  of  speaking,  and  in  the 
hostile  sense  "against",  were  too  common  in  prose 
to  be  imitated  by  Apollonius.  His  uses  of  npos  are  : 

A.     WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 

In  entreaties:  —  II.  215  'Ixsetou  TT/>O?  Zyvos  .  .  .  AjWo/jtae; 
similarly  II.  1125;  III  984.     Cf.  A  339;  v  324,  etc. 

B.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
i.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE:  "TO"  "TOWARDS"  "UPON". 

I.  774  Py  ft  "fjLsvat  Tcpori  a<TTu;  similarly  II.  8;  III. 
322,  1154;  IV.  595,  1116,  1399.  Cf.  rn6,  J  108, 
£41;  P  342,  etc.;  also  h.  Ap.  8. 

More  noteworthy  are  the  examples  denoting,  (a) 
the  extent  "up  to"  or  "as  far  as":  II.  807  *OT\ 
(Trope*  6epfjLa>dovTo$;  and  (b)  the  direction  "  towards": 

IV.  311  nor}  poov  [dv^e^v]  .      Cf.  E  605;  At  8l,  etc.     it)  \ 
2.     IN  A  TEHPORAL  SENSE. 

I.  684  ffroyspov  XOT}  wpa?,  for  which  there  is  but 
one  example  in  Homer;  viz.  p  191  *OT\  lampa.. 


Form:  —  Morphologically  ^6  is  connected  with 
vSanskrit  upa  and  Latin  s-ub.  The  poetic  form 
bnai  occurs  seven  times  in  Apollonius,  but  only  four 
times  in  Homer. 

Meaning:  —  As  appears  from  the  adverbial  use, 
the  primary  meaning  of  0x6  is  under.  In  case-con- 
struction this  meaning  is  modified  to  denote  a)  with 
the  genitive  :  motion  from  under  or  place  under;  b) 
with  the  dative  :  position  under;  c)  with  the  accu- 
sative :  aim,  direction  or  motion  towards  and  under, 
or  extension  under.  —  The  metaphoric  usages  to 
denote  the  author,  the  cause,  the  occasion,  the  accom- 
paniment, the  instrument,  the  means  and  the  like 
are  developments  from  the  original  under,  in  a  local 
sense.  The  most  characteristic  epic  feature  of  vxo  is 
its  use  with  the  dative  to  denote  the  agent,  in  place 
of  bxo  with  the  genitive.  Since  in  prose  bn6  c.  gen. 
predominates  (Orators:  gen.  1294,  dat.  63,  ace.  26), 
Apollonius  used  it  only  thirteen  times  with  this  case, 
and  in  these  thirteen  examples  we  find,  as  a  further 
offset  to  prose,  the  form  final  six  times.  Noteworthy 
is  also  the  post-  Homeric  &xo  voxrl  (at  night),  which 
seems  to  have  started  with  Aesch.  Ag.  1030  V 


A.     WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 
i.     IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE. 

(a)  Motion  "away  from  under":  —  I.  10 
ov]  egeadvaev  vn'  favo$.  P  235;  5  39,  etc. 
Place  "under":—  II.  106  vno  wepvoio... 
II.  667  ofifiara  oe  a<pcv  \  ho£a  napa- 
vno  %vyov.  II.  743  novtoio  &'  vno 
IV.  1611  vnal  hayovw, 
similarly  IV.  1644  vnal  .  .  .  re^o^rog,  "under 
the  tendon".  Of.  A  106,  A  14,  $  15,  etc, 


-  199  — • 

2.    IN  A  METAPHORIC  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

(a)  The  agent: — IV.  641  Tta/l^rpoTto 
$7to;     similarly    II.    847    Movoeuv 

Cf.  n  434;  r  114,  etc. 
(/?)     The    cause: — II.    1232    vrtai 
aveiioioteiveto;  also  III.  969.  Cf.A423,T358,etc. 
(y)  The  accompaniment: — 1. 538  ^dp^tuyyog 
i>7iou,  "to  the    accompaniment   of    the    lyre"; 
similarly  IV.  1157,  1192.  Cf.  0  275,  2  492;  also 
h.  XIX.  15;    Hes.  Sc.  278;   Arist.  Ach.  1001. 

B.     WITH  THE  DATIVE. 
i.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE: 

(a)   Of  rest  or  position:  "under"  or  "in": — 

I.  388   vno   rpoTtifa  .  .  .  arevd^ovvo   tpdhayyss; 
cf.  also  I.  544,  956,  957, 1262;  II  681,  707,  732, 
797, 1086;  III.  39, 119,  221,  287,  296,  371, 1023; 
IV.  137,  313,  676,  765, 922, 944, 982, 1107, 1528. 
For  Homer   compare  B  307,  A  44,  P  371,  etc. 

(/:?)  Of  motion  implying  subsequent  rest 
(constructio  praegnans).  II.  512  Xetpco^og  vn' 
aivtpoiGiv  xofieeaSar,  cf.  Ill  281,  IV.  1261, 1522; 
Homer  X  482;  8  297,  etc. 

2.    IN  A  flETAPHORIC  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

a)   The  agent 
I.  794  vrt  dvfydai  vaistai  ourri;;  cf.  further 

II.  783;  III.  469,  1342;  IV.  1398,  1758;  Homer 
E  646;  7  235,  305,  etc.— Here  belongs  II.  788 

vno  narol  ^axcrcrev  xal  ^>aj;  cf,  Z  453. 


2OO  — 


b}  The  cause,  instrument  or  means. 
I.  114  vTt*  zipeaiYiGw  sneLprjGavro 
cf.  II.  586. — I.  272  vnb  fi^pvi^  fiiotov  fiapvv 
fiyyi^d^ei.  1.815  (tYirpviyjg  vnb  %£paiv  draaSd^loi;; 
cf.1.1303;  III.  1226;  IV.  1369.— 1. 1308  xivvtai 
Yixtfev'tos  vnb  nvoiYi  /3op£ao;  cf.  II.  727. — II.  26 
&ore  hew  vn  dxovn  vevvfiftevos.  II.  117  ^TJGXT- 
eaSai  vnb  Zifysi',  similarly  vnb  8ovpi  II.  139;  III. 
416,  1186,  1329,  vno  Sovpaat  111.321,1374;  vnb 
III.  353,  395;  IV.  1176.— II.  1013 
vTt  avfydtfi  rsxva  yvvalx8$;  cf.  B  714, 
728, 742, 820,  etc.  II.  1109  c^poi^'  vnb 
IV.  269  7tora^6$  ...  (3  vno  ndaa  \  dp^er 
IV.  1733  ap^cr^at  favxriGiv  vnal  hifidbsaai.  Of. 
B  374,  T  352,  A  291,  E  555,  653,  Z  139,  A  433, 
N  590,  n  384;  v  81,  etc.  Examples  of  the  inner 
cause  are:  I.  7=11.  1112, 1169  vn  evveaiyai]  cf. 
h.  Cer.  39.  The  simple  dative  occurs  in  I.  956; 
III.  29,  478,  818,  942;  IV.  644,  772, 1443,  etc.— 
1. 263  bhoti  vno  yripq.  1. 443 aw/spy  vno  8ai[iovo$ 
alay.  II.  71  vno  .  .  .  (Spm?.  II.  558  W  d^coy^. 

II.  1059  axv&lv  vnb  &t>art;  cf.  IV.  53, 1009.— 

III.  3  vn  Ipcort;  cf.  IV.  567;  also  III.  971  $&cy- 
^aa^at  vno  nvoiyaiv  vEp6>ro$. — III.  702  xaxy 
vnb  xYipi.    IV.  193  xovpyg  vnb  tyveGi.    Cf.  N  667; 
X  136,  etc.     Also  Eurip.  Med.  8. 

c}    The  accompaniment. 

I.  540  vn  30p<£>>7og  x&dpy.    Homer  has  no 
example  of  the  accompaniment  of  a  musical 


—  201  — 

instrument;  but  compare  the  examples  of  the 

attendant  circumstances  in  Z  171;  8  402,  77 193, 

etc.  For  a  closer  parallel  compare  Hes.  Sc.  283. 

d)   The  time.      This  use  is  post- Homeric. 

I.  1022,  1038;   III.  323,  1360;  IV.  1682 
vno  vvxti;  cf.  Aesch.  Ag.  1030. 

A.     WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
i.    IN  A  LOCAL  SENSE  TO  DENOTE: 

a)  Motion  or  aim  "towards  or  under." 

II.  113  vno  %6vyv  Sope  ^otfjcog;  cf.  also  II. 
587;  III.  1321,  1368,  IV.  1062.  Cf.  E  67,0  271; 
v  578,  etc,     A  figurative  local  sense  is  seen  in 
I.  452  Seiefavov  xhivovro$  vno  (^ofyov  YI&IOIO;  cf. 
*P  51;  x  191,  etc.     Without  Homeric  parallels 
are:  III.  288  fidhhev  vn9  Aloovi8rjv  dftapvyfiara. 

III.  675  vno  <pphag  hero  nevSo?,  cf.  III.  1403.— 

IV.  39  iiGiv  .  .  .  %ahsnd$  vno  %tlpa$  dracrcr^g. 
&)  Position  "under"  or  "in" ;  like  bno  c.  dat. 

I.  50  fiiftvsv  vno  GxotiYiv  opeog.  I.  509  vaieG- 
xev  vno  aneo$;  cf.  I.  102;  II.  371,  570,1236;  III. 
278,  762;  IV.  1474.  Homer  e  B  603;  G>  234,  etc. 

2.     IN  A  TEMPORAL  SENSE. 

I.  587, 1186;  II.  1034;  IV.  590  vno  xve<f>a$, 
"toward  dusk".  1.1160  vno  Seiehov,  "toward 
evening".  II.  1122;  IV.  458  vv%&  vno  hvyairiv. 
Cf.  n  202,  X  102  (the  only  examples  in  Homer); 
also  Arist.  Ach.  139,  1076;  Xen.  Ana.  II.  2, 14 
and  IV.  5,  9. 


202  — 


CHAPTER  VI. 

PREPOSITIONS    IN    ADVERBIAL 
PHRASES. 

As  a  supplement  to  the  prepositions  in  case- construction 
may  be  regarded  the  prepositions  in  adverbial  phrases,  where 
the  adverb  assumes  the  nature  of  a  substantive.  Cf .  Kriiger- 
Pokel,  P.  L,  Sec.  66,  A.  3-4 ;  P.  II.,  Sec.  66,  A.  1-2 

The  following  examples  occur  in  Apollonius  : 

"With  *irC :  —  I.  516;  IV.  728  eVi  5jv.  According  to  Ruther- 
ford, New  Phrynichus.  p.  121,  M  d^v  is  an  "unintelligent" 
imitation  of  the  Homeric  M  8rjp6v  (  !  ?  ).  As  a  matter  of  fact, 
M  dijpbv  occurs  only  once  in  Homer  (I  415),  but  seven  times 
in  Apollonius  (I.  615,  870,  1072  ;  II.  519,  759;  III.  949,  1048.) 
—  !•  J359  ;  IV.  1527  MrvT06v.  III.  1145;  IV.  1316  eVl  T6<r<ro*'; 
cf.  T  12  ;  e  251.— IV.  1335  M  na.Kp6v :  cf.  9  160;  £  117.— II.  942 
M  Trportpwcre.  I.  661  tiri  7ro\\6v;  cf.  II.  439  irepuro\\6v. —  More 
interesting  is  II.  428  eVl  5£  o-xe56»/,  which  evidently  is  tmesis  for 
^7rt-(rxe56v  ( II.  492,  606 ;  IV.  1108,  1185,  1348,  etc).  Compare 
5t&  5'  afJLTrepts  (A  377,  P  309;  0  422  )  for  5t-a/x7re/>& ;  £K  5'  6vo/jt.a- 
K\^drjv  (  d  278  )  for  e^-ovofJLdKXrid'rfv  ;  dta  5'  Mix*  (  Hes.  Op.  13  ) 
for  didvdixa-  In  this  connection  may  be  mentioned  a  very 
curious  example  from  Apollonius  ;  viz.,  III.  joo<rti>  re  dp^a-Tfipa 
ir{\e<r0ai,  where  the  scholiast  takes  crtv  in  tmesis  with  the  noun 
and  explains  o-uv-Sp^o-reipa  by  <rvv-epy6s  "  co-helper."* 

With  IK:  — I.    1078;  II.   533;  IV.  623  tic  5e  rtttv,  cf.  IV  431 

£  o5  and  the  Homeric  e*£eVi  TOU,  6re  (  I  106  ). 
s:  — I.  1138  €v0ev  ts   aiei;  II.  718  els  altv.     Cf.  Aesch. 
Pro.  732,  Bum.  836;  Soph.  Aj.  570. —  IV.   1313  els  krtpuvt. 

With  ptTbi  —  I.  624  /<ie0'  tfcrrepov,  cf.  h.  Merc.  126;  also  ts 
for<-pov(n  126).  II.  653  otf  /uerA  drj6d ;  II.  451,  881,  1288;  III. 
955  ou  /xera  5^p6v,  with  which  compare  the  synonymous  phrase 
dtjp6v  5'  ov  /xer^Treira  ( II.  1259;  III.  1329;  also  8319;  K  519  ). 

*  Cf.  p.  48- 


—  203  — 

rd:  — II.  192;  IV.  1090,  1172  dirk  ryXov.  Cf.  i  117. 
'A?rd  TTjXou  might  also  be  written  as  one  word  ;  cf.  /car'  afa-60i  ^nd 
Karavr6ffL.  This  last  word  deserves  special  attention  on  account 
of  Rutherford's  note  in  the  New  Phrynichus,  p.  121 ;  viz. 
"Any  freak  of  diction  may  be  expected  in  a  writer  like  Ap. 
Rh  ,  who  at  an  age,  when  Greek  had  already  lost  all 
its  great  qualities,  attempted  to  write  in  an  old  style  which  he 
little  understood.  He  naturally  makes  even  more  blunders 
than  are  found  in  modern  attempts  to  imitate  classical  styles, 
and  by  misunderstanding  the  facts  of  tmesis  in  Homer  has 
been  led  to  use  many  forms  intrinsically  absurd.  In  II.  X. 
273  (3av  p'  Uvat,  \Lir^rf]v  d£  /car'  avrbQi  irdvras  apt&Tovs,  the  Kard  be- 
longs to  Xurtryv,  but  in  Apollonius  KaravrdOt  unblushingly 
takes  the  place  of  the  simple  atfT60i;  cf.  II.  778."  That  this 
criticism  is  unmerited,  the  Argonautica  itself  is  the  best  proof. 
The  fact  that  in  six  passages  /car'  has  to  be  taken  with  atirbOi, 
written  also  KaravrdBi*  is  not  so  bad  as  Rtitherford  tried  to 
make  it.  In  Hotner  we  have  a  good  parallel  in  ^  147  nap1 
avr60L  fj,7}\'  iepeTLHTew  &  Tr-rjyds,  where  Trap'  can  hardly  be  in  tmesis 
with  the  verb,  but  it  is  to  be  taken  with  the  adverb,  or  rather 
it  itself  is  adverbial,  emphasizing  the  other  adverb  avroOi,  with 
which  later  it  blends  into  one  word.  Moreover,  that  Apol- 
lonius recognized  icard  to  be  in  tmesis  in  K  273,  seems  to 
appear  from  his  own  examples,  in  which  Kard  is  in  tmesis 
with  the  verb,  although  standing  immediately  before  afa-60i  ( I. 
1356;  II.  894  ;  III.  648,  888;  IV.  298),  aWi  ( I.  1079;  II.  530  ) 
or  atfroO  ( I.  565 ). 

That  differences  in  the  diction  of  Apollonius  and  Homer  exist 
is  quite  natural.  There  are  stylistic  differences,  and  great  ones 
at  that,  even  in  the  Iliad  and  Odyssey,  as  they  are  in  the  early 
and  late  writings  of  every  individual  writer.  Hence  it  should 
not  be  surprising  if  an  imitative  writer  does  not  reproduce  his 
model  perfectly.  Apollonius,  imbued  with  the  spirit  of  his 
contemporaries,  was  a  scholar  rather  than  a  poet,  and  in  tiie 
field  of  Homeric  studies  he  produced  undoubtedly  the  most 
creditable  work  of  his  age. 


—  204  — 
CONCLUSION. 

The  purpose  of  this  thesis  has  been  to  show  how 
closely  Apollonius  reproduced  the  Homeric  usages  of 
the  prepositions.  The  investigation  proved  to  be  a 
source  of  constantly  growing  interest  on  account  of 
the  striking  similarities  in  the  two  writers  on  the 
whole  and  the  intentional  differences  or  deviations 
of  the  latter  from  the  former  in  detail.  It  is  indeed 
astonishing  to  find  a  writer  of  the  Alexandrian  Epos 
so  well  versed  in  the  Homeric  idiom  with  all  its 
peculiarities  of  form  and  meaning,  without  the  aid  of 
a  Gehring  or  Ebeling ;  but  still  more  surprising  is  it 
that  Apollonius,  after  having  thoroughly  mastered 
the  Homeric  language,  did  not  remain  a  slavish 
imitator.  His  aim  in  telling  the  often- told  story  of 
the  Argonauts  was  not  to  make  a  cento.  It  was 
rather  to  write  a  poem  that  should  be  epic  in  coloring, 
but  at  the  same  time  intelligible  to  his  readers  and  in 
keeping  with  their  taste.  This  demanded  judicious 
selection.  Forms,  uses  and  words  that  would  seem 
too  strange,  and  were  of  so  rare  occurrence  in  Homer 
as  scarcely  to  merit  the  name  of  being  Homeric,  had 
to  be  discarded ;  others  had  to  be  avoided  because, 
being  adopted  into  the  later  language,  they  had 
become  too  prosaic  for  the  elevated  diction  of  epic 
poetry.  The  others  were  to  be  imitated  with  the 
risk  of  going  to  excess.  That  Apollonius  should  keep 
here  a  perfect  equilibrium  would  be  expecting  too 
much.  That  things  inconsistant  with  Homeric  usage, 
and  even  incongruous  in  the  eyes  of  one  who  knows 
the  history  of  Greek  Syntax  should  occasionally  occur 
was  unavoidable  ;  but  I  hope  to  have  shown  in  this 
thesis  that  Apollonius  is  far  from  deserving  what 
Rutherford  says  of  him  in  the  New  Phrynichus,  p. 
121.  Separated,  though  he  was,  from  Homer  by 
a  long  line  of  eminent  writers,  who  mark  so  many 
stages  in  the  evolution  of  the  Greek  language, — stand- 
ing altogether  outside  of  the  period  of  the  Classic 


—  205  — 

Literature  of  the  Greeks,  and  living  in  Alexandria, 
when  that  city  had  become  the  centre  of  a  new  kind 
of  literary  activity,  viz.,  that  of  imitation  and  artifi- 
ciality rather  than  of  invention  and  originality, — 
Apollonius  admirably  acquitted  himself  of  his  task  by 
reflecting  the  Homeric  diction.  The  Argon autica  is 
a  masterpiece  of  systematic  industry,  even  though  it 
lacks  the  quickening  spark  of  the  genius  of  Homer ; 
and  it  fully  shows  that  the  Homeric  language  was 
under  his  discerning  eye  not  petrified  or  dead  ;  but 
was  living,  organic,  capable  of  further  development 
and  productive  of  new  words.  It  is  this  quality, 
more  than  anything  else,  that  gives  the  work  of 
Apollonius  the  stamp  of  a  strong  personality,  and 
makes  it  especially  interesting  from  a  linguistic  point 
of  view.  If  Apollonius  had  not  understood  his  proto- 
type, Homer,  we  should  expect  to  find  in  his  work  a 
strange  mixture  of  poetic  and  prosaic  usages.  The 
Argonautica,  however,  testifies  to  a  clear  conception 
of  purely  poetic  and  prosaic  constructions.  In 
general,  the  prepositions  which  are  less  frequent  in 
Apollonius  than  in  Homer  are  prosaic;  e.  g.  xard  xapdy 
7cp6,  Kpos.  With  the  utmost  care  Apollonius  avoided 
also  those  particular  usages  of  prepositions  that  were 
essentially  prosaic.  Thus  perd  with  the  genitive  is 
entirely  absent  from  the  Argonautica ;  7^09  is  rare 
(not  once  with  the  dative);  and  no  trace  of  the 
articular  infinitive  with  prepositions  is  found.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  more  poetic  prepositions,  as  «w«', 
«wz,  GUV,  and  also  the  double  prepositions  8t£x,  napi* 
and  MX  are  comparatively  frequent  in  Apollonius. 
Likewise  he  uses  el$  with  the  person  in  the  singular 
and  nerd  c.  ace.  in  the  same  usage  more  frequenuy 
than  Homer.  Also  post  position  and  the  adverbial 
use  of  prepositions  gain  in  the  Argonautica. 


206  — 


SYNOPTIC  TABI,E  OF  AU,  THE  USES  OF  THE  PREPOSITIONS 
IN  APOI^ONIUS. 


I. 
Adverbial. 

II. 

In  Tmesis. 

III. 
With  Cases 

IV. 
In  Ad.  Phr. 

Total. 

d/Ji<f)[ 

20 

7 

69 

0 

96 

dvd 

0 

28 

55 

0 

83 

dvri 

0 

0 

3 

0 

3 

fat* 

0 

21 

69 

3 

93 

did 

0 

11 

65 

0 

76 

els 

0 

3 

165 

3 

171 

CK 

0 

31 

163 

4 

198 

€V 

15 

17 

298 

0 

330 

€TTi 

7 

36 

292 

17 

352 

Kard 

0 

19 

88 

0 

107 

(JL€Td 

14 

4 

83 

6 

107 

TTCLpd 

2 

5 

40 

0 

47 

TT€pL 

23 

9 

60 

0 

92 

irpb 

7 

0 

2 

0 

9 

Trpos 

4 

1 

13 

0 

18 

fftiv 

10 

7 

65 

0 

82 

virep 

0 

2 

44 

0 

46 

virb 

0 

0 

119 

0 

119 

airoirpb 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

3ltK 

0 

1 

21 

0 

22 

§LO,irpb 

1 

0 

0 

0 

1 

€wnrp6 

11 

0 

0 

0 

11 

irap^K 

5 

1 

11 

0 

17 

irepiirpd 

1 

0 

0 

0 

1 

irpbirap 

0 

0 

2 

0 

2 

Trpoirp6 

2 

0 

1 

0 

3 

VTT^K 

0 

1 

13 

0 

14 

VTT€KTTp6 

0 

1 

0 

0 

1 

vwoirp6 

0 

0 

1 

0 

1 

f  TTCpL    T' 

\  dfjL<f>i  re 

2 

0 

1 

0 

3 

Total. 

124 

205 

1743 

33 

2105 

If  we  include  in  this  list  the  five  examples  in 
which  the  preposition  is  used  in  a  pregnant  sense, 
i.  e.  as  a  compound  verb  (ava  IV.  1322,^  I,  494  and 
Ttdpa  IV.  1260,  1272,  1553)  we  have  in  all  2110 
prepositions  in  the  Argonautica. 


-  207  — 

INDEX. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 5 

PREFACE 9 

INTRODUCTION. 11 

CHAPTER  I.: — The  Improper  or  Pseudo-Prepositions. . .  17 

A.  With  the  Genitive 20 

B.  With  the  Dative 32 

C.  With  the  Accusative 33 

D.  With  the  Genitive  and  Dative 34 

E.  With  the  Genitive  and  Accusative 35 

CHAPTER  II.: — Prepositions  Used  as  Adverbs 37 

Table  Showing  their  Frequency  in  Apol.  and  in  Homer.  38 

&H>C 39 

Siairpo , 40 

€v 40 

carC 41 

envirpo 42 

fX€Ta ,.,..., 42 

irapd,  7rap€K 43 

™pt   v  • 44 

ircpC  T   dp.cjn  T6 45 

irepurpo,  irpo,   irpoirpo 46 

TPOS 47 

<™v 47 

Prepositions  Equivalent  to  Compound  Verbs 49 

CHAPTER  III.:— Prepositions  Used  in  Tmesis 51 

Table  Showing  their  Frequency  in  Apol.  and  in  Homer  59 

CL|1<(>C 60 

dvd 6 1 

OLTTO 63 

8id 65 

8i€K , 66 

iv , 70 

€ir£ 71 

«*s 73 

Kara 73 

K-€T<x 75 

irapa,  iraplic 76 

irepC 76 

Tpos 77 

<rvv 77 

vtrcp 78 

VIT^K 78 

vir€Kirp6 79 

Summary  of  Prepositions  in  Tmesis 79 


—  208  — 

CHAPTER   IV.:—  Why   Prepositions    in    Case-Con- 

struction are  Rarer  in  Poetry  than  in  Prose  .......  81 

A.  SIMPLE  CASES  TO  EXPRESS  LOCAL  RELATIONS  .......    82 

1)  Local  Genitive  ..................................  82 

2)  Ablatival  Genitive  ...............................  83 

3)  Locative  Dative  ...........  ............  ...........  87 

4)  The  Accusative  of  the  Goal  .......  ......  ..........  89 

B.  SUFFIXES     -4fV     AND     -€i     TO     EXPRESS     LOCAL 

RELATIONS.  ...............  .........  .    91 

1  )  Forms  in  4n>  ....................................  91 

2  )  Forms  in  -8«  .............................  .  92 

CHAPTER  V.:-  Prepositions  in  Case-Construction  .......  95 

General  Tables  of  Statistics  ..............   ....  ......  97 

I.    PREPOSITIONS  WITH  ONE  CASE  ......................  IO$ 

A.   With  the  Genitive,  ......................  .VL..u>5 


105 
ir*  ..............................................  1  06 

JK  ..........................................  .....ii,. 

wpd,  irfxSirap,  irpowpd,  vwo-rfxS  ..........  •••••••••••..119 

(nrfic  .............................................  120 

B.  With  the  Dative  ...........................  .  .  .  .  ..121 

fr  ................................................  121 

e*vv  It6 

C.  With  the  I  Accusative.  ....!!!  !!!!!!!!!!!!  !!!!**"'.".I39 

«u  ...............................................  139 

«p(T  A|4(rt  .....................................  147 

ii.  PREPOSITIONS  WITH  TWO  CASES  (Gen.  and  Ace,  )  .  .  .  .  148 

6i<i  ..............................................  148 

SUic  ..............................................  151 

•card.  .............................................  152 

......................  157 

158 
III.    PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THREE  CASES  ................  l6l 

Af4<  .............................................  161 

dvd  .............................................  166 

.  ......  ........  170 

**S 
189 

193 


197 

198 


CHAPTER  VI.:—  Prepositions  in  Adverbial  Phra  es  ......  202 

CONCLUSION  ...................  .£,..  .................  204 

TABLE  OP  ALL  THE  PRWDSlfldNS  IN  APOLLONIUS.  .206 
* 


ERRATA. 


On    page    6,   1.   17,  and  page   38,  1.  4,  read   ttrl   for  eirl 

and  €TTL  respectively. 
On  page  45,  1.  26,  read  irepl  for  irepi. 
On  page  46,  1.  20  and  2  1  ,  read  ydp  for  7&/>. 
On  page  68,  1.  7,  read  cfrptves  for  0/><^es. 
On  page  72,  1.  24  read  eiri-ppaxw  for  e7ri-/3pdxw. 
On  page  81,  1.  16  read  heutzutage  for  heutzatage. 
On  page  103,  1.  28,  read  UTT^C  for  vptit. 
On  page  105,  1.  24,  read  Xnrovcra  for  yi7roO(ra. 
On  page  112,  1.  17,  read  TTO\^OIO  for  TreX^uoio. 
On  page  136,  1.  15,  read  preponderance  f  or  preponderence  . 
On  page  138,  1.  22,  read  avrots  for  arirois,  and  1.  24, 


On  page  139,  1.  6,  read  *Aeu0os  for  K€\ev6os. 

On  page  144,  1.  4,  read  ai/rd*>  for  avvbv,  and  1.  25,  -^7'  for  %  yl. 

On  page   158,  1.  10,  read  perspective  for  prospective,  and 

.1.  28,  read  ace,  31  for  331. 

On  page  204,  1.  29,  read  inconsistent  for  inconsistant  '. 
On  page  205,  1.  33,  read  frequently  for  frequenuy  -. 


RETURN     CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 

202  Main  Library 


LOAN  PERIOD  1 
HOME  USE 

r  '  

2 

3 

5 

6 

n 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

Renewals  and  Recharges  may  be  made  4  days  prior  to  the  due  date. 

Books  may  be  Renewed  by  calling     642-3405. 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


mil  118  DEC  2  2198 


FORM  NO.  DD6, 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELE 
BERKELEY,  CA  94720 


U.C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES    YB  OQ345 


5424 


:.*^-"  , 


